P. 1
Exclusive Sap Basis Training eBook

Exclusive Sap Basis Training eBook

|Views: 780|Likes:
Published by sryalla

More info:

Published by: sryalla on Jan 28, 2012
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

08/15/2013

pdf

text

original

1 15-jul-11

SAP BASIS

2

SAP BASIS Consider the following example [EMAIL or RAILWAY] For Email - It requires a PC and an Application installed in it.

Yahoo/

Google

1. Client requests 2. The request is processed by an interface 3. The request reaches server 4. The server process the request 5. Response back to the user either {Ticket/ Email} This environment is called as a Client/ Server Architecture.

3

R/2 Client-Server 1. Client provides an interface to communicate with the server. Eg: IE, GUI 2. Client uses DB Client software to communicate with server 3. Each request is processed by communicating with server only I.e. there is no intermediate layer in R/2 4. Servers are heavily loaded/ traffic, long queues there by reducing the performance of the servers. 5. There is no queuing mechanism and only server queues are maintained. 6. Server needs to process the request (Understanding the user language). Interpretation takes time. These are the disadvantages of R/2 Systems.

Client Server Environment: Client requests and server responds. The major disadvantage of Client Server architecture is 1. DB Client is installed on the client 2. Processing takes place at client side 3. No intermediate buffers for the frequently accessed content 4. There is no queue mechanism to handle the requests there by servers are heavily loaded. 5. The server side processing consumes resources to process (Interpret the user requests) The need of middle layer/ tier rose to come out of the steps. The result is the Application layer/ Server Application server is deployed and it provides the following functionality 1. DB Client is installed to free up the clients (i.e. there will be only one DB Client for Application server earlier each client needs DB Client software) 2. There is a queue mechanism to handle the request there by reducing the load on the client and server. 3. User requests are served based on the FIFO using dispatcher. 4. Work process task handlers are used to interpret and process the request.

4 5. Intermediate buffers are available for the frequently accessed content to reduce the load on the Database server. 6. The server side processing is only takes place for new requests there by server resources are optimally used. Need for the Middle Layer: R/3 Architecture

The advantages of deploying Application Layer: It is the Intermediate layer in between the Client and the Server. It is installed with a database client to communicate with the database server i.e. all the clients are freed with DB Clients.

Application server/ layer handle the request and process them based on FIFO (First in and First out). It has its own queue mechanism to process the user request. It also contains the task interpreters to interpret the user request and route it to the server.

5 It is intelligent to store the frequently accessed data thereby reducing the load on the server.

R/3 Architecture: SAP uses the industry specific 3-Layer Architecture and named it as R/3 Architecture. It consists of three 3 Layers 1. Presentation Server/ Layer/ Tier 2. Application Server 3. Database Layer

1. Presentation Server: It is a client for all the SAP Solutions. It is also referred as SAPGUI. There are three 3 types of SAP GUI 1. SAP GUI for windows (On Windows OS) 2. SAP GUI for JAVA 3. SAPGUI for HTML (On all OS where JAVA is supported) (for web based)

SAP provides various versions of GUI (4.6c, 620, 640, 700, 710 and 720) 2. Application Server: It is used to handle the user request and process them to the database. It has dispatcher to process and monitor the user request, work process to process and interpret the requests, Buffer areas to store the frequently accessed data. It absorbs the load both from Client and the server. 3. Database server/ layer/ tier: It is the area where the complete data resides. It has its own queue, process, buffers, and request handling mechanism. Most of the databases are on Oracle. SAP is pushing MAXDB (without any license key), Microsoft SQL Server & IBM DB2 with discounted prizes. SAP is focusing SMB (Small Mid-sized Business) and promoting SAP for nearly 1 million/ Rs. 10 Lakhs/ per customer.

6 Supporting Platforms: SAP can be installed on Microsoft windows 2000, win2k3 (2008 is under evaluation). It can be installed on 32bit or 64bit operating systems. 64 bit means a single process can serve the user with 4GB RAM/ Memory whereas in 32 bit it is 1.9GB Memory. 264, 232 / 8 bytes. HP UNIX and ORACLE HP UNIX ORACLE AIX and ORACLE IBM Specific operating system with version 5.3 technical (TL) level 7 (TL7) AIX and DB/2 Proprietary of IBM gives more mileage. Both provided by IBM ISERIES/ AS400 with DB/2 This is also IBM specific which provides more consistency, reliability, mileage than any other operating system and database. Sun OS (SOLARIS with ORACLE) LINUX (SUSE, RHL (RED HAT LINUX) and ORACLE LINUX) Note: Linux with MaxDB is supported by SAP and provides more leverage (Finance) Microsoft windows and SQL Server This is the best combination for interactive usage 11.23 9.2.0.6 / 10.2.0.4

7 Installation of Presentation Server (SAPGUI) Use presentation server DVD and go to the respective OS win32 and run setupall.exe and follow the onscreen instructions.  Saplogon icon is installed on the desktop.  Double click and enter the entries of the application server Launch saplogon icon and click on New Item Enter the Description Application Server SID System No 16-jul-09

BASIS 1. It provides runtime to SAP Applications 2. Basis is a layer where all the applications reside 3. Basis provides the infrastructure to manage, monitor, and administer the SAP Applications Eg: Basis provides User Management Business process Monitoring Role based Security Performance Gauge etc.

Three 3 Tier/ Layer/ Server Architecture 1. Presentation Server 2. Application Server 3. Database Server

1. Presentation Server It is an SAP GUI. It is of 3 types SAPGUI for windows, HTML and JAVA. It is used to establish connection with SAP Application Server based on the name of the application server, Instance Number, SID etc.

BI and SRM) 2. XI. specify the language during logon.exe and follow the onscreen instructions. Double click and enter the entries of the application server Launch saplogon icon and click on New Item Enter the Description Application Server SID System No Click on logon Advantages of Presentation Server: 1. Same GUI is allowed to login with different languages 3. Single GUI to access all the SAP Applications (ERP. startup transactions . GUI is user friendly to create favorites.e.8 Installation of Presentation Server (SAPGUI) Use presentation server DVD and go to the respective OS win32 and run setupall. Saplogon icon is installed on the desktop. CRM. SCM. We can login with our logon language i.

620. 640. GUI is downward compatible to support all the SAP Applications which are below the gui version. To provide default values for a user while creating a Sales order. plant.0 can handle 7. Steps: I.10 but 7.0 cannot support the component that are built on 7. User parameters are defined for the frequently keyed in content.From Tools – Administration SU01 .To create Favorites Login .. 5. 46D.9 . Eg: A user belonging to the sales organization. 45A etc.Set startup transaction 4. Execute VA01 (Sales order creation) Select the value for sales organisation by pressing F4 Click on sales organisation field and press F1 and click on technical settings Note the parameter ID .00. Example: GUI 7.To setup startup transactions From menu Extras . sales area should get all the values by default while creating sales order (VA01) etc. division.From Menu Favorites > Add .

It provides access across the low speed connections and displays the screens without graphics/ logo which consume more network traffic. 10. Execute SU01 . It gets the information from the Message server. Now whenever the user executes the transaction VA01 it will be filled with the default values with 0001 and 01 for Sales organization and Distribution channel respectively there by reducing the user tasks. 2. GUI entries are controlled by using saplogon.Edit the user . It provides command window to navigate to the respective functionality and minimizes dialogue steps.ini/ sapmsg.ini These files reside in windows directory i.Copying provides all the parameters .From Parameters Tab .10 Repeat the same for Distribution Channel and Division. Goto Windows directory Saplogon.ini/ saproute. 8.ini . User can be specified with 1. we can configure one GUI and copy the files to the other systems easily.e. (Low Speed/ High Speed) 9. SAP GUI is intelligent to determine the least loaded server when more than one instance is configured. 6. SAP Easy access Menu to reduce the load on the request processing (Roll Area) 7. Role based menu or with 2.Provide PID and VKO Value 0001 Save the data.

. 2. . 12. There will be only one instance in the entire system. The character set can be changed to suite various languages and printers. Database Instance 1. Dialogue Instance. SAP Provides various shortcuts window /n to open window from existing window and /o to open a new window /ex to exit the screen. 2. In SAP naming convention we define them as an Instance and it is possible to install more than one instance on a single server provided they are differentiated by the instance number. SAP Provides ergonomically designed to configure GUI font size. 2. Dialogue Instance These are the instances which are used to handle the load on the central instances. Instances is of various types 1. 3. Instance number is a 2 digit number that varies between [00 to 97] 98 and 99 are reserved for routing purposes.500 users depending upon the type of the users. Central Instance. colors and visual design etc. 3. GUI provides default menus (System. Application Server It is a physical server which is used to handle and process the user request. 13. Help). We can install as many instances as possible assuming that each instance can serve up to 200 .11 11. 14. Central Instance This is the Instance where Application Server/ Tier/ Layer are installed. Database Instance This is the Instance where database is installed.

32/64 bit dependent) \usr\sap\SID\sys\exe Start .str .bck Sapappl0. Select BNAME from SAPSR3.log Sapinst_dev.cmd file and during the process they writes into .Run .12 Kernel Set of Executables (OS.also provides similar log in case of installation is aborted . (database users) (Sap Users) SAP K E R DB OS Kernel Provides communication between SAP. DB and the OS. .tsk.Structure of the DB Control.xml -Helps to restart installation from the point where it is failed.sqlplus "/as sysdba" Select username from dba_users. Unicode.log file Eg: Sasapappl0.tsk file specifies the table/ index etc that needs to be created on the DB.xml Keydb.USR02. Usr\sap\<SID>\sys\exe\uc\NT1386 Installation Logs Sapinst. Each task is commanded by .tsk Sapappl0.log Sapappl0.log . DB.cmd Sapappl0.Specifies the installation success / failure .

AD Admin . (This problems occurs in a Domain) If the user does not exist it creates now. 2. ORA<SID> provide the runtime environment for Database.Can create the userid Note: The user who initiates the installation should have the privileges as Local administrator to install the software. assign groups. On Windows OS <SID>ADM is also responsible for database but on UNIX ORA<SID> is the owner to work on the database. create services etc.sap. create groups. Extracts the software.13 WHAT HAPPENS DURING INSTALLATION? 1. Sapinst tool is used to install the software if required we need to download it from service.com/swdc 3.. Windows App Server <SID>ADM UNIX App Server <SID>ADM Database ORA<SID> Database <SID>ADM . create users. Checks for user <SID>ADM (SAP System Administrator) Who owns SAP System and has all the privileges on SAP (Start/ Stop/ Environment) Domain Admin.

Domain Level Local groups . SAPCCMSR is an agent to collect JARM (Java Application response time Management) and pass it to ABAP CCMS (Computing Center Monitoring System) It is only used in JAVA and ABAP stack. SAPOSCOL. SAP<SID>_01. SAPOSCOL is started first to check whether the resources are available (Operating system collector) It is used to collect the OS Utilization information and pass into SAP system. It creates Services SAP<SID>_00.Locally SAP_LocalAdmin SAP_SOL_GlobalAdmin SAP_SOL_LocalAdmin 6.DB Dependent .14 Note: SAPSERVICE<SID> is a service used to start and stop the services (Password never expires) <SID>ADM expires for every 30 days Eg: SAPOSCOL. from Computer Management -> Local Users and Computers we can view this Users Groups Services Creating directories Executables . It creates local groups and global groups and assigns them to users Global groups . if the service is not started SAP will not start. SAPSID-Instance Number 5. SAP<SID> is used to start the SAP System.OS Dependent . SAPCCMSR are created and Run with user.

29769 ABAP related tables.str and data on the exports 10. Query: Select count(*) from dba_tables where owner = 'SAPSR3'.Master password is set accordingly to the company policy . 7. 12. DB Users are set with default password and SAP Application open RFC Connection.Extract Kernel Executables (OS. these users owns the respective databases. Creates the tablespaces and datafiles on DDLORA. The task files are created to create the tables and load the entries The task files are displayed as process on the installation screen "2 complete 3 running 4 waiting" 11.Installation Successful -- .TPL Tablespaces are just like almirah in a house. Upon running all the tasks the SAP Database is created and DBStatistics runs.15 Note: . Creates the Database and runs the scripts 8. DB) . Select count(*). Now command files are created pointing to .e. 9. --.Create MMC for Windows to start/ stop sap system From cmd prompt Startsap name=SID Sets the user as nr=00 SAPDIAHOST=willsys28 SAPSR3 for ABAP SAPSR3DB for Java Engine Where the systems are installed with these schema owners i. owner from dba_tables group by owner..

Set the virtual memory to 20 GB on windows 9. Solman Key 30. Provide Master Password 23. Execute sapinst. Ensure the installation ports 21212 and 21213 are kept open 12. Dump the software into system without any spaces in the directories 14.com/swdc) 4. Install JRE 1. Installation Directories D:\usr\sap \USR directory is created with a shared folder SAP with shared SAPMNT & SAPLOC Eg: SAPMNT: SAPLOC: \\<hostname>\sapmnt ~ d:\usr\sap Both in Win and UNIX Only in Windows not in UNIX . Exports path 25.sap. Provide DB SID and DB Host 24.ASC 15.sap. Get the Static IP address (192.service. Ensure the internet connection is available with a valid S-USERID 17.com/platforms) 3.com/notes) 5. Set the Java environment JAVA_HOME path 8.service. Download the software from (www. JAVA Components and JCE Policy 21.2_12 7.service. Parameter Summary 29. 10 networks) 16. Provide SID and Inst Directory 22. SLD (Local SLD) Provide Object server name: Host name 28. Verify the software using LABLE. Oracle Client 27. 3600.exe 18.service. Select 2004s 19. Ensure the ports 3200. 4700 are kept open (DVEBMGS uses these ports) 13.com/instguides) 2.4. Central instance and Typical Installation 20. Kernel Path 26. Download the Installation Guide (www. Make an entry of the hostname in Hosts file 11. Installation Proceeds. 3300.sap. Search for the known problems from (www.16 SAP Installation Steps 1. Install the OS related patches/ fix packs etc 6.sap. 172. Check the compatibility of OS and DB (www. Set the hostname not more than 13 characters 10.

17 These are shared between systems and accessed locally and globally CCMS PRFCLOG PUT SID HOSTS Trans CCMS . [Dev] ----------> [Qlty] ----------> [Prod] SAPmnt TASKS Installing SAP Component on SOLMAN On Windows/ SQL Server On Windows/ Oracle Windows/ DB2 Linux/ Oracle HPUnix/ Oracle AIX Solution Manager connects all the three systems (ERP i. ECC6.the complete SAP Application Server. .. profiles. Netweaver & CRM2007) . executables etc between systems in the landscape.These are also populated from JAVA Engine (Generic Request Message Generator GRMG) .e. support packages.is used to host the Developments PUT SID Hosts Trans SAPMnt: Is a shared SAP Mount which is used to host the directories related to SAP.is used during upgrade .Used for alert logs that is populated by the service SAPCCMSR (Java Stack Only) PRFCLOG . (It may be required to create SAPMnt in earlier versions but in the current versions based on Netweaver it is created automatically) SAPLoc in Windows This SAPmnt is shared because it needs to share the transports.0.

SAP start ORA<SID> -. LoadDB. log. Groups. . UNIX) Sapinst. Installation Logs Significance Sapinst_dir (Win. SharedMnt. Kernel (Extraction). III.tsk. Linux. 01) Mater Password JCE Policy Path for the CDs. RFC's DEFAULT USERS <SID>ADM -.18 I. CreateDB.cmd. II.str. Installation Inputs SAPInst SID Instance Number (Default 00. .tpl. sapinst_dev.For UNIX SAP SERVICE <SID> (OS Level Access Related to SAP) Sys system Master Database . Installation Steps Users. Services. . Updated Stats. . Directories. .toc.

A host has its own address on the network. Multiple Components on a Single DB repository A host is either a client or a server. and is its own machine.Multilanguage Support This requires additional 40% of resources. DB] Installation Directories D:\usr\sap \USR directory is created with a shared folder SAP with shared SAPMNT & SAPLOC Eg: SAPMNT: SAPLOC: \\willsys\sapmnt ~ d:\usr\sap Java Web SAP R/3 Both in Win and UNIX Only in Windows not in UNIX These are shared between systems and accessed locally and globally CCMS PRFCLOG .19 J2ee_ADMIN SAP* DDIC SAPSR3 SAPSR3DB Unicode . A server has its own address and sometimes multiple addresses. A client accesses the servers. Earlier case Individual passwords need to be set but now day's only one Master password for all the userids. It requires its own address. It provides access to services and information. Interface / Screen Exports/ System Copies Kernel [Dependent] Install Mstr [Dependent] Java Comp [Independent] JRE [Dependent] Exports [Independent of OS.

msc Check the USR Directory (SAP Instance files.20 PUT SID HOSTS Trans CCMS . Trans Directory . App) predefined shared SAP Directory with SharedMnt..Oracle Listener service should be started on the specified Port (1521-1529) 4. Listener .is used during upgrade SID Hosts .ef | grep ora* On Windows services. Trans .Used for transporting the Objects Note: SID Specifies the Application Server and is possible to have multiple <SIDS> differed by the instance number Queries: SQL> Select status from V$Instance. Checks the DB Status .Used to collect the OS Resources 2..the complete SAP Application Server.is used to host the Developments Check the groups SAPLOCAL_ADMIN SAPGLOBAL_ADMIN ORA_SID_DBA ORA_DBA ORA_SID_OPERATOR Check the services and ensure that they are running 1. (SAPMnt).Cmd ."\\Willsys\Usr" 9.Used for alert logs that is populated by the service SAPCCMSR (Java Stack Only) PRFCLOG . Oracle Service<SID> which is required for the Database On UNIX ps . SAPOSCOL .Which is mandatory to start SAP 3.These are also populated from JAVA Engine (Generic Request Message Generator GRMG) PUT .. and SAPLoc on windows Run . SAP<SID>_00 ..

JAVA Instance 98-99 for routing Note: Each SID uses different Ports Note: In the console tree of SOLMAN if all the three entries (SERVICES......ABAP Instance .is a ABAP Engine JC00 .. DVEBMGS <Instance Number> DVEBMGS00 ...SAP Central Instance DVEBMGS00 contains J2ee/ SDM/ JSPM directories then it is Integrated Engine (ABAP + JAVA) Note: Portal is only an application that is not based on ABAP Engine . \usr\sap\<SID>\config on a particular <SID> ERP <SID1> EP BI JAVA ABAP ERP<SID2> EP BI JAVA ABAP Note: Now-a-days it’s possible to install different engines as add-ons.properties .. USERS and GROUPS) are available then only we can confirm there are 3 Instances in one single system. <SID> Directory \usr\sap\<SID>. Config. 11.21 SQL> Startup followed by enter key SQL> shutdown immediate Note: Only one SAPOSCOL per system Max of 97 Systems on a single box SAPOSCOL_00 SAPOSCOL_01 ...Standalone JAVA Engine SCS01 . 10. Usagetypes..used to specify the usage types that are installed on the system..

ERP (ECC5.hosts all the executables from netweaver exe dir contains UC/ NUC and 32/64. SYS Directory Contains executables and profile parameters to start and stop the system EXE Directory .PI Dealers Enterprise Portal 12. i386/ ia64 In 4.0) . Instance Name Instance No: 00 . 99 for routing purposes) .7 we can see only exe directory 13.CRM .SRM Suppliers . Instance provides runtime services.22 Eg: Consider Hero Honda Landscape BI .which is an Application server.99 (98. Work Directory This stores the startup and error logs 17-jul-09 Instance: Logical entity which is installed on a physical entity .

3202 etc) Dispatcher manages all the work process and maintains a queue. Once the request is sent to dispatcher the dispatcher keeps the request in queue. Queue Mechanism.Once we logoff everything is rolled off. SCREEN. Public Buffer . Dispatcher It is used to handle the user requests that are coming from SAP GUI using DIAG (Dynamic Information Action Gateway) protocol on port 3200 + Instance Number. (3201.23 Structure of INSTANCE Instance contains Dispatcher. Task Handler with ABAP. Based on the availability of work process it will assign the process to the user request based on FIFO (First In First Out) User Buffer . and SQL Interpreters. It also contains buffer areas. SCREEN and SQL. . and Work process. DB Client and Roll area.Until the instance is restarted Work Process Work process handles the user request using Task Handler. Task Handler contains 3 Interpreters ABAP.

User Context It is a user specific roll area which is used to keep user authorizations.24 ABAP interpreter used to interpret the ABAP code in the user request SCREEN interpreter use to interpret the screen SQL interpreter interprets the SQL statements that are sent by the user. The entire information is copied into the user context which is referred as ROLL OUT. The work process gets the username. . DBWP (Database work process) process and responds back to the R/3 work process. The SAP Kernel which is O/S and DB Specific helps in the interpretation. logon language and the task handler interprets and hand over the task to the database process. parameters. screens and earlier accessed content. Process Flow (LOGON) 1.from the buffer area. password. client. R/3 work process checks for frequently accessed content and keeps the copy in R/3 Buffer areas. Select statement Modify/ Insert . Keeps in queue and assign WP based on FIFO 4. (The information is copied into Roll Area which is subsequently available for all the requests made by the user) . The user request is processed and it handovers (handshake) the task to Database process. Each instance is installed with DB Client software to communicate with Database in Native Language. The DB process checks the credentials of the user and provides the necessary authorizations to the process. 6. (Frequently accessed data). The response rolls out into the user context before it is sent to the user. Dispatcher handles the request 3.Hits the database Open SQL This is SAP Proprietary language to ensure that the SAP Components are Database independent. 5. User requests 2.

User executes a transaction Eg: ME22N . UPDATE 'V' It is used to update the transactions in the database. It is also referred as ROLL IN 4. 1.Purchase Order (or) VA01 . The user context is displayed in the transaction SU56. copy user context into the Task Handler. Dialogue work process initiates Update. .Sales order 2. D . It is also recommended to have an update process for every 5 Dialogue. 2. D01 to DN-1 for Dialogue instances.Enqueue B . Background and Spool. Central Instance DVEBMGS .2112111 It hosts all the process and their will be only one central instance in the entire system. The request is handled by dispatcher and hand over to the work process.. DIALOGUE 'D' It is only the process which communicates interactively with the users. 3.Message G . The process are determined by the instance name DVEBMGS<Instance_No> For Dialogue instances the work process will be denoted as D01. There should be atleast 1 Update in the entire system. Work process requires information that is not available in the work process.. Further processing continues Types of Work Processes Even though the processes are unique at OS level SAP differentiated between the work processes based on the nature of work.e. If the user accesses other than the transactions in SU56 it is missing authorizations and displayed from the Tcode SU53 (Missing Authorizations) Process Flow (TRANSACTION) 1.Gateway S .Spool DVEBMGS is only available in the Central instance. There should be atleast 2 Dialogue work process per instance.Update E .Dialogue V . D02.Back ground M .. It is initiated by Dialogue process.25 Note: The user context remains until the user is logged out. The work process copies the user related information into the task handler i.

SPOOL 'S' It is used to print the documents to a printer or output to a fax machine etc. It is used to manage all the dispatchers. There will be only 1 gateway for each instance. 7. ENQUEUE 'E' It is used to provide locks for the records that are going to be updated. 4. It is used to load balance the requests to identify the least loaded dispatcher.Initiated by dialogue .1 per system . It is possible to have more than one enqueue provided they are installed or configured on the central instance.Interactive .Provides consistency for updates . It is also used to provide locks to the request that are coming from Dialogue instances. 6. 18-jul-09 DVEBMGS00 Dialogue Update Enqueue .Initiate update. It is also possible to configure more spool process depending on the print/ spool volume. There will be only 1 Enqueue configured in the system during the installation. GATEWAY 'G' It is used to provide a means of communication with SAP and NON-SAP systems.26 3. There should be atleast 1 Spool process in the entire system. .2 per instance . spool and btc (background) .Non-Interactive . It ensures consistency for updates. BACKGROUND 'B' The tasks which are expensive or time consuming are scheduled to run in the background mode non-interactively. MESSAGE 'M' There should be only 1 message server in the entire R/3 system. There should be atleast 2 background work process in the system 5.1 per system and can be increased Depending upon the update requests but needs to increase only on the Central instance for optimal performance.

2.service.service. It also procures lock from enqueue server To serve the requests that is coming from dialogue instances.com/platforms Windows 2003 2000 Adv. Server Or 2008 .com/swdc 4.sap. Download the installation guide from the Market place www.sap. Check the compatibility of OS and DB www.service.Oracle . Install JRE 1. Gateway Spool INSTALLATION 1. Install the OS with relevant support packs/ Fix packs etc.com/notes 5. 6.com/instguides 2.DB/2 8 . Search for the known problems in www.It provides an interface to communicate between SAP and NON-SAP Systems. . Only 1 Per system. Message .Non-Interactive .MS SQL Server .2 per system . Download the software from www. 1 Gateway per instance.Initiated by dialogue. It is initialized by Dialogue and BTC.0. . Time consuming And long running jobs are scheduled to run in the background mode.Used during load balancing. Atleast 1 spool per system.2_12 (Java Run time environment) to run the sap inst screens .4.MaxDB .MaxDB Linux 3.sap.service.2 .27 Background .sap.It is only the process that outputs the documents to printers.Oracle 10. fax etc.

Kernels.com/platforms www.ERP 6.all one word). Set the host name which should not be more than 13 characters 10. 21213 are not blocked (Need to inform Network Admin or Proxy Admin not to block the ports) 12. underscores are allowed 14. Special characters etc (Eg NWDump or Newfolder . Verify the software using LABEL.SR2 . (DVEBMGS utilises these ports) 13.service.Select the components Exports. 172..ECC5 PRACTICAL SESSIONS www. Ensure that internet connection is available with a valid S-Userid. Make an entry in the host file etc/hosts.My companies Application component .sercvice.sap. JAVA SR1 . 4700. ERP 2005 ERP 2004 . If RAM is more than 20GB then 20GB * 3 = 60GB 9.0 Select the Database From Downloads Tab .sap.com/swdc .com/instguides www. Get the private static IP address from the Network team (192.EHP2 .sap. networks) 16. 4800 series ports are not blocked. The folders should not contain spaces.ECC6 . Set the virtual memory to 20GB on windows 20GB swap memory on HP Unix machines. 3600. Set the JAVA environment variable JAVA_HOME or path Check java -version 8. Ensure that the installation ports 21212..28 7. Ensure that 3200.SR3 -EHP1 . 3300. 10. Dump the software into the system.service. 11.ASC 15.

Central Instance 2. Note: Only exports will change for each application like CRM.800.29 Click on download to basket Market place > Help and Support > Search for Notes JRE is must as the SAP Screens are developed on JAVA Platform Virtual Memory: [Extended memory towards HDD] Need to set the virtual memory RAM size * 3 + 500MB/ 1GB [32 Bit] Select the drive where SAP is going to be installed. SCM.contains the content and the DVD number from which we can find whether it is an Export 1 Or Export 2 etc. 066) In IDES additional clients . LABEL. Set the host name Cmd > drivers > etc\hosts IP Address Hostname T1 Shopper Port scan .To check whether these ports are open or blocked. 812 clients are available.ASC . Central system Instance (Which contain both Central + Database instance) Goto Installation Master DVD .exe From Netweaver 1. There will be only 2 exports for Non . 001. Dialogue Instance From the dump bring up sapinst.IDES system And 6 Exports for IDES system. 811. SRM etc 20-jul-09 INSTALLATION 1. Database Instance 3. IDES (International Demo Education System) will have more clients 11-12 Predefined clients and in the Non-IDES system only 3 Clients (000.

EP. exports path and JCE policy Required software 1. .The input lists screen is displayed to review before starting the installation. Inst Master DVD 2. If it is a custom installation more inputs are required. password are automatically taken). . MI) and click on next. CRM.exe). . . BI. CRM. around 35 modules) .exe . It also depends upon the memory.30 . Exports Exports depend upon the business component which is going to be installed like ERP. . It is an executable.On windows sapinst.e. JAVA Components 4.. and SCM etc. SCM.Continue the installation . installation file paths. kernel.0 are (SALES. Kernel DVD 3.Specify the JAVA component path.select (0) Typical Installation (to install the system with predefined settings i. and PURCHASE./sapinst. FINANCE.Select the respective inst (sapinst.Installation depends upon the export content (IDES version may consume 8-12 Hrs) Production version ma take 4-6 Hrs.Select the components that needs to be installed (ERP. The port numbers.Specify the Master password . JCE Policy JAVA Cryptography which is used to provide the secured encryption & decryption over the web .Specify the SID and the installation drive. XI.because the content transmission over the web is not secure. . Components lies in ECC6.. SRM.exe and on Linux/ UNIX use .

. processes securing the sensitive data. fine tuning the performance. Note: All the SAP components will be installed on the Netweaver Platform. It is up to the customer to choose the Netweaver components and It is mandatory to choose ABAP components.e. Administration. ABAP provides the runtime environment for all the above components i. database administration irrespective of the SAP component and also managing printers. POST INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES SAP is a transaction based. USER Management.31 To display all these over the web then EP (Enterprise portal) is required. Menu based consumes more dialogue steps than transaction based that is why SAP BASIS consultants are more familiar with transactions. ABAP is a part of the Netweaver. Management of the file system. ABAP is the platform for all the SAP Components.

TEST etc) -Click on continue to display the hardware key input. DB support packs and R/3 Kernels.32 Login to the system with SAP*.sap. DB and the R/3 kernels. System Settings SE03 Depending upon the type of system we need to set the system to modifiable and not modifiable. SM28/ SICK 2. Execute transaction SM28/ SICK (Installation consistency check). NETWEAVER(EP. -Goto . PI. QAS. System Type.com/licensekey -Click on obtain permanent license key -Select the Installation number based on the component (ERP.It is a transaction that is used to apply the license to get the runtime support for the system even though it is valid for 30 days (4 Weeks i. Based on the displayed message we may need to upgrade OS patch levels. SLICENSE . JDI).service. . 28 days). If there is any inconsistency it will recommends us to fix before proceeding further. BI. PRD. Execute [Slicense] Tcode Click on > New Licenses Click on > Install license key and it prompts for the path of the license key. 4. MI. System Number. purpose(DEV. It is recommended to apply license because they are not considered for support. DDIC and Master password (specified during installation) 1. . provide the downloaded file path and click on OK to apply the license. -Specify the system ID(SID). It checks the compatibility between OS.Specify the Hardware key and email-id to generate and send license key to the mail-id specified. The license key is specific to Customer.Hardware key is unique (use command saplicense -key ) . Installation number. CRM & Solution Manager).Market place www. OS. SCM. Hostname and the Hardware key. DB.txt format. Alternatively select the system and click on display license script and save it to PC in the . SRM.e. XI. 3.

This Maintenance certificate is introduced from JAN/ 2009 onwards. The changes are only transported to the not modifiable systems. PRD. one is the permanent key valid upto [31129999] The other one is Maintenance Certificate which is valid upto 3 Months. 3. It locks SPAM so that no upgrades are allowed without a valid Maintenance certificate.System Settings . SLICENSE SAP Issues two licenses. SE03 . no object can be modified in these systems. This is one of the most important security setting which is liable for auditing. PRE-PRD are set to notmodifiable i.33 Goto SE03/ SE06 system change options to set to modifiable or not modifiable. Kernel Levels. OS levels and Database patch levels. 21-jul-09 1.e. SICK/ SM28 . Toggling between the changes are recorded and it is advised to obtain permission from the respective authority to make necessary changes in the Production System PRD Except DEV and SANDBOX remaining all the systems like QAS.SAP Initial Consistency Check Checks for the Incompatibility between R/3 Patch Levels. 2.

DB copy or DB Migration: It is used when a system is setup as a copy of production or preproduction system. .Perform Post Installation Action Select either one of the option. SE06 . 1. It initializes the Transport Management system.34 Db click on Set system change Option 4. 2. A message will populate to configure TMS in the client 000. Standard Installation 2. Standard Installation : It is used when a fresh system is installed. Database copy or Database Migration 1. SE06 transaction is used to set the CTS (Change Transport System).

landscape and their routes. 1. Domain Controller: There will be only one Domain Controller in the system landscape. their roles.A pop up window prompts to configure Domain Controller. this is the first system in the Landscape Login to the system/ Client 000 with the user other than SAP*/ DDIC Execute T-Code STMS Eg: {from se06 > perform post installation action} > STMS . Including the system in the Domain Specify the Domain Controller Target host System Number User: TMSADM (Default User) TMSADM is a communication user created during TMS configuration (Do not delete the user. change password. Domain controller. backup domain controller. It should be executed in STMS and also the RFC connections. It is used to setup the systems. In most of the environments [DEV] is treated as DC because. . lock the user.35 TMS: Transport Management System. Approving the inclusion of Systems Login to the DC Execute STMS From Menu Overview > Systems The system is waiting to be included Select the system and click on approve from Menu SAP System.Specify the description Transport Domain Name: Domain_<SID> Save the configuration NOTE: If the Domain already exists then we can execute a TCode [DICO] to delete the existing TMS configuration.Defining a logical System Creating Virtual Systems . set to expiry will hault the system transports. SALE . support packages and applicatoins etc) A message SAP system "waiting to be included in the transport domain" is displayed in the external system.

36 It is a standard practice in the industry to create virtual systems as the real systems could not be available during the initial configuration (DEV server is procured during implementation, QAS will be procured after 3 to 4 months from kickoff date and the PRD is procured before 2 months of GoLive) Virtual Machines/ Systems can be replaced by real systems and the configuration now points to the real system. Goto STMS (Domain Controller) > Menu Overview > Systems > SAP System > Create Virtual System For Eg: System : JOQ Description : Quality System TRANSPORT GROUP It is a naming convention group_<SID> we can configure all the systems to a single transport group i.e. all the developments which are performed in Development system will be automatically available to other systems in the landscape. The group of systems which shares the transport directory in common are said to be in one group but due to sensitivity of PRD it is moved into a separate group. 1.
Shared Data

2.

Defining the Landscape

37 Execute STMS > Click on transport routes From over view menu > click on change > from Menu Configuration > Standard Configuration > Three systems in group Eg: Specify DEV: JOD QAS: JOQ PRD: JOP SAVE Provide Three System Configuration under the Description. 22-jul-09 Practicals CONFIGURING STMS

Perform DICO to delete the STMS configured earlier if necessary and the RFC connection from the external system.

POST INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES Continuation ...

38 From 000/ SAP* RZ10 - Initially we have to import profiles from OS Level to SAP level. From menu SYSTEM > Import Profiles of Active Servers SCC4 - Roles are client Specific Logical system <SID> client Cross clients - all the clients SALE - for assigning the logical system. Click on new entries and provide <SID>Clnt900 Default clients : 000, 001, 066 We can create upto 1000 Clients 000 to 999 For the newly created client say in this case 900 a user will be created SAP* with pass as the password. For the first time we cannot login [SAP* / pass] So being from another client perform RZ10 - change the parameter to Login/no_automatic_user_sapstar to 0 instead 1 After creating a client need to perform client copy [SAP_CUST] Always need to copy 000 client because it will have all the customized data.066 is for early watch. Create an new user as SAPUSER copied from SAP*/ DDIC logging in as SAP* user from the newly created client. Login to the new client with our userid and password and lock the DDIC and SAP* ----- TASKS ----SETTING UP A LOGO Execute SMW0 Select (0) Binary data for WebRFC Click on Find button

Click on execute

39 Create new Obj name : ZTEST Desc : IMAGE Browse for the Picture

From settings menu > Click on MIME type Add .jpg format Save. GOTO - SM30 Click on maintain Click on new entries START_IMAGE : ZTEST

Prompts for the Change request - proceed and test the logo SETTING UP TEXT Execute - SE61

40

Document class : General text From document tab NAME - ZLOGIN_SCREEN_INFO create Type the text - Welcome SAVE. 23-jul-09 Roles granted for me in the SAND BOX for Capgemini

POST INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES 1. SICK 2. SE06 3. SE03 4. STMS 4.1 SALE

5. RZ10 Used to import the profiles from OS level to DB. The profiles are available in \usr\sap\<sid>\sys\profile. These profile requires management for fine tuning, configuring buffers etc From 000 > Goto RZ10 > Utilities > Import profiles of Active servers >SAVE 6. SMLT

41 Perform language transports if any. The system is an unicoded system to support the all available languages but we need to import the additional languages as per the requirements. Download the languages in \usr\sap\trans\eps\in Directory

Goto SMLT > and create a language > specify supplementary language i.e. if the script is not available in main language it will display in secondary language. English > Primary German > Secondary Goto I18N (Globalization / Internationalization of Languages) Click on > Current NLS settings Get the parameter zcsa/installed_languages = DE If we specify any new language it needs to be updated in the above parameter using RZ10 Clink on ADD from NLS settings to include additional languages that are going to be imported using SMLT.

Steps:

42 1. Execute I18N 2. Add language that needs to be imported in I18N 3. SMLT create language 4. Click on > Import package > specify the path \usr\sap\trans\eps\in

5. Download language from Market place 6. Import 7. Set the parameter zcsa/installed_languages = AEDZ

6. SPAM Apply the patches that are relevant for SAP application component

7. SR13

Install SAP Library

For documentation > Market Place > SAP Solutions > SAP ERP >English Note: Need to create a folder in D:\SAPHELP. Plain HTML .Html documentation installed on Web Server 3.type (offline/ online) and save 9.43 SAP Provides screen context help i. 1.. SM36 ..HTML docu installed on File server 4. Plain Html Help . opened by html help viewer. Dynamic Help 2.Define standard background (House keeping jobs) . (sapdocdc.click on date and select backup .Define Backup schedule .. It is in compressed format. HTML Help File .ini) paste the path. 8.. when a user struck at one screen he can use Menu Help > Application help. DB13 . SR13 > New Entries VARIENT SAPHELP PLATFORM WINNT AREA IWBHelp PATH Copy and Paste from Market place.e..It occupies less space.

There should be atleast 2 Dialogue process per instance. 24-jul-09 STRUCTURE OF APPLICATION SERVER Dispatcher Workprocess User Context Task Handler Buffers . If a reporting user requires 3GB of memory then there will be a memory bottleneck.SM50/ SM66 .44 Note: Create users in SU01 and assign SAP_ALL to the functional and technical team as the security is not implemented. * The work process are configured by the parameter rdisp/wp_no_dia = XX . The memory should be calculated after reserving memory for OS and the Database. Each process requires 75MB to 150MB of memory on any average..DPMON . The maximum number of work process an instance can support is W0 to W99 (100 Work processes). The requests are processed by using a dialogue process.from Work Directory . but depends upon how heavy the processing goes. Dialogue process is the only process that interacts with/ communicates interactively with the user.ST02 Dispatcher receives the request and processes them according to the queue. If the system supports more than 100 processes then it is better to configure one more instance on the same server differed by the instance number.SU56 . There are cases where more than 100 are configured but it is not recommended. Eg: 4GB RAM: 1 GB reserve for OS and DB 3 GB 3000/ 150 = 20 Processes Min and Max upto 40 Processes.

Upon task completion reset the value in RZ11 (No system restart is required) WORK PROCESS MULTIPLEXING (Consider Restaurant Activities). during the month end the parameter can be changed to 1800 10000 from RZ11 for specific period of time. Each LUW is a commit or rollback (no intermediate stage . 1.. Each user transaction may be served by one or more processes with out restricting to the user similarly each work process serve multiple users with out restricting the user.e. (No dialogue process remains ideal) Each process can serve 5 . Appointment (Dates are not available Eg: Darshinam) BIND 1 2 3 4 Each of the LUW is performed by a single different work process and is restricted to 600 Seconds and task has to complete within 600 milliseconds . In order to run the activities that consume more time then the above we need to run in the background mode or increase the parameter value from RZ11 (Dynamic parameter) i. which makes the system inconsistency) CONSIDER A TRAVEL AGENCY In a travel agency buying the ticket is LUW (Outward/inwards). which needs only dialogue) The dialogue response time should be around 600 to 1000 Milliseconds (1 Second) Each dialogue process is restricted by using a parameter rdisp/max_wprun_time = 600 s (10 Minutes) after which the process will be timed out. LUW (Outward/ inward) Booking accommodation (LUW for number of days) 2..10 users and Each SAP transaction consists of multiple (LUW Logical unit of work) Each LUW contains task which should be completed/ rollback as a group. BIND 1 & 2 Tickets to and fro + Accommodation) 3. Transportation (LUW for a local tour) BIND 1 & 2 & 3 4.45 For an Ideal Instance the sum of the Dialogue processes should more or less equal to non-dialogue process (unless a reporting server.

5000 .4000 USD In India tag is 2000 USD for min number of users Eg: 10 + 1 is minimum Developers are charged differently 10 Users + 1 Developer 48000 * 50 = 12.40000 USD .04. 000 .3 Months Each user license cost .46 LICENSING Standard License Maintenance License . 000 20.3% Service Tax + Customs 22% Maintenance cost across the globe except INDIA 5 22% Eg: 1 24% Telco Bajaj ARAMCO 2 26% .till 9999(YYYY) . 68. 000 2. 04.8000 USD 10. 000 -----.270 -50000 . 00.04.000 2.000 ------------------------14.000 4% VAT 17% Maintenance /Year 48.--14.

get It checks for 1. If the reports are long running. BI. ECC. time consuming. During an update dialogue updates temporary table and update-process updates them later. SID 2. Hardware Key (Installed by SAP .Its an executable) Note: All the executables resides in . .Password never expires (Service Userid) 25-jul-09 Dialogue handles the requests and process only reports with out any assistance.System Measurement for the users SUSER .47 One License . PI. SRM. EP. Hostname 3. MI License is user based Once the license key is received then goto SLICENSE Tcode -> INSTALL And click Install new licenses button From cmd prompt Soladm> saplicense .D:\USR\SAP\SOL\SYS\EXE\UC\NTI386 Note: In Linux SAPDB/ MAXDB will be the cheapest SAPDB/ MAXDB is a DB that comes along with the SAP USMM .SOLMAN. expensive then they can be scheduled to run in the BTC mode.

The spool process Prints from Temse (Temporary Sequential file it can be at file/ DB Table) Dialogue communicates with enqueue while updating a transaction and obtains lock so that no user can update there by assuring data consistency. Dialogue is monitored by using SM50. It is used to kill the process at OS Level. Each process has the following . Dialogue communicates with the gateway while establishing connection with other SAP systems. DW . SM66.48 For print requests Dialogue handles the request and update in Temse. Killing the process From Command Prompt > DPMON (Process the list at OS Level) >K > Provide .exe is a dispatcher monitor which can be executed when the user could not login to the system (Experience Hour glass). and DPMON DPMON.Type of Process : (DVEBS) Message and Gateway are not displayed . Dialogue communicates with the message server to obtain locks for a record that is coming from Dialogue instance.Serial Number > Provide .PID PROCESS MANAGEMENT SM50/ SM66 Work process list is displayed in SM50/ SM66. Its not a TCode. They are displayed as [DISP+WORK] on windows in the Task Manager.Serial Number : Starts with 0 (DEV_W0) in work directory .Process PID : The identifier at OS level.dispatcher work process in UNIX 0 to 11 [12] And 1 is for dispatcher 13 Total .

Stopper.Client : The client number logged in .e.Runtime : The amount of time the process spends on the user request.Click on SELECT PROCESS . 26-jul-09 SM66 GLOBAL WORK PROCESS OVERVIEW It displays the processes based on status.Report : The name of the program/ report the WP is executing . . It displays the processes belongs to all the instances. Running Waiting : The process is waiting "Available" to serve the user request.Action : Select.Restart YES/ NO : if the process is terminated and it will restart automatically (Yes). It will be completed only after the task completion/ timeout. insert i. Update. CPIC) Shutdown : The process is killed/ shutdown but restart mode set to NO Waiting for PRIV Mode: The process goes into Heap mode. action on the database.CPU : The amount of time WP spends utilising CPU resources .Semaphore : The block that hold at OS Level (DISK) . SLEEP MODE: The work process goes into sleep mode waiting for resources (RFC problem) . Stopped : The process is stopped due to an error.User name : Name of the user . not restart(NO) .Error : No of times the process is restarted . From SM66 .49 -status : Waiting. . Running : The process is executing the task (SM50 running with our Userid should not be considered) On Hold : The user request is on hold by process for waiting certain Resources on the other systems (RFC.Table : Name of the table.

arch) SM04 : is used to display the logged in users along with the sessions. Weekly sales report or expensive to run in the peak hours so they are scheduled to run in the background mode during off peak hours.e. a job is scheduled to run at a specific time or periodically. From User > Logoff User > Local or End the session BACKGROUND PROCESS SM36 It is used to run the expensive programs. Process Flow 1. Roll and the Heap Memory) On Oracle execute PS -ef |grep ora* (lgwr. ckpt. 2. BWP looks into the table and identify the jobs which are in the Ready State. pmon. * To delay the BTC processing increase the time as much as possible. Example : 100000 seconds 27Hrs RZ11 (rdisp/btctime) Refer . 6. i. User submits the request via dispatcher to a WP.BTCTRNS1 from SE38 We can also use BTCTRNS2 to resume the background jobs (Execute the program) 5.Checks for every 60 sec into the TBTC* table. Double click on the WP to display (Extended. Tables TBC* are used to store the BTC Jobs 4. BWP are defined by using rdisp/wp_no_btc=2 (Min 2 per system) We can increase as many as possible depending upon the resources. The Dialogue work process handles the request and updates the tables 3. Example: Daily report. dbwr.50 The major advantage of this is it displays the memory consumed by work process. BWP runs the job in the Active mode till completion/ Cancelled. reports that consumes more time in the background mode. We can terminate the session or the user completely using End session or logoff user. ** Note: We can pause jobs by setting the value to 0 zero ** BWP jobs are defined in SM36 . smon. A program SAPMSSYS starts in the dialogue mode at frequency that is defined in the parameter rdisp\btctime=60Sec SAPMSSYS .

Completed: The job is completed or finished Execution server . Active: BWP processing the task 5. 2.Is a predefined value that is populated during the runtime.Willsys_<SID>_00 Click on step JOB STEPS We need to specify the following for the JOB Execution 1. ABAP Program . BRRESTORE. These commands are OS commands that will be executed at command level. BRCONNECT Use DB13 to schedule the jobs. Eg: BRBACKUP. Eg: consider RSPO1041 from SA38 Goto SA38 and define variant for 7 & 15 days Prog: RSPO1041 Variant: willsys SAVE Click on start condition .51 Specify Jobname: Daily report JobClass: C A. Scheduled: The job is defined but time to execute is not specified. . Variant . Medium.. B. ABAP Program 2. 2..Is a predefined program that will be run in the background with user inputs as variants. BRARCHIEVE. The jobs in DB13 uses OS Commands. External Commands: The job can be executed by external commands which are defined in SM49/ SM69.IMMEDIATE or DATE. Ready: The Time to run the job is reached 4. Released: The time to execute is specified 3. Class B has medium priority over class C jobs Class C jobs runs with Normal Priority JOB STATUS 1.Name of the instance that provides BWP to run the job Exec Target . External Command 3.. External Program 1. C (High. Low Priority) Class A requires a dedicated BTC of class A which are defined in operation modes. Cancelled: The job is cancelled 6.

Specify the start condition Immediate/ Periodic/ Jobstart. Operation Modes (Peak and Off Peak) 3. Modes. RZ04 > Define 1. Specify the processes for modes Goto SM63 to define timing for the modes RZ04 > click on Create [Instance Operation Mode] Peak_mode Peak_mode operations Default SAVE Off peak Off peak Mode Create new Instance willsys28 Start profile Save. External Programs: NAME: Name of the program Parameter: Target Host: Name : Specify the name of the program and the parameters. 27-jul-09 BACKGROUND JOB MONITORING SM37 .52 3. Event: When an event triggered in SAP it also triggers the job as well. Specify the name of the target host. Event (SM62)/ Operation. Instance 2. OPERATION MODES RZ04 SM63 It is the process of switching DIA to BTC and vice versa during the peak hours as we need more dialogue process and during off peak we need more BWP to run the BTC jobs. Job Started: When dependent job started this gets triggered.

date & time. Action: 1. ACTIVE BTC in active status (long time recorded) . Also due to passing the jobs by extending scheduler time/ making BTC to 0 by running the program BTCTRNS1. expensive programming or sql statements/ fetching huge amount of data. The jobs with status RELEASED indicate the jobs are released with scheduled time and waiting for their turn/ time.53 rdisp/wp_no_btc = 2 rdisp/btctime = 10 Operation modes . May be due to heavy load on the system 4. job name. The jobs with status READY indicates the jobs are ready to pickup by the scheduler Eg: Consider a CAB . 3. status ----. The existing jobs are running for a long time i. The configured BTC processes are not sufficient to handle the requests in Ready status. 2. 2.might come late No sufficient CABS Long time in ready status indicates 1. 3.Execute F8 1. Increase BTC work processes based on the available resources by using the parameter rdisp/wp_no_btc = 2 2. Schedule the jobs appropriately during off peak hours.to make use of the resources optimally SM37 is used for BTC monitoring Execute SM37 Specify username.e.

Check the bottle neck on the target system (ERP-BI-EP-SRM-SCM-SRM) 3. pay roll run. Reasons and Resolutions ACTION. Report to SAP in case of dead locks. Jobs are expensive and running to fetch the content. Jobs are waiting for the locks to update the records. annual reports. Some jobs are bound to run for hours and based on history leave them to run. Active indicates the following 1. 2. Jobs are waiting to be processed by the target system (RFC. Select the status .Db click . 2. CPIC) 3.and click on Job Logs Execute SM37 Highlight the job Click on Job log Sap takes at most care to avoid dead locks. FINISHED . Wait until the locks are released/ jobs are completed. 1. Jobs that fetch information from BW systems. dunning reports may take hours together or even days to complete successfully.54 The job is running an expensive activity like client copy. 4.

ORA-1632) 8. file sharing issues. Page Errors) 10. ORA-1654) 7. Variants are not properly defined. Update mechanism failed 6. 4. Dependent jobs/ events failure 12. Table space max extent reached (ORA-1631. User and password Issues (Authentication/ Authorization) user lock. file not found as well. File not opened. password change. CANCELLED Job status cancelled/ finished but failed in the log. Problem in the program and inputs (Indefinite loops like 1/0) 11. Reasons for cancellation of Job 1. As a part of the post installation we need to schedule house keeping jobs in SM36 Execute SM36 Click on "Standard Background Jobs" . 5. PXA (Buffer). File system problems: BTC reads from the file system to update the database. 2. file came with different characters. 3. The memory is not sufficient and errors (No Roll Area. or corrupted. Table space over flow (ORA-1653. userid expiry.55 The jobs are completed successfully but check the log for further information/ completion. Target systems are not available to process the jobs. Dead locks issue (Lock mechanism congested) 5. ORA-272) 9. Archive struck (ORA-255. Standard Background House keeping Jobs 1. lack of roles etc.

RSPO1041 4. .Delete old update requests/ logs 5. RSPO1043 Eg: from SA38 .Spool Reorganization Click on Execute And Specify the Days ...Delete the old spool logs and files . RSMO13002 . 1. RSBTCDEL .56 Click on "Default Scheduling" And schedule the BTC jobs with default time.Used to delete the background jobs Reporting structure "BTC" "DEL" 2. RSCOLL00 . RSSNAPDEL 3.Delete the old ABAP Dumps . 6.Collects performance info in transaction ST03.

date and status 2.57 From GOTO Menu > Variants > SAVE as Variant SM37 . It displays the job logs By highlighting a job and click on Job Log . username. Used to display the jobs based on job.MONITORING BACKGROUND JOBS. 1.

Background job out put is a report to a spool (Printer). Do not kill the active job unless it is permitted by the owner 4. We can move the jobs from one instance to another instance. 28-jul-09 There are Third Party BTC Job Schedulers 1. TIDEL Scheduler 4. We can repeat the scheduling of the job if required 5.000 Jobs/day . (Consider the above screen) Active jobs can be moved. The tool defines when to trigger. fax or email or even updating a database (Eg.000 Jobs/ day HP Runs 20. CONTROL-M Scheduler 2. Client Copy) 6. how to handle various statuses and alert users accordingly. MAESTRO Scheduler / IBM These Third party schedulers are not specific to SAP but we can customise these to SAP These job schedulers are intelligent to work based on the status of Predecessors. SAP Job Scheduler 5. From Menu Job > Move to different server. RED WOOD Scheduler 3. KODAK Runs 14. Eg.58 3.

Communication with NON SAP Systems to fetch the data 6. Client copy for the technical consultants 4. BTC Jobs performs the following: 1. Dunning report for Finance team 7.e. Runs standard jobs for House Keeping . Monthly and Annual Reports 8. assembling & packing. Weekly.59 BTC . the communication is performed electronically. i.Business Case Sony an electronics company communicates with suppliers for the TV Cabinets/ Circuit boards. Run long running reports for an End User 2. SAP also sends soft documents as well. Picture tubes. Runs payroll for the employees 3. R/3 BIW Replication 5. Vendors instead of communicating in hand documents they are advised to communicate in soft documents.

To run Database jobs using external commands DB13 (SM49 provides commands) NOTE: In table TSTC. From SE11 .Provide the table name TSTC and execute providing the T-Code to find the Program No bother of "Schedule/ Released" Will not in our scope We need to take care about the Status .60 9. we can get a list of all existing Tcodes and which programs are called by those transactions.

4.Handles High Priority Updates V2 .To store data that needs to be updated VBMOD .Update Error Table . Dialogue process updates the temporary tables called as VB* asynchronously VBHDR .61 Ready for longer time Active for the longer time..Handles low priority updates V3 .. 3. UPDATE PROCESS It is used to update the database from Temporary tables.. Dispatcher handles the request and provides a dialogue process to it. BTC logs are deleted by scheduling RSBTCDEL which deletes the log files from TBTC* based on the time interval in the Variant SA38.To store update header information VBDATA . There are three 3 Types of updates V1 . DB 2. Dialogue process interprets the request and communicates with enqueue process to provide a lock to update the record consistently.Reserved by SAP (Currently no use) Updates are defined by the parameter Rdisp/wp_no_vb=1 Rdisp/wp_no_vb2=2 from RZ11 Technically for every 5 dialogue work process there should be one update of type V1/ V2 Update Flow: 1.The modules through which the data is updated VBERR . User submits the request for an update (Let us say a Purchase Order) Eg: Bearers won’t go to the Pantry Similarly All dialogue won’t go to the.

62 And gets a transaction ID from Number Range Buffer (Transaction SNRO and Table NRIV Number Range Interval Table) SNRO NRIV Eg: .

ORA-1632) 5.63 Dialogue Updates . If the records stays for longer time in INIT status that indicates the updates are busy or there are no sufficient update processes or update mechanism is deactivate from SM14. Max Extents reached (ORA-1631. Update deactivated in SM14 2.Update Releases the lock. UPDATE MONITORING SM13 The record that needs to be updated by update process is displayed in SM13 with status INIT. Update updates the record based on transaction-ID using VBMOD Table (Every update is module based in SAP) 6. Dead Lock (Needs to inform SAP for Program correction) Updates which could not be updated will be thrown into ERR Status. Table Space overflow (ORA-1653. Archive Struck (ORA-255. When the Dialogue updates the temp tables the record is displayed in SM13 which will be processed by update. 1. ORA-1654) 4. 5. ORA-272) 29-jul-09 BATCH/ BTC/ BACKGROUND . Update gets initialized and reads from Temp Tables and updates the permanent tables synchronously. Update handles the record and change the status to "RUN" If the update stays long time in status RUN 1. Programming problems in LUW 3. Update inherits the locks and releases them upon updating permanent tables. Longer Update 2.

ERR The record runs in to an Error (Update Error) RUN The update is executing the record into DB AUTO The error records are reprocessed after a system restart/ update activation Automatically. Table space overflow 2. Update releases the lock from the record. 2. Gets the transaction ID from NRIV (Number Range Interval Table) 6. Update gets initiated to update the VB* content permanently into the database. UPDATE Statuses. That is the reason why dialogue updates Temp Table. Max Extents reached 3. VBMOD. The update are terminated or cancelled due to the following reasons 1. User submits the request.64 Each SAP transaction is considered as Single LUW (Logical unit of work) which in turn contains multiple LUW's needs to be committed to commit the SAP Transaction. SM13 . Update inherits the locks. The following are the statuses displayed in SM13 Transaction. 9. Programmatical Error 5. 7. VBERROR) 5.Repeat Update Used to repeat the ERR updates. Updates the request in Temp tables (VBHDR. Archive struck 4. Dialogue handles the request. 4. 8. Update Deactivation (SM14) Running updates during deactivation DEACTIVATE -----------> THROWS TO ERROR -------------> GOES TO AUTO At this point of time we need to select the update (put a check mark of the update from SM13) and click on [Repeat Update] Refer modules from SM13 . INIT The record is waiting to update by an update process. VBDATA. Updates the database based on transaction ID. 3. If any one of the LUW is failed the entire transaction is rolled back. Obtains lock from Enqueue so the data consistency is achieved and the records are only for display. 1.

2. (Its a background job) V1 and V2 updates needs to be defined in the system. Update mechanism can be deactivated by setting the parameter rdisp/vb_stop_active=0 to deactivate the update mechanism in case of DB errors. Reorganize the update tables. There will be only one message server through out the System. It can be activated from SM14. V1 handles critical updates and V2 handles the non-critical updates which are defined by the programmers. Report in SA38 RSM13002 To delete the old update requests. Deletes the executed update requests.65 The updates can be repeated with status ERR Rdisp/vbmail = 1 to send email to the users if an update is failed. rdisp/vbdelete=30 to delete the update records older than 30 days irrespective of the status. Rdisp/vbreorg =1 to delete the incomplete update request during a system restart. We can see either V1 or V2 in the standard SAP Program SAPMV45A by executing SE38 MESSAGE SERVER/ PROCESS 1. It is used to manage all the dispatchers and identify the least loaded dispatcher and forward the user request to the dispatcher provided logon load balancing is configured in transaction SMLG .

3. 4.66 Logon Groups SMLG SMLG > Create Provide GROUP: INSTANCE: Now from SAP Logon Screen Click on Groups > and Provide SID and Message Server. Open GUI > Select groups and create entry by choosing group.ini > open [MESSAGE SERVER] DEV = <hostname> 3200/tcp .ini if not exists from (x:\windows) Sapmsg. Add an entry in etc/ services As sampsDEV (Message Server Name) Entry should be made on all GUI systems. For Eg: MARKETING dewall36_R3I_00 We can find the Active servers from SM51 and on db click on the Host name to view all the Processes. CONFIGURING SMLG 1. Define a logon group from TCode SMLG 2. Assign the instance. Note: The load is calculated based on in ST07 5. create a file sapmsg.

BTC. sapmsg. Message server maintains the details of favorite server and routes the request to that dispatcher 4.67 Mechanism 1. 2.Dialogue Message server obtains the lock for dialogue process if the request is coming from the Dialogue instances. It provides locks from a lock table before a record gets updated and ensure that the record is available for display during an update. ENQUEUE: It is used to provide data consistency while updating the system. Gateway and Spool DVEBMGS) It is also possible to install and configure all the above servers on different instances or hosts. 3. Message. Dispatcher handles the request .ini gets evaluated and checks the port in etc\services to communicate with the message server. Enqueue.Queue . User communicates using GUI. . SMMS: MESSAGE SERVER MONITORING ENQUEUE PROCESS / SERVER SM12 Monitoring Note: Server Naming convention is used because each of the process serving the user requests (Dialogue. Update.

Technically the Message and the Enqueue should reside on the same instance (It is not mandatory). If both are installed on the same machine then it will be more comfortable for message server to communicate with Enqueue process to obtain locks for Dialogue process that are coming from other instances.MULTIPLE LUWS MM Dept X + Y (LUW1) Z + M (LUW2) Q + R (LUW3) Sales Dept A + B (LUW1) X + Y (LUW2) R + Q (LUW3) Dead Lock Enqueue process the locks and unlock the record during an update.68 There will be 1 One Enqueue process installed during installation. Enqueue server maintains the lock table on the shared memory of the Central Instance (or on the instance where it is installed) It is recommended to increase the Enqueue processes only on the Central Instance. It is also possible to increase Enqueue processes to more than one depending upon the updates but most of the customer environments there will be only 1 One enqueue process. RFC . It is configured by the parameter rdisp/ wp_no_enq = 1 30-jul-09 DEAD LOCK SAP TRANS -----.

ENQ . 1.DIA TCODE .MSSG .LOCK . Check whether the update server is still performing the updates. Note: Enque table overflow is recorded in SM21 and ST22 Eg: Execute SU01 from Shawn user/ 800 and edit shramana user Execute SU01 from Shawn user/800 and edit shramana user Following message is displayed SM12 And now execute SM12 which displays the Exclusive Mode lock 2. If the lock table is filled (Enque/ Table_size) an overflow occurs in the lock table. If updating has not been interpreted. If the updating has stopped.69 DIA . In principle the lock which are older than one hour should be reported to the escalation manager.SM12 (Lock Management) Enqueue table size is defined by the parameter Enqueue/table_size=4MB (Earlier 1 MB to 4 MB) in Netweaver systems this can be increased to 100MB LOCK MONITORING/ ENQUEUE MONITORING Shared Mode Exclusive Mode. Locks are monitored in transaction SM12. Enque time is too high . We can resolve the problem by restarting the updates. then the lock table can quickly become over filled with the locks held by update requests.MSSG . then we must enlarge the lock table.

If the update gets deactivated then the locks are not released. there could be RFC issue or Enque wait time is increasing then consider increasing Enqueue work processes.70 As a part of the response time enqueue time should be 1ms . 31-jul-09 SPOOL PROCESSING User request . Update is deactivate (SM14) due to any of the issues in DB.(TST01. so highlight this issue to SAP) In some instances we may need to release the locks but we need to follow certain process. but there is a collision between PP. Get the written B&W approval from the user and terminate the session of that user using SM04. TST03) --. We need to ensure that dialogue process should not held for longer time. (Only Terminate or End that session) All the transaction activities are recorded in CDHDR Note: Initially 20Kb Mem is given from ztta_roll_first. Payroll update processing) consumes lot of time. Lock table is overflow and the locks are held in SM12 2. Dead locks (Usually never occurs. 3.PRINT User request .(Tables TBT*) BTC---. but however BTC is allowed.SPOOL -----. Check the period of lock (if it is older than 1 hour inform to the escalation manager) 3. If the Enqueue time increases i. 1. We may need to allow some locks for more than one hour or days (Eg. 4. Users complaint that he could not update a record and message pop up stating that the record is locked by user XYZ.DIA .5ms for Central instance and 100Ms in case of the request that is coming form Dialogue instance. TST03)--SPOOL -.e. Then we can consider the following 1.DIA-.(TST01. Manufacturing and Material Module.PRINT . Do not release the lock in SM12 (Even though there is an option) Lock deletion is recorded in SM21. 2.

Multiplexing . 2..To identify the tcode/ Authorization objects SP01 SU24 The Temse can be stored in database or OS level. Temse remains in the DB/OS unless they are deleted explicitly by SAP standard reports. These print request are processed by the respective Dialogue/ BTC and stores the content in TEMSE . User request to print a purchase order (or) user schedule to print dunning reports (LEGAL Notices. LOANS etc) 2.(s_spo_act) .e. This is only recommended when the requests are small in nature.71 PROCESS/ FLOW: 1. (Every day 50-100 Docs) if the size increases the search at file level consumes more time as (No indexes at file system) . Credits.Database tables TST01 and TST03) Note: DIALOGUE BTC . It is recommended because the print request are printed faster than database. TEMSE AT OS OR DB (WHICH ONE IS RECOMMENDED?) OS [G] 1.Single Process The Advantages of TEMSE. TEMSE size is 99000 Refer: SU22 . from Global directory requests can be converted to output request at faster rate than database. i.Temse is a temporary sequential objects that are stored at OS (File system) or Database level which is defined by the parameter rspo/store_location=G or DB (G Means Global Directory \usr\sap\SID\sys\global) (DB Means .

File system is not backup frequently as Database. the name of the author (USER). File system backup will be weekly. That is Temse is not secured at file system.e. fortnight.Spool Process DIALOGUE . Backup is a regular activity on database so the Temse is secured. Temse is a part of Normal Database (TST01 and TST03) no separate memory is required. monthly whereas database is hourly (Redo Logs) and daily DB Backup.[TST01. The Spool process reads from TST01 and TST03 i. Name of the Printer.Spool Process OUT PUT REQUEST FRONT END > Spool process comes at our Desktop Default setting is DB RZ11 : rspo_location : rdisp/ btctime 3.BTC request .72 3. TST02] . As it is stored in tables. DB [DB] 1. but shows the performance by using Indexes when the user grows (Temse can handle 90000 Requests) 2. DIALOGUE . No of copies are procured from TST01 and Printable data from TST03 . Consumes more time than Temse at OS when there are less no of records.

Whether Changeable or not. It is also possible to have dedicated instances which will provide only spool processes PROGRAM[ RSPO1041] to maintain TEMSE. We can configure as many as we can depending upon the available resources. Printer specific format. If it is performed remotely then it is said to be RAM (Remote access Method) Spool processes are configured by rdisp/wp_no_spo (Rdisp indicates instance specific) There should be at least 1 one Spool process in the entire system.73 Spool Process formats or converts spool requests to output requests i. Refer: From SE12 TPFYPROPTY Flag for changes Obj_name = parameter Rdisp/time Type T denotes Dynamic X .e. SE11 > table name : /* (/ is a customer name space) . If the format is performed locally then it is said to be LAN (Local Access Method). 01-Aug-09 SAP System Note: We should not touch the Repository data of name space 'A' to 'X'.

TBTC* . (Existing) Logical Spool Server.74 TADIR is the repository TSTC .Line Print Demon Drivers are specific to O/S and not to SAP 1.SPAD LPD . SPOOL ADMINISTRATION TCODE .BTC . . It is also referred as Real spool server. This is not existing but pointed to a Real spool/ another logical spool server.Is the T-Codes with the program name. Market place > keys & Reqs > Development Name space.TS* Tables Dialogue --------------------. This is used for load balancing the spools.TS* Tables Spool process reads from TEMSE and convert spool requests to the output requests (Printer specific requests). Note: STMS > System > Transport Tool no_import_all = 0 (No Mass Transportation) SPOOL MECHANISM Dialogue . It is used to define output devices/ Spool servers and access methods Defining a Spool Server: The instance with atleast one spool process is referred as spool server.

... Execute SPAD 2. 1...........Display then Change 3. . Click on the Spool Server . Click on create Server Name: LOGICAL SP1 Server Class : Mass Printing Logical Server: Mapping : willsys28_00 Alt server: .75 Note: We can set up a dedicated instance for spool process....... CONFIGURING THE OUT PUT DEVICE...

Click on change 5.76 DEFINING OUTPUT DEVICE/ PRINTER 1. Specify the Output device name Specify the description : Local Printer 7. Click on display 4. Click on output device 3. Device type: HP Model & Manufacturer . Execute SPAD 2. Click on create 6.

Telex etc) Authorization Group : Specifies the access control methods Model: 2200 Location : 5th floor A wing..Author.. SAP sends programs in terms of Patches.TEMSE -.) . Printer.. Device Class: (Standard. Fax.. Number of copies When printer is defined Spool server (LS/ RS) is assigned In order to print we need the spool process from the assigned instance to convert the spool request in to the output request. -------------------Note: Dialogue --. If required write to SAP and try to get the device type.77 Device type specifies that the output device is recognized by SAP. If there is no device type available then select SAPWIN. Front End. Print server. Message : Only used by Pay Roll. SPAD > Utilities > For device types > Import If the character set is required. (either Local. Spool process uses Access Methods to format the request.

LOCAL ACCESS METHOD The spool work process and the host spool resides in the same machine i. label printing.78 --------------------02-Aug-09 ACCESS METHODS It specifies the process of formatting the spool request to printer specific output request. HSM. If this parameter is not used spool congestion occurs.e. Sensitive docs. Select L Select C for UNIX based system (Local Print Method) for Windows (which uses direct operating system call) Select F for FRONT END printing Spool work process goes to the user desktop and format the request based on the printer that is connected to desktop. the work process transfers the spool request to the spool system locally. Restrict the no of work process that can go into front end mode using the parameter. rdisp/wp_no_spo_fro_max = 2 i. Specify I for Achieving device (Optical Devices. two work processes can be used for front end printing. time consuming than any other methods.e. Jukebox (stores each copy (output doc)) Hierarchal storage machine . This is more expensive. Advantages: Check printing. Disadvantages: No user can print in the background because the desktop initiation is not possible in the background during off peak hours.

It will transfer the formatting to remote system using SAP specific protocol SAPLPD For LOCAL & REMOTE For FRONT END > Needs the printer models > SAPWIN When Remote access method is specified we need the following HOST Printer: Destination HOST: i.79 REMOTE ACCESS METHODS The formatting by spool work process is performed on remote system.e. the printer should be configured on destination HOST. Specify U for UNIX operating system where formatting is performed on the remote machine (Print server) using Berkeley protocol. Note: Front end cannot be scheduled in the background. Specify S for windows operating system. . It can be a print server.

In Process 5. SP01 is used to monitor the spool requests based on statuses. Tray info is also similar. 1. If we need the exact status then uncheck the box. Status '+' 3. In systems where the spool system does not receive any information about the host 6. The system then sets the status to Complete (Competed or Error) The output request printed successfully.Minus' : Indicates not yet sent to the host system (No output requests exist) The spool process is busy/ congested. Status '. Waiting 4. It improves performance. Completed : . if too many requests with this Status indicates need for increasing spool WP. ----The Major advantage of TEMSE is the documents can be displayed even before it is printed. If this option is checked. users can monitor the requests using SP02. SP02 The spool requests are monitored in SP01. this status displayed for approximately one minute. Spool Requests (Stores in Temse) Output Requests Note: Put a check mark [ ] Do not query host spooler for output requests.80 SPOOL MONITORING SP01. Output Attributes: Depends upon the company requirements. 2. Printing : : : : Spool request is being generated (Stored in Spool system) Waiting for processing by spool The spool WP is formatting the output for printing The host spool is printing the output request. If the SAP spool system does not receive any status information from the host spool.

Use Menu "Spool Request and print directly" or select print with changed parameters. 1. RSPO0041. Printer issues like (Page setting issues.Select the request -.81 spool . . 2. TEMSE will be full when it reaches 99. if required we can change the printer and reprint the document.We can also use SPAD for reorganization of spool (but the logic is same) For this Execute .Check the availability of the printer.The TEMSE is full i. (RSPO1041.RSPO0041 ----------Refer SM01 . The requests have not printed and remain in the spool system until they are deleted or until they reach their expiration date and are deleted during a reorganization. Error : It indicates a server error such as network error. the system changes to complete as soon as the output request is sent to the host spool. RSPO0043). print server not available) these printer specific issues will be resolved by Network Team/ Print Team.10 (1 as High) 3. Spool request cannot be generated . These are used to delete the old spool requests based on selection criteria.We need to reorganize the spool requests using the SAP standard reports. From SP01 --.000 requests and log is generated in SM21 (System Log) .SPAD > Full ADMIN > ADMIN > Delete old spool requests Or from SA38 execute the program .Transaction Codes [Lock/ Unlock] . cartridge issues. While changing the parameter we can set the priority between 1 . User complain that they could not print documents to a specific printer. 7. printer not available) paper out. . In general the spool requests which are older than 14 days will be deleted if standard jobs are scheduled in SM36 they also checks the consistency of TEMSE periodically. RSPO1043.e.

SP01 : Spool request > Forward > (Client to client) Recipient : DDIC Use SBWP (SAP business work place) to display the request in inbox. PRINT QUEUES Note: Should have enough spool work process to format the requests to printer specific requests. SETTING DEFAULT PRINTER From SU01 we can specify default printer to the user but do not check the box "delete the request after output immediately" which improves the spool performance.82 ---------SP12 .[ ] print sequentially in SPAD from OP devices attributes tab. If this is unchecked it prints faster but sequence is not maintained. Print sequentially consumes time to print in the order. The printer can be locked during maintenance in SPAD To process the requests sequentially based on serial numbers Select the option -. 03-Aug-09 . Similarly we should have enough output devices to avoid the print queues.SPOOL TEMSE ADMINISTRATION It is used to monitor the memory allocated for TEMSE Note: If we need to forward a spool request select the request in SP01 and forward it to another user where user can print from alternative printer.

ready. .3302 where 01. spool. cancelled) Job step Program (SA38). finished. wp_no_btc=0. SM69).gathers performance into ST03 BTC communicates with enqueue for locking and spool for print. If required we can also install a standalone gateway on a JAVA engine. 3301. Gateway provides an interface so that the external system can communicate with SAP system on the specified port. SM63) RSCOLL . Released. Systems) TBTC* tables Standard background jobs Pause(rdisp/btctime. Message server and enqueue BTC Expensive.150 MB 5 . Gateway is used to communicate between SAP and NON-SAP systems. OSCommands (SM49.83 Dialogue 2 Min / Instance 75 . time consuming No time limit Off peak time Scheduled to run periodically using variants Statuses (Scheduled. There will be only 1 gateway/ instance. Gateway listens on port '3300'+instance number (3300. active. long running. btctrans1) Atleast 2 for the entire system SM36. SM37 Operation modes (RZ04.10 Users (Refer ST07) Handles request Interactively Multiplexing Rdisp/max_wp_runtime = 600 SM50/ SM66 wp_no_dia DPMON It initiates update. GATEWAY WORK PROCESS SMGW SMGW is used to monitor the gateway process. External Programs (on Tar. 02 are the instances). BTC.

But the consistency is not checked (say for eg. They can be managed/ edited using a notepad. if we modify the instance profile WP DIA=2000 and there is no error message and versions are not maintained under OS level) DEV_DVEBMGS00_willsysdel. Startup 3. enqueue host) Instance Profile This is specific to instance configuration such as work process. Do not modify these parameter under any circumstances on OS level. IDOC are transferring they use gateway) INSTANCE MANAGEMENT Instance is managed by using profiles. Starting Sequence . EDI.84 When RFC's are defined between the systems they use SAP gateway when (ALE. Startup Profile Startup profile consists of startup parameters like Starting Database Starting Message Server Dispatcher + Work. The profiles resides at OS level in the directory (usr\sap\<SID>\sys\profile). security parameters (Password. timeout parameters etc. Default 2. Profiles will resides in (usr/sap/<SID>/sys/profiles) There are three types of Profiles 1. So these profiles are imported into database management for consistency check and version management. Default Profile It is used to provide global parameters for all the instances. buffer parameters. User restrictions). Instance Profile As part of post installation we import the profiles of Active servers from RZ10. Message server host.

4.85 1.TPFYPROPTY RZ11 is also used to change some parameters dynamically without restarting the system but they will be reset once the system is restarted. RZ10 changes are permanent The field type 'T' Specifies the dynamic parameters. RZ10 There are three types of Administration. Total = 11 (including Central Instance) 11 X 2 per instance (Start + Instance) 22 22 + 1 (Default Instance) = 23 PROFILE MANAGEMENT Documentation for profiles are available in RZ10 Profiles resides in the table . There will be only one default profile in the entire system which provides global values. 2. Startup profile is read by the system to start the engine by starting (DISP+WORK) on dialogue instance. message server and dispatcher in Central Instance. Startup profile is read by the system to start the engine by starting database. Eg. 3. How many profiles are available on a system with 10 Dialogue instances.This is used to set the instance specific parameters. . Instance specific profile .

GUI based using mouse . Basic Maintenance: It is used to maintain the profile parameters without any technical names. 2. It only specifies the path of the parameters. Administration data No need to maintain using this option.86 1.

Logon groups sapmsg. It will effect only after restarting the Server. Copy > Save and Activate the profile. The profile changes are updated at OS level and the existing profile is marked as . Profiles are changed on SAP recommendation or based on experience.Application Monitor: User Distribution SMLG . System will hang and may not restart.87 3. 04-Aug-09 LOGON LOAD BALANCING SMLG ST07 .BAK and a new profile is created in the profile directory.ini . Do not change any of the profiles on trail and error method. Extended Maintenance Used by administrator using parameter names Specify the input by including new parameters or modify the existing one.

SMLG > Define the groups and assign the instances. Fail over (Logical) (As we are configuring logical system) Load balancing provides the following logon groups which are defined in SMLG. If the users are logging to different instances the buffers are scattered therefore they are not effectively used. User select group and click on logon. So for this * Note: DDLOG is the synchronization table User A A+B =50 User B A+B =75 Buffer Synchronization 1. User uses SAP GUI -groups option to login 2.88 Logon Load Balancing SMLG It is used to route the requests to the least loaded instance of that group. Identify the components along with users.ini is used to display the available entries 3. Load balancing to avoid long queues 3. . Mechanism 1. Factors to define LLB. Buffers are optimally utilized. 2. Saplogon.

saplogon.IP Address --. saproute. ETL . But dealers and suppliers use non-SAP system so it is required to establish communication between SAP and NON SAP systems and perform the data transfer periodically.ini to identify the message server and etc/services for message server port.89 4. So there is need to transfer the legacy system data to SAP system.INV Example: Reliance. RFC's are defined in [SM59]. Sapmsg.ini. When the user select group. Billing.ini ---. using SAP. Invoices. Example: A customer/ company is running business for the past 30 Years.Load SAP Hero Honda XML Non SAP Dealers SM59 RFC: REMOTE FUNCTION CALL RFC is used to communicate between SAP systems and SAP to Non-SAP systems using TCP/IP protocol. saprfc. supplier details.ini. PO's.Hostname of the message server Central instance (but not always) DATA TRANSFER TECHNIQUES During the implementation of the legacy system needs to be preserved or used in the current system. Hero Honda [B2B Company to Dealers] not B2C [Distributers to customers] they communicate with dealers. Example: Customer implemented SAP but the employees who are old cannot make use of SAP system.ini (For library). sapdoccd.ini 5. 6. The request is routed to the favorite server.Transfer . The data entered in the legacy system i. account payables.e. account receivables and P&L (Profit and Loss). He is maintaining customer details.PO BI ---. After go live both systems SAP and legacy travel parallely. The dispatcher process the request normally. It looks for sapmsg. vendor details. There are 4 types of RFC's . This information is required by the customer in SAP System. suppliers. Message server communicates will all the dispatchers and identifies the least loaded server and mark it as a favorite server in SMLG. They would like to work on the traditional systems. employees and salaries. Shipping are to be transferred periodically(Hourly) bi-hourly(for every 4 hrs) or daily SO --.Extract .

Queue RFC 1. It ensures transaction consistency of LUW and reliability of data transmission. Asynchronous RFC 2. This is reliable but time consuming and expensive (Client Copy) the job should get finished. A program RSARFCSE is scheduled in the background to run for every 60 seconds.90 1. SMQ1 .It is an advanced version of TRF and ensures that the transaction is committed based on FIFO/ Queue. SMQ2 .It is not like ARFC.(Like a post card). The sending system may or may not receive it. (like a register post). A user is created in the parent client and transferred to the child client when they are available? 4.It is an advanced version of ARFC and SRFC. Synchronous RFC . This is consistence and reliable.TRFC . It is used to document all the transactional ID's and ensure that they are received by the recipient system. Synchronous RFC 3. The transmission is not reliable.Provides interface to monitor Inbound queues. there is no acknowledgement from the receiving . i. Transactional RFC 4. If the receiving system is not available the process goes into RFC/ CPIC/ Sleep mode and waits until it is wakened by the target system.. Note: SAP uses CPIC protocol SAP specific (Common Programming Interface for Communication) to communicate between system. Transactional RFC . . Example : Central user administration. Target system/ Receiving system may be busy i. Asynchronous RFC . Transaction SM58 is used for Transactional RFC.e.to monitor the outbound queues of a sending system refer SCOTT for FAX. It gets an acknowledgement from the target system.e. Berkley UNIX PRINTER CPIC SRFC 3. all the resources are used up. 2. Queued RFC . The request goes to receiving system if it is not handled a Transaction ID is generated by the source system..

DEVCLNT900 To identify the systems easily by name 1. So we need to identify which client is the business client. Preciously SAP is client based (A mandatory field while login) Each client is defined with a logical system name that is defined in SALE. Defining RFC Connection . There should be unique SID in the Landscape.Provide the name of the logical system 2. Technical settings (Host name and Instance No) 5. Description about the connection 4. Remote logon Perform three times to add 3 systems. Define Logical System (<SID>CLNT009) 3.SALE SAP systems consists of more than one client . Assign logical system to the client. Save the connection. From 000/ Sapuser Execute SCUA / . client by 3 digit number. Example: To configure central user administration SCUA Tcode is used. Goto > SALE > Basic Settings > Logical System 2.SM59 1. Logical system number should be <SID>CLNT<CLNT_Number> Eg. So.91 05-Aug-09 DEFINING SYSTEMS . Logon Security (Client.technically 1000 client can be created in one system. (Sap System linking and enabling). Each system is identified by SID. Test Connection. Select the connection type '3' 3. Central User Administration SCUA Goto > BD64 or SALE > To define the sending systems and receiving systems Or Use the SAP standard moral for that application. UID.model : willsys > Create (The logged in system is treated as Sending system) We need to define recipient/ receiving systems . Logon Language) 6. PWD. SM59 .

It wont allows us to create because the receiving systems will become a Child system.Stop the other systems . It will be in the Understandable format of both sending and receiving systems.define systems and SAVE . WE05 is the Tcode to monitor the IDOCS SCUL to check the logs WE05 > Status .Electronic Data Interchange It is used to communicate between SAP to NON-SAP systems. IDOCS (Intermediate Documents) are used to transfer the data.Being in parent create an user assigning profile SAP_ALL ..SAP to SAP only. EDI .92 DEVCLNT001 DEVCLNT000 DELCLNT001 save to configure CUA Goto back end systems Try to execute SU01 and create an user . ALE . SAP . SCUM is performed only in the Parent System Eg: Consider a Scenario .Execute SM58 (Transactional RFC) Users are distributed to the child client using TRFC(SM58) and if the client system is not Available the record hangs in SM58 and ensure that is updated in the child client. To delete : Execute report : RSDELCUA or SCUA select the client and delete.NON SAP.

Instance is down) But on SAP front we need to monitor the process utilization. Tcode IDOC to check the consistency WE21 to identify the ports for IDOC processing. database logs.States that the application document not posted fully. Programs) PROCESS MONITORING SM50 (INSTANCE)/ SM66 (GLOBAL) . dead locks. Free..states there is a syntax error. btc failures. system logs. It is used to monitor the health of systems in terms of storage. 06-Aug-09 Status (Killed. Failed spool requests.. Ended.93 0 to 49 50 52 53 02 07 .states that the document is posted .are the outbound IDOCS and above are the inbound IDOCS . system dumps. Reports. RFC failures.states that there is error in the port . SYSTEM MONITORING Gateway is a port that listens on 3300. . Transactions. work load on the system (Users. memory and CPU technically. pending updates.

stopped. Count(*) as Total from DEV. If more number goes into PRIV we may need to restart the instance.Self Locked 64 Administrator Lock never becomes 0 ------------------Refer SM12 SM13 SM14 SM36 SM37 SM21 ST22 RZ04 SM63 SP01 . sleep. BNAME. Identify the user. time.To define the Back ground Job .RSBTCDEL . It will be automatically down (Killed) by system in 600 Seconds. UGLAG from USR02 128 . Note : Rdisp/gui_auto_logout = 900 sec ---. Task Manager or Kill -9 Command on UNIX. The process has to complete the job or Heap Memory should exhaust. Monitor the processes with status(reasons) running. Do not change the status of users in the USR02 Table. PRIV.Update requests .ABAP Dumps/ Runtime Error . It will be created with Password pass.Select Lock Entries . We may need to kill the processes with status PRIV using DPMON.Deletes the batch job logs . hold.JOB monitor .Spool Standard Jobs .Example --User pwd forgotten and all the users are locked if SAP* is deleted.Output controller . If BTC is running for longer times check whether it is permissible as per the process document.Update program Administration (Deactivate) . so that process comes out. Dialogue process should not consume more than 1-2 seconds for normal tasks. Refer : select MANDT.Maintain Operation Modes .94 Monitor the instance specific processes in SM50 and Global Specific Process overview based on status in SM66. If it is not killed the process might be occupied by dedicated resource and uses heap memory with status PRIV. client. Action.USR02 group by MANDT. RFC/ CPIC.Display/ Maintain Operation Mode Set .System Log . Select MANDT.

Global Work Process overview WE05 .0 Installation Exports [1 of 4 ] Kernel.User List.Process Overview SM51 . Number Provide PID. DPMON . 07-Aug-09 Market Place > SAP Support Portal > Suserid> >Downloads > Installation Upgrades > My Company Components SAP Solution Manager 7.RSSNAPDL . Java Components > Add to download Basket Paste in <SID>\sys\exe\UC | Install the download manager SYSTEM MONITORING Each customer provides a standard check list to monitor their systems from time to time.RSMO13002.Delete Old spool logs and files . SM59 .QRFC (outbound) queue SMQ2 .RFC Destination SM50 .IDOC List SMQ1 . Eg: BSI (British Standard Institute) requests the consultants to monitor the system on hourly basis.95 .Collects performance info in Transaction ST03 .QRFC (Inbound) queue SM04 .RSPO1041 .Delete old update request logs .Delete Old ABAP Dumps . .Active SAP Servers SM66 .RSPO1043 .Spool Reorganization.RSCOLL00 .When the user could not login to the system (Experience Hour glass) Process the list @ OS Level DPMON K Provide SR.

Analyse the reason for failure (Check if the system is scheduled for downtime) If we are authorized start the instance and if it could not be started then look into work directory for logs. 2. Identify the instances which are down i. Ok. Check lists contains the following 1. SM51 to list the servers and monitor the instances which are up and running.96 P&G requests their production systems to be monitored periodically for every 8 Hrs. we need to report with high priority. If any instance is down.e. ---IMPORT ABAP : c:\prog files\sapinst_instdir\erp\system\ora\central\as Err. exe. Security On JOD > . ---08-Aug-09 TRANSPORT GROUPS Note: usr\sap\trans can be on JOD. JOQ. SM50 identifies the process which are long running. JOP or on separate disk. Transport Groups with individual transport directories.

Login to DC (Domain Controller) Development System/ 000 client with user like DDIC 2. Execute STMS > Will prompt to create a transport Domain.Perform Post Installation DICO STMS From Menu Overview > Systems Extras > Delete TMS configuration or execute DICO 1. We need to include systems in the DC. Login to the DC 6. Select Icon > Other Configuration [][] Include System in Domain Pops up DC Host/ Target Host : JOMLERTDEV DC Sys No/ System No: 00 SAVE Upon saving the request from quality system is sent to DC to include in the domain. Select the system JOQ and click on Approve from Menu SAP System > Approve . Domain name will be Domain<SID> Save the Domain.97 Perform SICK SE06 > Standard Installation . Login to Quality system Execute STMS > As DC is already created from the above step. 4. Similarly perform the to include production into DC 5. 3. From DC From Menu Overview > Systems JOD JOQ JOP Select the system JOP from SAP System Menu > Click on approve.

3 . Training] .2 Clients [DEV and Customizing. JOQ --. 7.Say YES Note: In principle there will be only one client in the production system. > Continue > SAVE Three system configuration . they maintain transport groups themselves i. SAVE.Transport directories are configured. UNIT Testing] SYSTEM MONITORING SM51 SM50/ SM66 SM13 SM14 SM37 SP01 . Defining the Landscape From the DC/ 000/ DDIC > Goto STMS Click on the icon transport routes Click on change Menu .e.Configuration > Standard configuration > Three systems in group.e.98 TRANSPORT GROUP If each system has their own transport group i.2 Clients [Test.UNIT TEST JOP ---.1 Client JOD---. Double Click on the system JOD from Communication Tab From Transport Group Tab change mode Provide Name : Group_JOD Perform the same for JOQ.

We can also identify the logs of other instances. AL08 SM04 SM21: System logs specific to the instance. This TCODE is also used to logoff the user session if required. System log > Remote system It is used to display the logs for the following activities. Identify the users who are consuming more memory and also identify the transactions and identify why it is consuming more time. .99 SM04/ AL08 : Used to identify the number of users logged on to the instance.

Session Termination due to network failures. Time out errors Identify the error message from the log and search in the market place.100 1. 5. . Archive Stuck. Update (Lags in Memory) 3. Segment Management. It displays the logs based on date/time. Divide Error 1/0 2. ST22 recovers the following 1. 7. 8. 4. As a part of monitoring we need to identify the messages with color red. All ABAP dumps are documented 3. System Startup/ Work process log 2. t-code & problem class. When we delete SM12 the locks are logged. ST22 ABAP DUMPS When ever a SAP Program (ABAP program) could not be executed due to an error it will be thrown out from the GUI. All the database related errors like Space issues.Screen and a dump is recorded in ST22. Infinite Loops. Illegal attempts and user locks 6. user.

8. max-extents reached. This error requires memory corrections to the parameters.101 1.Holds the transaction and the Program name TSTCT . Program Corrections: The problem is with SAP standard program for which SAP provides a correction through notes (The correction can be applied through SNOTE) 4. 3. endless loops.During day light savings the system date and time has to be changed. Memory related issues with error message PXA. Note TSTC . The program need to be corrected by the developer. Illegal time: (Day light savings) . the above error occurs. SWAP. 'Z') consumes more memory. Database issues like table space over flow. Customer defined programs ('Y'. 5. Update Deactivation : SM14 7. 09-Aug-09 PERFORMANCE TUNING ST02 . Stop the AS and change the date if not. TIME_OUT error: The rdisp/max_wprun_time program requires more time than the time defined in 2. archive stuck. improper select statements etc. Enqueue Table Overflow: SM12 6. PAGE.Holds the description/ text of a T-Code. OUT OF MEMORY.

Sec or 10% of the response time. Generally it should not be more than 50 M. 1. If the time exceeds. User desktop is slow 2. network might be congested. consider the following. parameters) . 1. The GUI time should not exceed more than 200 M. Rest of all the users are allowed to login to Dialogue instance) Note: GUI response time is not considered as a part of the Dialogue response time because the request is not received by the dispatcher. Roll in Time: The work process copies the Roll in User context into WP task handler. 3. 3.Sec. Wait Time: The amount of time the user request sits in the queue. There are sufficient processes but the existing process are held with expensive request. The time taken by the work process to copy the context (Roll In) is referred as Roll in time.Sec. The work process are not sufficient to handle the user requests. If this is same with all the users. If it is more than this consider the following. 1. (1:5) 2. Generally it should not be more than 50 M.102 This complete journey should be completed within 600 Milli seconds on an average or goes up to 600 Seconds Max. Login/disable_multi_gui_login. Front End Time/ GUI Time : Time taken by the user to reach the dispatcher is called as Front end time. 1. The user request is expensive (FI and basis will logon to the central instance. 2. The user context is heavy to Roll in (User might having more authorizations. If it exceeds this consider the following.

(Communication between any BW/ CRM/ SCM system). Roll Wait Time: During the processing when a dialogue process communicates with RFC's and waiting for the response at this time the user context is copied/ rolled back to BTC ---. or WP waiting for a lock. If the processing time is more we can consider either ABAP program is expensive. Run SGEN tcode after patch application. Enqueue Time: The time taken by the process to communicate with enqueue for obtaining the lock while updating a record is referred as Enqueue time. upgrade. screen info from the database and generate these objects. 5. Roll wait time Sleep Note: Roll wait time is not considered as a part of response time. It should be as minimal as possible. There wont be any threshold value as it depends on External system. screen is expensive or SQL statements are expensive.Target system. 7. It should not be more than 200 M. Sec. 9. If CPU time is more consider tuning ABAP Programs Refer to ABAP development team (Also Refer SE30 ABAP Run time Analysis. 6.Sec. 4.Sec. If it exceeds more than this time we can consider that the enqueues are not sufficient or Enqueue table overflow.Wait time). LG Time: Load and Generation Time: Time required to load the objects such as source code. ST05 Performance Analysis) 8. The processing time should not be more than 200 M. Enqueue time should be 5 M. Roll Out Time: The time taken by the work process to copy the information from its local memory to Roll Area/ Roll File/ User context/ Roll buffer and it should not be more than 50 M. new installation or when there is a mass change in the programs. CPU Time: When the request are processed using interpreters an amount of CPU is utilized to process the request using CPU resources is referred as CPU time. GUI info. RFC or CPIC Time: The time taken by the process to communicate with external interfaces is referred as RFC time. As CPU time is included in processing time it is not calculated in the response time.Sec.103 2. on a Central instance and 100 M. If the roll wait time increases consider there is a bottle next on the RFC communication. Minimize the authorizations. 10. .RFC --. (Refer LC10 : Live Cache).Sec on a Dialogue instance. CPU time should not be more than (40% of the Dialogue response time . Processing Time: The time taken by the work process to process the user request using interpreters.

. Generally it should not be more than 40% of (Response time ... * PHYS_MEMSIZE: This parameter restricts the usage of memory by that instance.. The response time should be worked out only when there are atleast 10. The DB resources are stake(CPU and Memory Utilization) i... To . 4. IF DB Time is more consider the following..Total Time 10-Aug-09 WORK LOAD ANALYSIS ST03 ST03 It is used to calculate the work load analysis. 1.. MEMORY Physical Memory: The memory that is available or the memory that is configured on the instance using the parameter PHYS_MEMSIZE. 3. Database Time: The time taken by the process to reach the database and process the request.. 2. Ф Indicates .Wait time). It is similar to the CPU time.Average Time # Indicates . .. If the response time is more and dialogue steps of fewer 1 or 2 then the average response time could not be worked out. Dialogue Response time: The time taken by the Dialogue process to process the request which includes [Wait time . The DB statistics job is not scheduled in DB13. reports and users. The DB Buffers are not sufficient. 12.. Virtual Memory: The physical memory and SWAP memory/ Pagging Memory on the disk The physical memory will not be sufficient to provide the users for temporary work area/ Calculations/ so a part of the disk which is configured for SWAP is used..e.. Select Expert Mode to identify the expensive programs. Missing indexes in DB02..104 11. Roll Out Time] [Wait time + RI + RO + PI +LG + RFC + DB +ENT] Note: Team Viewer is the Remote Desktop support Software BOMGAR. transactions. While calculating the average consider the number of dialogue steps of the transaction user.000 dialogue steps.. Resource bottle neck on DB.

105 On UNIX during installation assign atleast 20GB of SWAP. On windows assign atleast 3*RAM size/ 20 GB which ever is higher. Shared Memory: The memory that is used by all the applications (OS, DB, R/3) Extended Memory: The memory that is used by SAP work processes is referred as Extended Memory. Local Memory: The memory that is assigned to work process is referred as Local Memory Roll Memory/ Roll Buffer: The memory that is used by work process to store the user context information is referred as Roll memory. Private/ Heap Memory: The memory that is used by work process exclusively by restricting itself. MEMORY ALLOCATION 1. User submits the request. 2. Dispatcher assigns the WP 3. WP requires memory to Roll -In the user context. 4. WP gets memory from local memory which is defined in the parameter ztta/roll_area. It gets only a part of it which is defined by parameter ztta/roll_first (20KB) 5. If the allocated memory is not sufficient then it gets allocated from Extended memory ztta/roll_extension. 6. If that is also not sufficient then it uses the remaining ROLL Area. 7. If that is also not sufficient then it uses HEAP/ PRIVATE Memory and the WP goes into PRIVATE Mode. 8. Heap memory is defined by the parameter Abap/heaplimit=4GB Abap/heap_area_dia Transaction ST02 provides the memory utilization 9. Each dialogue uses abap/heap_area_dia and non dia uses abap/heap_area_nondia both process should not exceed abap/heap_area_total. Memory : RAM is the first Memory. Out of this we don't want to allow SAP to utilize the whole memory. Virtual Memory: Pagefile.sys 11-Aug-09

106

User ---> Dispatcher ---> WP ---> Rolls Its Memory Requires Memory to Roll In to the Task Handler Ztta/roll_first - 20KB Extended Memory is used by all the Work Processes. 20 KB ztta/roll_first through ztta/roll_area Extended Memory ztta/roll_extension : 512 MB Come back to local Memory If all the memory is consumed it cant come back so goes to the Heap/ Private Memory. CASE STUDY We have configured 20 WP in the Instance and we know pretty well that each user request consumes a minimum of 25MB of Memory WP 1 2 . . 8 9 MEMORY Roll_first 20KB 20KB 4GB Roll_extn 512MB 512MB 8GB Heap 2GB 2GB STATUS PRIV PRIV

Roll_Area 19.980MB 19.980MB

20KB

0MB

19.980MB

5MB

PRIV

107 Rdisp/max_priv_time When the process uses Heap Memory it is used in Heap/ Private mode. The processes which are in PRIV Mode cannot be timed out by Rdisp/max_wprun_time Rdisp/max_priv_time So configure so that the process is timed out after this time (600 Seconds/ 10 Minutes) when the work process goes into PRIV mode it will not listen to rdisp/max_wprun_time=600sec. It will be released only after the task completion or Memory is exhausted(Abap/heap_area_dia)/ timed out by rdisp/max_priv_time. This situation is referred as Hour Glass Mode or WP Congestion. At this situation we can use DPMON or SM04 to terminate the user session. If not kill the process at OS level based on PID.

Q. The user complains that he could not login to the system - Hour Glass Mode? A. 1. WP into PRIV Mode 2. ARCHIVE STUCK (The user could not update any record and results in hour glass mode) BUFFERS ST02

The frequently used content and less frequently modified is eligible for buffering. Company Name, GUI, screens, calendars, table definitions, programs etc are eligible for buffering. Data such as Exchange Rates, Transactional Data(PO, Sales Order, Invoice, Billing) are not eligible for buffering. Buffering is specific to instance. Each buffered element is stored in the memory of the instance in terms of Directories and Space. Eg. Programs can be stored up to 150000 KB, 150 MB in 37,500 directories. If the directories/ size is full then Buffer Swaps occurs in ST02. When SWAP occurs the content needs to be fetched again from Database which increases the response time.

12-Aug-09

108 RAISING A REQUEST TO SAP FOR A SAP ROUTER From the Market Place www.service.sap.com > click on SAP Support Portal. > From Help and Support Tab > click on Report a Product Error From Here Provide Customer : Installation : System ID :

Company Name JOD

Next > Search Term : SAP Router Or Go with Message Select the system & select the component Raise a request as follows: Dear SAP, We have installed solution manager and 3 ERP systems in the landscape. Before we start implementation we would like to establish connecting with SAP using SAP Router. Name of the Server : JOMLSOLMAN IP Address : 213.210.213.197 (This is where our SAPRouter is going to be configured) We are using dedicated public IP Address SID INSTANCE NO : JOS : 00

Please send us certificate details. { Open the connectivity, How many hours it needs to be opened; Provide Userid and password/ Client } Provide your name Hit SEND Note: from Market Place > My Profile > Maintain Single Sign on Certificate > Specify Password. R. Shunmugam Phone No:

109 From Market place > Check the email. SAP : 213.210.213.197 JOLSOLMAN 194.39.131.34 ---------------Earlier from the Back End system say for eg: SOLMAN system 001/ DDIC > Login to the SOLMAN system Discontinued from 2006 TCODE > OSS1 (Online SAP Service) From Menu Parameter > Technical Settings Hit Change SAPRouter at SAP

Note: Instance 98 ( Is for SOLMAN Diagnostic Tool), 99(SAP Router) All kind of services can be acquired from OSS1

Over the web using DIAG protocol. (It is discontinued) ---------------4 systems in the landscape SAP Router is a software program which is used to restrict to access the customer systems using the table SAPROUTTAB. SAPROUTTAB is a text file with out any extension in the router directory with prefix P, D and S (Permit, Deny and Secure sometimes)

STEPS TO CONFIGURE SAP ROUTER 1. Create a directory with name saprouter in usr\ sap\directory. usr\sap\saprouter Ensure that the folder has full (Read + Write permissions)

110

Note SAPRouter is an executable in the kernel directory (usr\sap\SID\sys\exe\uc\NTi386). Nipping is an executable to ping to the router. This two executables needs to be copied to the router directory. However we can also download from market place. On Windows> Check whether the SAPRouter service is running or not to make sure whether the SAPRouter is already configured or not. 2. From Market Place > My Company App Components Look for SAPROUTER700 Windows server X64 Click on Add to download basket. 3. Login as <SID>ADM 4. Create a sub directory E:\usr\sap\saprouter 5. From Command Prompt Change directory to trans as it is holding the downloaded files E:\usr\sap\trans> sapcar -xvf saprouter_12_100004305.sar 6. copy the two uncared files in to the saprouter directory. 7. From market place click on Download Area > SAP Cryptographic Software .sar file.

It depends on OS We can download either CAR or SAR file

111

Paste the file in usr\sap\saprouter sapcar -xvf 90000114.car ----------Note: Download Manager > Configuration > SUSERID and PWD -----------

8. Create a service called SAPRouter service. From Command Prompt > Saprouter> ntscmgr install SAPRouter -b E:\usr\sap\saprouter\saprouter.exe - p "JOSADM" It will create a service. JOS is the SID 9. Define a file SAPROUTTAB Create a file SAPROUTTAB in the saprouter dir with out any extension

10. SNC (Secured Network Connection Needs to be added) For this Goto > www.service.sap.com/SAPROUTER-SNCADD Apply Copy [ Shows the Distinguished Name] > Hit Continue 11. Define the Environment Variable. My Comp > Properties > Advanced> Variable : SECUDIR Path: E:\usr\sap\saprouter Variable :SNC_LIB Path: E:\sur\sap\saprouter\nt-X86_64\sapcrypto.dll Sapcrypt.dll to encrypt and decrypt the messages. 12. Generating certificate from Customers End (SOLMAN System) Use the command Sapgenpse.exe will be in nt-X86_64 so goto

112 Saprouter> CD nt-X86_64 Saprouter\nt-X86_64> sapgenpse get_pse -v -r certreq -p local.....pse "Paste the distinguished name" Prompts for PIN : any password Twice Sapgenpse . Work file certreq in \nt-X86_64 Open with notepad And copy from BEGIN to END Paste in the STEP 10 in the text box and hit Continue Click on request certificate It generates a text with BEGIN to END...SAP Generic Personal Security Encryption 13.pse -o JOSADM Will create a file cred_v2 16.9 .msc > saprouter From Logon Tab Select This Account : JOSADM Apply -------------------------------------------To Uninstall Ntscmgr install saprouter -b E:\.pse 15. Router as Service Services. SAPROUTTAB > open with notepad > copy the whole content (from already configured system) > provide> SAP IP > Our IP...14 SAPSR2 . 17. Now copy from BEGIN to END from SAP that site/ Screen Paste it in a notepad file(without extension) with file name srcert in the folder nt-X86_64 14. Importing the Certificate Nt-X86_64> sapgenpse import_own_cert -c srcert -p local. TO check the Distinguished name Sapgenpse get_my_name -v -n issuer 18. SAPSR3 . being in nt-X86_64 > sapgenpse seclogin -p local.

Execute SM59 SAPOSS > Change IP Address of SAPRouter at Customer Side And also change at SAP Side Router String --------------------------------------Goto Market Place Download service connection Maintain Data > System Data SOLMAN Production System Goto DB Server Hostname > SOLMAN IP Address : 124. SAP Router provides the authorization and we need to provide the authentication. SAP able to connect and we need to provide authentication 3.12.19 OS : NT/ INtel Version : Win2003 DB Release : 9. Market place > connect to SAP > R/3 Support > Open connection . Maintain our systems in the Market Place 2.202/s/3299 Create New Connection RFC Connection Logon Security E1 001 SCO4013677 AISUSER tcode ------------------------------------- 13-Aug-09 SAP ROUTER Theory 1.2.124. SAP router side will restrict the user.113 SAPSR1 .6 -----------------------------------------19.0 Router String:> H/220.227.0.8.194. The password will be visible [ ].

.. Create message to SAP along with your SAP Router [Hostname].Central Instance . IP Address and Customer Number (SAP Router need not to be installed on Solution Manager /DEV/ QAS/ PRD. Create SAP Router directory and copy the executables from exe\uc\NTi386 or download from the market place. K -SNC (Secure network connection) 7. . Copy and Paste certificate from Begin to End the market place url /Saprouter-SNCADD . -------------RMMAIN tcode only in SOLMAN Implementation Road Map > Technical Infrastructure Planning > Order for Remote Connection to SAP Project Preparation Phase. Download the Cryptography files from Market place related to OS and bit version (Download *.. D .exe.exe and NIPPING. Cust Number : When we buy SAP we will be provided with the customer number.SAR only [Global Host] .SAP Archive ...service. Generate the certificate using distinguished "DN" name with executable SAPGENPSE.com/swdc) copy only SAPCAR. SAPROUTER. (www. executable used to generate the personal security environment. It can be installed on any desktop.CAR . SA38.Dialogue Instance Usr\sap 2.. It needs to be configure before implementation Part of SAP. SAPROUTETAB is a file (without any extension) used to have ACL (Access Control List) S .Secure.. P Permit. sapgenpse. SAP Router is an executable which is used to restrict the access to the customer systems over the network. SE38.SAR files) 5.. but it is advised to install on SOLMAN system to ensure that it is monitored periodically. 8.Deny..Compressed Archive Kernel comes with .114 Take out the access from SCC4. Uncar the files into SAPRouter directory 6.exe 4.SAR .. It works like a firewall/ proxy to permit and deny the access to the SAP systems. SAP responds with Distinguished name. ------------SAP Router 1. 3.DB .sap.

000 requests. Analysis: Identify the buffer areas whose swaps/ Database access are more. Used to monitor the buffer swaps on the Application Server/ Instance LRU .Specify no of days and hours.Connect to SAP Select the system . Similarly maintain all the other systems in the landscape.115 9.Least Recently used. Request a certificate from the market place copy into srcert. Mass transportation of objects 4. BUFFER HIT RATIO. It will update SAPOSS RFC Connection. SAPSNOTE are created on communicating with the Market Place. During the restart and when support packages are applied and when upgrade is performed.Open connection by selecting the service---. SAP-OSS.Report Error --. Import the certificate into router system using SAPGENPSE 11. The configured buffers are small 5. Buffer swaps occurs when there are no sufficient directories or space. . Analysis has to be carried out if there are atleast 10. 13.Start service connector -. Do no take any decisions based on the readings on a specific day. BUFFER SWAPS indicate the following 1. No Sufficient space or directories 2. When more swaps occur they are displayed on ST02 in swaps column.Download service connector -. Start the router using command saprouter -r -k "DN" 12. Goto SMP ---. On each backend system we need to maintain the RFC details in OSS1 Transaction. 10. The content is frequently modified 3. SAPOSS.Maintain System Data -. --------------------------------------------ST02 continuation.Maintain Router details ------. Inform SAP to connect to our systems.

Generic Buffering 3. no prog/ no data is available in the file system) There are four types of Buffering 1. and frequently modified are not eligible for buffering. rarely modified using a set of keys (Fields) Eg: USR02. T001 Company info 3. 4. Full Buffering: The tables which are frequently used and rarely modified are eligible for buffering. (Also which are small in size) Eg: T000 have all the clients and required to create a client copy.116 SAP recommends this value to be around 98% {For every 100 request '2' request goes to database and the remaining should be from the buffers} Key areas that effect the performance are program buffers.. (This is fully buffered) 2. frequently used and rarely modified are buffered using a primary key. Remaining parameters based on SAP recommendation from RZ11. No Buffering: The tables which are large frequently used. table buffers and Table and Field definitions. TABLE Buffering SAP stores the content in tables (Every data except start and stop logs is stored in DATABASE. In order to synchronize buffers set the parameter . EKKO (PURCHASE) BUFFER SYNCHRONIZATION When more than one application server is configured then buffers between different instances may not be synchronized. frequently used. Generic Buffering: Tables which are relatively large. VBAK (SALES). FULL Buffering 2. Single Record Buffering: The tables which are large in size. 1. No Buffering This is maintained for each table SE13 refer USR02 Table. Single Record Buffering 4. Change the program buffer using ABAP/ buffer_size to a maximum of 600 MB on 32 bit Machines.

(DDLOG is a buffer synchronization table).All the programs are stored in TADIR. If there is any change then it will fetch from DB and swap out the buffer. 500 @ 10:00:01 2. TSTC. User1 request to APP1 for update Sales order to Rs. IF there are no updates fetches the same from APP1 Buffer. DB02.Database hit ratio comes down below 94% then consider the following. Refer . SGEN . It is recommended that it should not be less than 94% i. exec auto. for every hundred reads only 6 should goes to the database. T001. . It is used to display the database buffer hit ratio. DDLOG is a synchronization between instances and maintain TIMESTAMP Note: DB13.Compiles the programs 14-Aug-09 ST04 DB PERFORMANCE MONITOR . DB buffer.550 @ 10:00:20 3. SE01 All the programs is in Uncompiled mode in TADIR table. EO70. User2 request to APP2 for update the same sales order to Rs.SQL server performance analysis. Mechanism 1. by that time it will be synchronized between APP1 and APP2. User3 request APP1 for display @ 10:00:40 WP will ask DDLOG table to check for recent update within 60 Sec.e. Rdisp/ buffertime = 60 Sec. . If the content is requested after 60 Seconds.117 Rdisp/ buffermode = Send on.

118 1. Ensure that physical memory free is available to handle the user requests. It is also used to start and stop SAPOSCOL (during Upgrades) Note: OSCOL brings the operating system information into ST06. The ABAP programs are expensive with multiple conditions and endless loops. . Probably the hardware is procured as per sizing but the number of users grown dynamically (300600). ST06 OSMONITOR It Fetches the data using service SAPOSCOL and it displays CPU Utilization. Frequent updates on the database 2. DB Buffer size is not sufficient to hold the content fetched from the database. The CPU is not sufficient to handle the load because the hardware is not procured as per sizing. Memory Utilization and disk response time. It also displays the memory installed on the machine. It is calculated by using formulae [ Logical reads .Physical Reads]/ Logical Reads * 100 Logical Reads is the sum of [Physical reads and Buffer Reads] (Buffer Gets/ Reads) FROM ST04 Physical Reads: The reads from the database. 1. If the programs are expensive then refer to development team. In this scenario we advice to deploy additional instances. Ensure that DB Buffers are configured as per the available memory. Memory available(Free) along with the SWAP space. If OSCOL is not started ST06 will be blank. 2. If not memory bottleneck. Some times complete memory will be dedicated to DB Buffers. 3. The CPU idle time should not be less than 30% [For Portal up to 80% to 85%] If it is below 30% we can consider the following. If the buffer hit ratio comes down it effects on the DB response time.

119 We can check TOP CPU utilization for the current in the last 24 Hrs. LAN CHECK BY PING is used to ping to all the systems in the Network/ Landscape. If a user complaints that he could not connect to the server (Ping to the desktop) .

. Say for Eg: from the below screen. Users are 9944 and the WP are 27 so each WP serves 5-10 Users so 27*10 = 270 Here users are including Active and Inactive Users.120 Click on Presentation Server ST07 Used to identify whether the system is optimally designed or not.

Kernel Trace Available in ST01 and ST05 Only in ST01 1. When more buffer swaps occurs in the table buffering ST02. RFC Trace 2. ST01 and ST05 Used to trace the following 1. Switch on Buffer Trace. When the RFC/ CPIC time are going beyond threshold value then switch on RFC Trace. It displays the log files related to work process. Based on the number of servers we can also define logon load balancing. It is also used to identify the memory utilized.121 Ask the customer to provide the list of Active users. . Enqueue Trace 4. Buffer Trace 3. Calculate the number of Process Vs Users to determine no of Users/ Process. 2. Authorization Trace 6. Each work process serves around 5-10 Users. AL11 : List the SAP Directories on Application Server. ST11: It is used to display the work directory. SQL Trace 5. This is also used to identify Response time and Buffers Utilization.

It records all the calls that are made to kernel when the trace is ON. When there are too many expensive SQL Statements which are increasing the database response time in ST04 then switch on SQL Trace. Switch Off the trace. RC=0 (Return Code) Note: Tuning is not testing we need enormous analysis and data to justify the conclusion. Enqueue Trace: When the enque or enque wait time is increasing by 5 M. 7. 11.Remote connection to SAP Landscape Configuration Transport Management Testing Strategy . Authorization Check: Whenever user encounters missing authorizations and could not be traced in SU53 can be traced out by switching the trace on User. 8. 6. (Identify those statements in ST04) Eg. ST04 > Detailed > Oracle Session > SQL Statements.Sec on Dialogue instance (Consider switching enqueue trace) 4.Sec on CI(Central Instance) 100 M. 4. As a practice switch on the trace and inform the user to run the transaction. 9. Select * from can be fine tuned by using select single * from with appropriate where conditions. 5. It will populate enormous log files and occupies the complete disk place and system stands still. 3. 17-Aug-09 IMPLEMENTATION OF SAP Pre-Requisites 1. Motivation of SAP for an ERP Software Landscape Deployment Plan Hardware Sizing Hardware and Software Order Installation of the Software Post Installation Steps User management Router -----. 2.122 3. Kernel Trace: Used to identify the consistency of Kernel. 10. 5. 6. Note: Do not switch on the traces when they are not required.

user friendly. Pager. They define the pain points of every business user owner and document them. The software is not user friendly to take the user inputs. fonts. The software is out of maintenance with no updates. . or with no company (Company Bankrupt/ Merger etc. PDA etc. Delloite. Too many legacy systems. Email.) 3.Available to Promise -----> Ware House.123 12.The software should support Mobile devices.Phase 1. Disaster Recovery. SMS. Offline.The software should be installed on all the operating systems and databases. Customer enquires in the market and calls for the Auditors to identify the software. languages. . RAID. Note: ATP Server . Fax. . 7. Issue --. Restore etc. monitoring are the various issues with the current software. manual inputs. Example: . Customer wanted to deploy an application that suites to his requirements by replacing the existing software due to the following reasons.The software/ Hardware should support mirroring. The customer could not be competitive in the market due to the legacy methods deployed B1 . password change.The software should be unicoded language to support all the languages. PWC (Price Water Coupons) are the auditors to identify the requirements in the company. fax. hardware and the Implementer. Bearing Point. 2.The software should support (Online. ergonomically designed. KPBG. 6. too little integration. The existing Hardware is old and the response times are high. NW 4. Go Live Strategy Parallel Run Go-Live Support . colors. BASIS. sms. table level backup) . partial. 1. The existing software is not capable to communicate with other systems 5.1. clustering. 13. 14. It cannot communicate with print. . incremental. MOTIVATION OF SAP FOR AN ERP 1.Description ---.Possible/ Not Possible/ Customizable/ If customizable Amount of effort. 15. .The GUI should be compatible. paging devices.C++ No ABAP.

com Auditor gather info from . MAHINDRA submits the proposal.Support partners like IBM. WIPRO. Seibel (CRM) implementing partners.bck files while reinstalling the SAP Refer: sapfans.GETSYSDEF . SAP is Strong in Manufacturing. They can also raise questions in the form of RFI (Request for Information) 18-Aug-09 -----------------C:\pf\sapinst_instdir\ERP\system\ORA\central\AS Ensure that there should not be any .Preparatory costs has to be borne by vendors TDMS . Note: Toughly Coupled/ Hardly . sapbasis. .Software Vendors.Test Data Migration Server QAS PRE PROD SAND DEV/ CUST/ GOLDEN UNIT TESTING INTEGRATION PAYROLL/ TDMS TRAINING PRE PROD PROD 8 . Weak in Retail } Tcode-SFW5(Switch Framework) SA38 .124 These requirements list will be floated as RFQ feasibility of software.Customer calls for quotation to implement SAP This is the first official document released to implement SAP.Business partner owners . sapconsultant.com. Peoplesoft. Hyperion.These list will be submitted to Oracle Apps. TCS.Customer decides software with the help of feasibility reports and assistance from auditors. .com. NAVISION. .

Business Scenarios. Risk and mitigation --------------- 1. WIPRO etc) . 9. Documentation (Upload. Assumptions Based on the above proposal customer and audit team shortlist the two or three software vendors (IBM. Average man power experience going to be deployed 7. Desktops.Implementation Partners and call them for Interview (technical discussions) to exhibit their capabilities. TCS. Sap Partnership) 10. Disaster. Implementation of solution manager (Provides Roadmap. Challenges in the project. Routing. SIX SIGMA. Past Projects and experience in that area 6. Access.Request for Quotation (Released by customers) RFI .Capability Maturity Model. VPN. risks and mitigations 11. Case studies and customer references 8. Technical questions related to Hardware. Backup. Company Strengths 4. Process 3. Module specific questions 2. Download) etc. Recovery etc. Financial Background and Share Value 5.125 RFQ . Based on 4th and 7th vendor will be finalized to implement SAP Note: External Security Routing Switching Proxy Firewall Internal Security . 3.Request for information -----------------It can contain as follows 1. Project Implementation Methodology 2. Certifications (CMMI .

000 (i. Fixed Bid 2. vacations.20%. 19-Aug-09 II. Cost of the Offshore Onsite Man hours/ Man Days/ Man Months 20-30$ 160-240$ 60-100$ 1000$ 20000$ 3. Resource Based 4. sick etc).20% Realization . Risks and mitigations has to be clearly stated in the SOW. Eg. SOW and Project Award (Customer and Vendor) 4..20%. SAP Project bidder is SAP for 28 Crores in Singareni Collories . RFP (Customer and Vendor) 3. Activity Based (Try to include Wait time) The scope of work needs to be defined properly before sign-on.e. RFQ and RFI (Customer and Vendor) 2.. accommodation. Project can be a fixed bid let us say 2. We need to provide manpower to SAP to implement @ customer site. Holidays. 4.30%..126 Authenticating Authorized users is Internal Security..Project Start 10%. Time and Material (T&M) 3.. Let us say the Project Manager is SAP. 5.. If SOW is not defined properly. Delay in Software. Go-Live . They out sourced to Seal Infotech for training and implementation. Blue print . it is vendor responsibility. Number of hours required/ No of Man days/ No of Man Months 2. staff. Payment will be released in Parts ---. Final Preparation . Replacement. Project Costing: 1.. Critical Tasks are based on Man days/ Man Hours Example : Disaster Recovery 1. Hardware requirements from customers are to be documented. LANDSCAPE DEPLOYMENT PLAN 1. (Basis Consultant) Landscape Deployment Plan: . Landscape Deployment.00... @ Million Dollars for completion all inclusive (Fares..

Note: Legacy database size (get the details from customer what amount of data they are planning to migrate into SAP. It is used to determine the CPU's. 1. Mirroring. Vendor. III. But exact number of systems will be known only after the Hardware sizing 1 CPU / 2 Parallel Process By default 3 Parallel Process. OS. Project Manager and Hardware vendors (IBM.com/sizing) Goto> Sizing tool > Click on Quick sizer It will be opened on new window Provide customer number.Logistics SD . Platform and communications 3. Provide Customer details to SAP (Name of the contact. It may serve the customer as an overview of the SAP systems. Provide Project name and create a Project for sizing. Supplier. SAP Provides quick sizing toll (http://service. Example Customer Database size is 400GB but they want to migrate 250GB into SAP (Customer. DB. HP. SUN. RAID. Load On the System: Users work on the system on various modules MM .127 It consists of the number of systems that are going to be deployed in the customer data center. Address. Email Id. HARDWARE SIZING It is an exercise carried out by Basis consultant with the help of the customer business process owners. FAX) 2. Material. FI Transactions) High Availability options (Time of Availability) These are the general details that are required for sizing. DELL).sap. CLUSTERING Standby server or do you need any suggestions.Sales . Storage (Hard disks) and Memory.

2.DB2 [AIX O/s . Modules used 1.(5 Disks---.Mirroring (1:1) on disk goes down other should take over. High Availability 1.ALL Sap tables will be stored 65.Microsoft P Series.JAVA -----------------------------21-Aug-09 Sizing is performed by quick sizer which is proprietary by quick sizer which is proprietary tool of SAP.Database schema owner SAPSR3DB .USR02. RAID5 . Note: ---------------------------IBM .DB2 Database].MAXDB Oracle SQL Server .DB2] SAP . 1. I Series V5R4 . IBM P Series generates 800 SAP's/ CPU.611 SQL>Select bname. RAID1 .128 FI .Financial 40% More to the sizing result. High Availability 2. Sizing is based on the following.Util -4. Type of Users 3. 1 Spare/ Parity) . SAP's . X Series (I Series V5R4) is the O/s Clustering (Mechanism : PING PONG) DD02L . SAPSR3 . mandt from SAPSR3.SAP Application Benchmark for Performance Standards) It is calculated in terms of Hardware vendors provide CPU in terms of the CPU's Eg.

If the existing server collapses -.UPS -.More than one cable CPU's -..Two Parallel systems (Used for failover or Load balancing) Eg. If the connectivity fails . IBM P-Series Unless unlocked by IBM we cannot make use of the additional Hard Disks Note: For Upgrade . If the complete system collapses due to hardware failure use clustering -..multicables -.129 3.Setup DR Server in a different geographical location 6.Sizing Module Selection: Select the modules that are going to be implemented like Logistics.SAN 5. If disaster occurs -----. SAN .Multiple CPUS Memory . Backup .Hosted on Multiple slots DISK . buy more leased lines from different vendors 7.Generator Network Cable --. If it before three years consider HR in sizing if not.due to power cable --.RAID and SAN 8. there is a plan to implement in future..Storage Area Network 4..etc -. Financials. . Product life cycle Management (Currently HR is not going to be implemented but.Sizing Capacity ..

User . The sizing is based on 1. 480 .10 Secs Eg. Default Host .4800 Dialogue Steps .SAP .40 Hrs .Public . SICF 3. Execute 4.TKT No: 008000000001 The Strategy is to migrate/ upgrade the hardware for every three years.SAP .40 Hrs . Component BC-MID-RFC Test Low Test -.Need to activate some services 2. 480 .30 Sec 3.bsp .htmlb RT Click > Activate Service Note: This should be done as Post Installation Steps SPRO > SAP Solution Manager > General Configuration Activating BC Sets (BC. 22-Aug-09 Service Desk > 1.40*60/480 = 5 Min = 300 Sec 2.Business Configuration) Tcode: scpr20 > From End user system If any one stuck @ point executing a command SM59 > Help > Create Mssg.130 1.200 * 10 Dialogue Steps = 2000.14400 .40 HRS * 60 Mins 1Dialogue Step .480 Dialogue Steps with the system . Purchase Order / Week . High Availability .

OS 2. Database 3.131 2. ORDERING SAP SOFTWARE . SAPS is ( SAP APPLICATION BENCHMARK FOR PERFORMANCE STANDARDS) SAPS are calculated based on Sales module. SAP assumes that a sales order/ Purchase order consumes around 8-12 Dialogue steps. The Hardware resources are required for the following which needs to be considered while sizing 1. IV. Modules and 3.Based on companies stability..Hardware vendors take 3 weeks to 4 weeks to deliver based on the availability of the hardware. Email. . XXL) Sizing output determines the memory. (The hardware vendor determines the CPU Size based on SAPS example an ISeries machine single CPU generates 800 SAPS. XL. Interfaces (Like Fax. M. case studies. No of users Along with legacy database and future growth of users User FI CO Low 50 50 Medium 250 250 High 250 250 The sizing is also called as T-Shirt sizing which determines your servers as (S.. Customer calls the RFQ from various vendors to supply hardware. past experience. L. Printers 5. price and support (warranty). HARDWARE ORDER 1. HP ships from Singapore.) 4. XS. For every 2000 sales documents that are generated per hour requires 100 SAPS. CPU cannot be arrived directly because the process speed depends upon the hardware vendor. reliability. consistency. Philippines and Malaysia IBM ships from US V. SMS. Third party communication (Batch processing etc) So we can consider adding 30-50% to the sizing results. storage and CPU in terms of Saps'. If the sizing output requires 3200 SAPS then we need 4 CPU's. Pager etc. .

MI etc.Part of the Physical Memory (RAM Memory) . i. Etc Entry.00. --------------------------Note: Heap Memory Physical Memory Virtual Memory . For 40. SRM.Peoplesoft MySAPCRM .Points to the target system BIN contains default. * There is no lock for licensed users in the system.000 we should have atleast 150-200 Users for 10+1 cost 18 Lakhs.000 depending upon number of users.. License is a single user based. PI.Sieble Each license cost 2000 USD Each Developer Cost 4000 USD After negotiation in Indian Market the Single user cost comes to 40.000 to 1..Part of the Memory from the Hard disk Buffer Bin . Any Kernel upgrade has been done (DEV_DISP.) SCM.e. License Cost varies based on Geographical Location MySAPFI . If we buy one license we can access .000 Users.pfl SAP_BC_ADMIn S_Transports CTS_Admin Disp+exe ( PING. EP.132 ISUSER (INDIAN SAP USER FORUM) ASUSER(AMERICAN SAP USER FORUM) Communicate with SAP vendor (Channel Partners) and purchase the license. * Every year we need to run USMM and send the report to SAP.RAM . We can buy 100 Users and used for 10.log) --------------------------27-Aug-09 . If we buy MYSAP business suite then all comes under one license. ERP. SRM CRM are charged Separately. BI. Solution Manager.Oracle Apps MySAPSCM .

. 4....6... SRM are SRM Versions XI .0 .0.3.0 2.133 BASIS .0 EP .1I it is based on three tier and web services are provided by using ITS.4....4. Real Estates..6D is the Kernel Version..4..SAP<SID> .0. Next Level of WAS is 640 ERP ..0..SAPSR3 from WEBAS 700 It is a Netweaver (640.7E On 620 .. Utilities.0 CRM .... Textile.BW version is 3.. . .. .1C Owner of the Database .. 4....0 onwards and upto 3. baking....6D) On 620 .... Oil. ERP Version is 4.0 is based on two tier which is built on Mainframes.It provides runtime environment for SAP Applications. 3.4. 3. Insurance. 700.3..710)...0.. B.) SAP determined to bring all the components on to a common platform and introduced SAP Web Application Server (WAS) The first version of WAS is 620 (A direct jump from 4. .SAPSR3... 3.0.6 A. Upto BASIS 4.5A.3. 3.0.1 are BW Versions 2. ..5B .0 BW .0...ECC 5..6C 4..2.. Chemical. from WEBAS 620 to 640 It provides built in ITS to make application server as WEB Application Server. APO are SCM Versions 2. C and D is kernel versions (Mining.5 SCM ... etc.

From Oracle Log for Administration .134 Next level of WAS is 700 ERP BW EP XI SRM CRM .BI7.EP7.PI7.0 . The database contains only 8 tablespaces in 700. BASIS only Non-Unicode From SAPWEBAS 640 unicode is introduced. OLD: The database table spaces are 27 which ends with D(Data) and I(Index).5. AMD64.6C SAPINST introduced in WEB Application Server 620-640.0 .0 .ECC6. SYSTEM . From 620 The database contains only 6 tablespaces(Physical Location) in 640 owner is SAP<SID> PSAP<SID> PSAP<SID>USR PSAP<SID>REL SYSTEM PSAPROLL(PSAPUNDO) PSAPTEMP SQL> Select tablespace_name from dba_tablespaces. JAVA add on.0 . Interactive SAPINST is to modify the inputs move front and back to review the inputs introduced in WAS700.Database Related PSAPUNDO .[SAPR3] owner. Owner is SAPSR3 for ABAP engine and SAPSR3DB is for JAVA Engine.5. Install Central System Installation (Select Usage type during Installation) R/3 Setup is used to install SAP upto Versions Basis 4.For Roll Back SYSAUX . Run directory is used to host executables of kernel upto 640 where as OS version (NTI386..0 Install ABAP(CI. IA64) with UC/ NUC is available in version 700. DBI).0 .

Database Users (DDIC and SAP* are SAP Users resides in USR02 Table) SQL> select count(*) from DBA_USERS where owner = 'SAPSR3'.USER RELATED Info PSAPSR3DB . .135 PSAPTEMP .JAVA Specific DB GUI Versions 46C 46D 620 640 700 710 Based on Windows and JAVA SQL> select username from DBA_USERS. owner from DBA_USERS group by owner.Temp Storage Memory PSAPSR3 .xxx Components: BASIS 65xxx BASIS+ERP 31-Aug-09 DATABASE It is a storage. 17476 SQL> select count(*) from SAPSR3. The difference is because of -19. 65611 SQL> select count(*) . It is used to store the data in the hard disk.Version Specific PSAPSR3USR . Eg.Component Specific PSAPSR3700 . [CDCLS] Cluster Table.DD02L.

These are the reasons for the evolution of DB. 5. The version management will be difficult and time consuming to get the required/ identify the file. test. 3..pps Disadvantage of the file system 1. .rtf. The data does not follow the LUW concept and so it is not consistent and reliable. mssql/lib. . . There are no indexes to search the data. The data is not in the organized format. 2... mssql/bin.LOGIC UNIT OF WORK.Duplication of data is avoided and uniqueness is obtained by using primary and secondary keys.pdf. LUW .. test. Oracle/bin.Data search is faster by using indexes (based on Keys) Eg: As in windows we can create as many folders and subfolders with the same name and the search criteria depends on the search string.txt.Database has its own structure to manage the data using the database specific binaries and libraries. Oracle/lib.doc.Data is stored in terms of tables (Tables contain rows and columns). test. . Database: Used to store the data in the organized format and it has to follow RDBMS rules (Relational Database Management System) .Database provides tools for backup management.ppt. restore and recovery .136 We can also store the data in terms of file system like test. test. reorganization. reliability and transaction LUW. 4.Databases follow RDBMS rules to achieve consistency. C:\shawn\shawn\shawn. test..xls. It consists of one or more transactions that are bundled together which can be committed as a group or rollback without any data loss.. db2/bin. test. Columns are headers and rows are the data. . The backup management and reorganization is not available. db2/lib.

R/3 Work process keeps a copy in the R/3 Buffer and response is sent to user. NORMALIZATION Process of splitting up the larger tables into smaller tables using primary keys and secondary keys. Invoice.Data is normalized and denormalised according to the requirements of the customer. GI (Goods Issued) AP (Account Payables). R/3 Work process handles the user request by interpreting the screen elements. SRM. DENORMALIZATION Process of grouping smaller tables into larger tables for having data comprehensively available for analysis and reporting BIW. Modify. the request is converted into Native SQL statements of the respective database. User submits the request. If the request is not accessed earlier. UPDATE. Databases are normalized. R/3 Work process communicates with database process to get the response. . 2. program logic (Insert. 5. DELETE] Scenario User requests for weekly status report. MODIFY. Keeps the request in Queue 4. AR (Account Receivables) . INSERT. if table exists then checks for the fields.FI Dept (Approval) . 11.. if the field and table exists. The response is fetched from buffers if they are accessed earlier 7. 8. 1. The data is fetched into Database buffers before the response is sent to R/3 work process. Update) 6. Sales Order. GR(Goods Receipt).Sales Order Purchase Req .Tenders (Contractors) (Eg: Purchase Order. ERP(ECC6). Database work process checks whether the table exists. Based on the available processes requests are served based on FIFO. Request is handled by dispatcher 3.Purchase Order . [SELECT.137 RFQ(Approved) . 9.. Delete. then asks for the optimized path to go to the database table and identify the relevant rows based on keys/ Indexes (Five 5 Seconday Indexes) 10.

Gets the record to database buffer for modification (No record is modified in the database directly) 11. 7. Oracle is provided by Oracle Corporation which owns (PeopleSoft. . 12.138 01-Sep-09 UPDATE COMMAND 1. User gets the response that the record is updated. Redo logs are duplexed (Mirror logs and Orig Logs) and ensure that the data is updated in the database. 9. and other small software's to compete with SAP. Dispatcher keeps the request in queue based on FIFO 4. The request is received by the dispatcher 3. 6. The locks are released and rollback gets invalidated. table definitions and execution (Cost based optimizer) path are valid. As the database buffers need to be accessed by user modifications are not performed in DB Buffers instead in log buffers. ORACLE Oracle is a database that is used by 2/3rd of SAP Customers. All the update requests goes to the database and lock the record in the database so that no user update it. As the log buffer is small the content is moved in to Redo logs periodically. User request for updating a purchase order/ quotation / Invoice 2. Database process handles the request and checks whether table. R/3 Work process handles the request and update the document into temporary tables (cannot update the permanent tables because all the LUW's in the transaction has to be completed) 5. The committed data is updated into database 13.Cigarette Paper . The update request goes to the database. 10. In the process of updating it will communicate with enqueue and obtain the lock on the document so that no other user updates it. Eg. Note: Committed data can be updated or Redo.Accounts book Log buffers are a small area around 1Mb . JDEdwards. Seibel. Consider a pan shop Customer . In order to support SAP Customers it is mandatory to know the database management.4 Mb. 8. 14. Database process keeps a copy of the record in roll back segment PSAPROLL/ PSAPUNDO table space to roll back in case of CRASH/ System Failure.

2. 10.7 and ECC5.4 Linux .2.7 9.SAPDB (MAXDB) is the cheapest combination.6C 4.2. 9.2.139 Oracle is a proven.0 4. robust database to handle any amount of data in Terra bytes. reliable.2.0.0.0. strong.2.0.4.0. SAP R/3 R/3 ECC6. well spoken among customers.0.2. .1. 9.2. Versions Oracle has versions of database SAP License is costlier on Oracle than any other combinations. 9.2.6. DB2 from IBM and SAPDB(MAXDB) from SAP shares the remaining 1/3rd of SAP Customers. Microsoft SQL Server from Microsoft.7 10.0 8. consistent.0.

old) 1. DB_Connect to connect to database using client version 3. Users OPS$ User to connect to database and get the password of the SAPSR3 User. 2.140 DATABASE ARCHITECHTURE Connection Mechanism (refer dev_<SID>. R/3 Work process loads all the DB Libraries. .

USER Request Flow/ Display 1. 3. As the processes are able to access the complete database related to schema owner. 13. DB Shadow checks if the requested content exist in DB Buffer if not fetch the content from database and updates DB Buffer. 2. SAPSR3 is the Schema/ DB Owner for SAP Database. DB Shadow process checks the task contains valid table and field definitions. 12. DB Shadow checks if any SQL Execution plan exists. If not it builds the plan based on cost based optimizer and update SQL Cache. User uses SAP GUI to perform a transaction. IF the table/ Field definition does not exists gets a copy from the database and update the DB Cache/ LIB Cache. User request is handled by the dispatcher. 11. 5. SQL> Select table_name from dba_tables where owner = 'OPS$WILLSYS99\NWDADM'. 6. SAP restricts the access by using internal security. Dispatcher keeps the request in Queue 4. Check the content is available in R/3 buffers.141 OPS$ Mechanism It is a mechanism which is used by operating system users to connect to the database without any password. R/3 Work process checks if it is eligible for buffering then keeps a copy in R/3 buffers. R/3 Work process handovers the task to database shadow process (1:1 Ratio between R3WP: DBWP) 9. 7. Communicate with Oracle Client to communicate with DB in native language. The response is handover to R/3 Work Process. 10. . 8. All the work processes uses OPS$<SID>ADM to connect to the database without any password. Based on available resources a process is allocated to user requests based on FIFO. WP ------> SAPUSER (Table) USERID | PWD OPS$-User | XXX Relogin with the above user and password Disconnect from the DB and reconnect using SAPSR3 userid and password to get complete access. WP task handler interpret the user request. OPS$<SID>ADM is the user who owns the table SAPUSER and contains the SCHEMA OWNER SAPSR3 user and password.

Its quality is measured by database buffer hit ratio. From ST04 . In general for an optimized database the ratio should be not less than 94%. It is defined by the parameter log_buffer generally its size varies between 1MB to 4MB. bytes/1024/1034 "MB" from V$sgastat where pool. Its size is defined by multiplying by 8kb because each block size is 8 kb. It is defined by a parameter db_block_buffers. Shadow Process . It should not be too big or too small.. Every request that needs modification/ update / delete has to be performed only in this area. It is used to reduce the hits on the database there by reducing the load on the database. DB buffers and log buffers SHARED POOL It is defined by shared_pool_size which is a part of SGA (System Global Area) It contains DBCACHE and LIBCACHE and they are nothing but parsed SQL Statements. Response is sent to the user. It takes time to build SGA when system is started that is why the system is slow after a restart..ora file SYSTEM GLOBAL AREA is the sum of Shared pool.142 14.e.[Logical Reads . DB Buffer is used to store the data until its size is full (or) the content gets invalidated by a change or least recently used. Authorizations.. SYSTEM/ SHARED GLOBAL AREA: It is a memory area which resides purely on memory and it is lost when the system is stopped. SQL> select name.. Table and Field definitions and packages. Each query/ request should pass through this area. SGA is lost the complete cache information is lost. Out of 100 request 6 requests goes to the database.Physical Reads/ Logical Reads] * 100 i. SQL> show SGA LOG BUFFER: It is used to perform the data manipulations by database work process.. Refer init<SID>. ORACLE PROCESSES 1. DB BUFFER : Used to store the content that is accessed from the database.

This is the first place where a record is written to the disk to ensure that committed changes are not lost. These are initiated by system based on requirement. LOG SWITCH It is a process of switching between RedologA to RedologB and Mirror Logs A to B i. .e. These are also called as User processes (In Oracle Terms) The process are established at the rate of 1:1 during the startup of SAP system. Background Process/ Server Process SHADOW PROCESS These are used to handle the user requests. d) The record is fetched into DB Buffer for allowing selection. LOGWRITE (LGWR) is used to write the committed data into Redo log files (Origlog A. Origlog B. when RedologA is full it is closed for writing and RedologB is opened for writing. To ensure the disk consistency log writer writes into Origredolog and Mirrorredolog files (Both resides on two different physical disks). Log writer writes the commit into Redo log files but when the size of Redo log file is full size 50MB. LOG WRITER Mechanism a) R/3 work process submits the request for an update. B) from log buffer. BACKGROUND/ SERVER PROCESS These are non-interactive to R/3 Processes. When the data is committed System Change Number is generated to ensure the faster commit mechanism. It will perform Log Switch. They perform the task assigned by an R/3 WP. e) A copy of the record is taken to log buffer for modification f) the data/ record is modified in log buffer.143 2. b) Shadow process handles the update by locking in the database c) It takes a backup of PSAPROLL/ PSAPUNDO to roll back to the original state if the update is cancelled or abrupt. They called as shadow processes because they perform the task non-interactively. This cannot be kept for long in the log buffer as the log buffer size is small. Mirrorlog A.

These are initiated by system based on the requirement. They are called as Shadow Processes because they perform the task non-interactively. It takes time to build SGA when system is started that is why the system is slow after a restart. When the redo log buffer is 1/3rd full or 1MB of committed. When a transaction is committed 2. Shadow Processes 2. SGA is lost the complete cache information is lost. Background/ Server Process Shadow Processes These are used to handle the user requests. These are called as User Processes (In Oracle Terms). i. LOG WRITER . They perform the task assigned by an R/3 WP. 4. Every 3 Seconds 3. The log writer must always be running for an instance. Background or Server Processes These are non-interactive to R/3 Processes. When DBWR signals the writing of redo records to disk.144 There will be only one process. The log writer process writes data from the redo log buffers to the redo log files on the disk. The DB WP waits till the buffer total memory gets utilized and then updates the DB) SYSTEM/ SHARED GLOBAL AREA It is a memory area which resides purely on memory and it is lost when the system is stopped. ORACLE PROCESSESS 1.e. 02-Sep-09 (Note: If the buffer size is more no updates will happen. The writer is activated under the following conditions 1. 1.

When the data is committed SYS Change number is generated to ensure the faster commit mechanism log writer (LGWR) writes the commits in to Redolog files but when the Redolog file is full) size 50MB. This is the first place where a record is written to the disk to ensure that committed changes are not lost. When the redolog buffer is 1/3 full or 1MB of committed.145 Mechanism 1. The record is fetched into DB Buffer for allowing selection. It takes a backup of PSAPROLL/ PSAPUNDO to roll back to the original if the update is cancelled or abrupt. The Log writer process writes data from the redolog buffers to the redolog files on the disk. It will perform log switch. 5. To ensure the disk consistency log writer writes into Origredolog and Mirrorredolog files (Both resides on two different physical disks). MirrorlogA. R/3 Work process submits request for an update. 03-Sep-09 .e. 4. A copy of the record is taken to log buffer for modification 6. When a transaction is committed 2. The data/ record is modified in Log Buffer This cannot be kept for long in the log buffer as the log buffer size is small. When Redolog A is full it is closed for writing and Redolog B is opened for writing. 2. LOG SWITCH It is a process of switching between Redolog A to Redolog B and Mirror Logs A and B i. OriglogB. When DBWR signals the writing of redo records to disk The log writer must always be running for an instance. Every 3 Seconds 3. * Log Writer is used to write the committed data into Redolog files (OriglogA. B) from log buffer. Shadow process handles the update by locking in the database 3. There will be only one process. 4. The Writer is activated under the following conditions 1.

When log buffer cannot write the content then log buffer gets filled and subsequently the update mechanism gets halted. MirrorlogA. All the updates will be done from Logbuffers. Once the content is updated in Log Buffer it marks the content in Database Buffer as Dirty buffers and not eligible for selection. When Redologs are full ARCH Process During the log switch OriglogA gets filled for writing and OriglogB is opened for writing. OriglogB. SQL> select sequence # from V$ARCHIVED_LOG. the redo log files needs to write to an alternative location immediately once they get filled. A copy is made to LOG Buffer for updation.. 1. Redolog files gets filled and does not have space to write the content from log buffer.. so. When ever a check point occurs (It writes based on system change number SCN) Note: Every select statement hits the database and brings the data to DB Buffers. When the request comes to access the dirty buffer content. If it is not moved.Check Point . CKPT . MirrorlogB .146 The Content of OriglogA. 2. The contents are written by ARCH from RedologA to ORAARCH and RedologA is ready to be written by LOGWR. The contents of OriglogA will be written to ORAARCH directory (Provided archieve_log_mode is set to true). DBWR (Database Writer) The content that needs to be updated is fetched into DB Buffer for selection. Similarly RedologB. (Redolog files) gets filled and need to move to other location. DBWR is triggered in the following circumstances [ORACLE RAM] = SGA 1.

The system monitor process (SMON) performs recovery. Initialization Files: init<sid>. PMON is responsible for cleaning up the database buffer cache and freeing resources that the user process is using and release the locks. PHYSICAL FILE SYSTEM 1.Release locks .Used to start the processes if they are stopped . Do not modify the control file manually.htm#21919 It updates the headers of all datafiles to record the details of the checkpoint. It triggers DBWR/ LGWR SMON SYSTEM MONITOR Used to ensure the Oracle database is consistent and reliable.com/docs/cd/310501_01/server. PMON PROCESS MONITOR Used to monitor the process recovery when a user process (Shadow process) fails.147 It is used to ensure that system is consistent. download. if necessary at instance startup. .ora is used to provide the startup parameters for Oracle. Control Files: These are used to display the structure of the database into Six different locations. 2. the system modifies by itself when ever there are any changes. Datafiles : These files are with extension (. PMON periodically checks the status of dispatcher and server processes and restarts any that have stopped.oracle.Freeing the resources that were used by user processes.dbf).DBF) The location is specified by a parameter control_file. It triggers during the system startup and ensure that system is started.Used to monitor the process (PMON) . In case of system crash/ abnormal termination SMON reads the online redologs and redo the changes to database and also reads the PSAPUNDO to roll back the changes. . It is the most important file (Cntrl<SID>.920/a96524/C09procs. These are used to store the data in the Oracle specific RDBMS format. 3.

ora . Startup Mount: We can start a DB and mount a database without opening it. Startup Restrict: . 4. allowing us to perform specific maintenance operation.dba is used to provide authorization to SAPDBA/ BRTOOLS. Oracle contains 3 Modes (4 Including Restrict) 1.. Network/ Admin Listener. We need to explicitly create SP file this SP File cannot be edited manually E:\ORACLE\QAS\I02\ADMIN Oracle Startup When Oracle is started the database available for users. Commands Startup open Startup mount Startup no mount.. In order to change certain parameters SPFILE is maintained.ora Provide Port and the Host Name. brarchive. Init<sid>. These are located in Oracle_home/ database(windows) DBS on UNIX. Startup Nomount : This phase is used to create control files and database. 04-Sep-09 Special Parameterization files (SPFILE) All the changes that are made requires a reboot of Oracle database.. No datafiles are mounted.sap us used to provide the database backup/ restore (brbackup. 2.148 init<sid>. brrestore) control parameters. brconnect.. a) Change the archive log mode status 3. Tnsnames.ora Provide port and the host name Sqlnet.

(Which is committed) Not Consistent. 1) SPFILE<SID>. b) Perform a data load (With SQL * Loader) c) Temporarily prevent typical users from using data d) During certain migration and upgrade operations e) Used during patch applications the database is opened but not allowed i. restricted to the above operations. all the committed data is updated . End uses cannot perform any tasks. 2. Shutdown Abort The database is forcibly shuts down and may not be consistent and requires recovery during startup. Consistent. Shutdown Transactional. 3. It reads the init parameters in the following sequence.e. 4. Shutdown Immediate 05-Sep-09 Shutdown Modes 1. The database does not allow any new connections.ORA Oracle Shutdown 1.ORA 2) SPFILE. SMON ensures that the database is consistent (REDO/ UNDO) All the users who are working on the system gets terminated abruptly and the intermediate data is lost.149 a) Perform an export or import of database data. Startup Open: When DB is started using startup cmd.ORA 4) INIT. No new connections are allowed.ORA 3) INIT<SID>. Shutdown Immediate The database is shutdown immediately but all the committed transaction are updated in the database and opened transactions are rolled back.

ora) The two parameters DB_NAME and DB_BLOCK_SIZE should never be modified. Eg: Req: 150 Given 200 Next 50 Max 500 These table/ Indexes are grouped logically into a tablespace/ Container . .. Data files are physical files on the file system where data is stored in Datablocks... No new connections are allowed but time consuming to stop the database. STORAGE The database uses file system but organized in the RDBMS concept. Shutdown Normal It allows the users to complete all the transactions and shut down the database. Initial Extents 2. Next Extents 4.... Each block size is 8KB(8192 Bytes) Block size is determined by parameter DB_BLOCK_SIZE (refer inti<sid>. Max Extents Segment means (table or Index) Group the blocks to Extent Reorganizing ..Utilizing the fragmented space. EXTENTS These are used to allocate space to a table/ segment to control the growth 1..150 In the database and opened transactions are only allowed to complete. Consistent 4... Minimum Extents 3. The data is stored in terms of Database block size in terms of Datablocks.. no new transactions are allowed.

Eg: Users are creating purchase orders extensively into the tables EKPO.151 Tablespace is a logical entity which contains related tables/indexes. SYSAUX PSAPDEV PSAPDEV640/ 700 PSAPDEVUSR Temporary Table Space UNDO Table Space SYSAUX is a new tablespace available from version 10g. Note: Each datafile is assigned to only one tablespace. PSAPROLL/ PSAPUNDO 6. PSAPTEMP 5. This tablespace is pointing to two datafiles of size 4GB each. EKKO and other child tables. Resolution . Oracle provides default tablespace "SYSTEM to manage the database". Tablespace is pointed to physical datafiles. PSAP<SID>USR 4. SAP provides the other tablespaces that starts with naming convention PSAP 1. User encountered an error ORA-1653/ ORA-1654 tablespace over flown and the user could not update/ create any more PO's The user could not update the data because the datafiles are filled (or) there is no enough space to allocate for extents. Each Tablespace can have one or more datafiles to store the table data/ Index data. PSAP<SCHEMAID> 2. PSAP<SID>RELEASE 3. These tables are assigned to a tablespace PSAP<SID>.

It reduces the fragmentation there by reorganization is not required. Select * from dba_users. SAP Tables are stored in DD02L Users are used to login to the database with various privileges. Users encounters an error ORA-1631 and ORA-1632 Max Extents Reached. . but there is a tablespace. SAP recommends to migrate all the dictionary managed tablespaces to locally managed before 10g upgrade (Oracle). The free space in the existing extents is not used there by Fragmentation. 06-Sep-09 SQL> select * from dba_tablespace.e.Dictionary Managed Tablespaces When ever a table is growing it increase it extents i. Select * from dba_tables where table_name like dba%. it uses next extents. (Alternatively we can add using SQL Command) SQL> Alter tablespace (Tablespace Name/ PSAP<SID>) add datafile location and size. Next. Locally Managed Table Spaces Default table spaces from 10g which manage the extents locally instead of dictionary management. EXTENT MANAGEMENT When a table or Index is created they are assigned with Min Extent.. Init. Use BRTOOLS or SE14 to increase the Extents. CAP is Max.152 Use BRTOOLS (Backup Recovery Tool) to resize the datafile (or) add a datafile. It collase the space that is left in all the extents before allocating an extent. Similarly PSAPROLL should be migrated to PSAPUNDO before upgrade. Select username from dba_users. It requires database Reorganization. Select * from dba_users. Max along with the Percentage of Increase. DMTS .

If we consider 2 Months duration the graph will be like this . Inform the inventory department to order more disks if there is really a DB growth. It is the only log which can gives us the complete history of database activities.log which resides in SAPTRACE directory. Monitor the size of the database to have a detailed capacity planning. restore etc.153 ops$willsys99\saservicesr3 ops$willsys99\saservice<SID> ops$willsys99\<sid>adm sys .The complete or absolute owner of oracle database server to perform the activities. Have a storage of 1 TB = 1024 GB At the current growth rate of the database can use the storage up to 30 days approximately. Size in GB 1 200 2 210 3 220 4 230 5 230 6 230 7 250 8 280 9 300 10 350 Conclusion The database is growing at an average of 15GB per/ day. recovery. 1. Login to SAP system and log the database growth on daily basis. System SAPSR3 SAPSR3DB Administrative user but cannot be used to create modify the DB Perform backup. For Eg. We need to check the abnormal growth of the database. Note: Oracle writes all startup logs into alrt<SID>. DATABASE MONITORING As a part of the routine SAP basis checks the following database tasks can also included.

Tables and Indexes Monitor SQL> Select tablespace_name. . Segment is nothing but a table or index.Overview for a Database Identify the tablespaces which are grown more than 90% and add datafiles.command BRTOOLS Type option 2 for Space management.Login as SIDADM on windows or ORASID on UNIX .Tablespace Particular (DBA Planning Calendar) DB12 . Option 7 for additional space function. critical objects based on Table spaces. System 8192 ----SQL> select tablespace_name. BRTOOLS BACKUP RESTORE RECOVERY TOOL These tools are provided by SAP for Oracle Database.Press Enter E:\oracle\SID\sapdata3\sr3700_16 . segment_space_management from dba_tablespace. Enter choice .154 DB02 is used to monitor the disk space. DB13 . Option 1 show tablespaces Continue 3 times to display the list of table spaces and their growth.1 (For which tablespace we need to increase the size of datafile) PSAPSR3700 . block_size from dba_tablespace.

select them and create in the database. transaction ST04 . .The buffer hit ratio should not be less than 94% .Objects which are missing are displayed in Red.For each table we can create 1 Primary Index and 4 Secondary Indexes these are predefined because of the huge table growth indexes are missed.SAP Provides all the indexes (Predefined one(Primary Index) + Four (Secondary Index). Hit Ratio = ((Logical Reads . .Physical Reads)/ Logical Reads) * 100 . Physical Reads: The number of reads that are made to Physical Database. we need to check if there are any missing indexes and recreate them if required in DB02/SE .155 In this path 16 datafiles are there if we increase the tablespace size one more data file is created called sr3700_17 SQL> select tablespace_name.It is calculated based on reads Logical Reads : The number of reads that are made to Database buffer.Add the datafile or resize datafile before its gets an error message "Tablespace overflow" MISSING INDEXES Identify the missing indexes in DB02 (which will reduce the performance without proper indexes) Goto DB02 > Diagnostics > Missing Tables and Index Check the objects that are missing . 2. Select the database buffer hit ratio. blocksize from dba_tablespaces.Recreate them .

f check . If the ratio is reduced we can conclude that DB_BLOCK_BUFFERS size is not sufficient or there are frequent updates on the system.. BRCONNECT It is used to connect to the database and performs various administrative tasks. Offline to Oraarch are scheduled periodically and running fine. DB13 We need to check 1. BRCONNECT . clear old log files. Archive directory is having space 4.sap ---------.Open it Change the parameter values Backup_type = disk 07-Sep-09 BRTOOLS These tools are used to manage or monitor the oracle database which are specifically provided by SAP. it is used to check the database and writes the logs into sapcheck directory. SCHEDULE DB BACKUP Init<SID>.. DB Housekeeping Jobs are running successfully or not (DB Check. Check conditions are described in transaction DB17 which in turn stores the details in DBMSGORA Open Command Prompt > brconnect -f check .156 Physical reads are increasing conclude that the database hits are more. DB backup is performed successfully or not 2. BRTOOLS reads the parameters from init<SID>. BRTOOLS contains the following Options 1. adapt extents) 3. Update stats.sap It resides in Oracle_Home\database (Windows) In UNIX DBS directory It controls the runtime behavior of BRTOOLS.

157 > brconnect -u system -p <pwd> -f check brconnect -f stats Used to run the database statistics. It identifies the tables whose statistics are outdated and updates them. It is updated periodically (Weekly). So that all the tables and Indexes where there are stored will be known to DB Optimizer. Offline Backup (Cold Backup) The database is down during backup and no transaction is allowed as it is down. Whole Offline Backup: The backup taken fully and a catalog is opened to start the incremental backup. Online Backup 3. When ever a backup is triggered BR Backup is initialized. There are various types of backups 1. Next extents can be increased automatically) These jobs can be scheduled using DBCALENDER (DB13). Incremental Backup 4. (Eg. BR-BACKUP BR Backup is used to take backup of the database (Datafiles). How ever when these jobs are scheduled BRCONNECT runs in the background. Partial Backup 1. It is consistent and reliable. Friend comes to India from America after 5 years) Cleaning up OLD log files brconnect -f cleanup It is used to clean the old log files from saptrace and sapcheck directory brconnect -f next It is used to adopt the next extents (i.e. Offline Backup 2. We need to run the DB optimizer once a week. . Optimizer is used to collect the statistics for the tables whose statistics are outdated. Running update statistics improves the performance of the system.

Catalog (SUNDAY . 3. Full Offline Backup: It is a complete database backup without any Catalog. Partial Backup It is taken for a specific table during a patch (Especially HR Patches) Backup type is defined by a parameter Backup_mode = all Backup_type = offline Backup_dev_type = Tape or Disk Backup_root_dir = H:\oracle\SID\sapbackup All the above backups are performed by using brbackup. Incremental Backup It is initiated from level0 backup and used when the database size is too big. 4. It can be online or offline. It is consistent and reliable with redo logs that are generating during backup. Full Online Backup: It is complete database backup with out any catalogs. Whole Online Backup: The backup is taken fully and a catalog is opened to start the online incremental backup. Online Backup The DB is up and running with out effecting the user transactions.sap) . BR ARCHIVE (initSID.The rest will be taken) 2. Online Backup: It is consistent always with redo logs.158 Eg: A database is of 2000 GB Which is not possible to take a daily full offline backup with a backup speed of 150GB/ Hour.

Reads content from Log Buffer. . .If Oraarch is full the archive gets stuck and the complete update mechanism stuck and users encounter congestion. Log writer writes to OrigLogA and OrigLog B. from ORAARCH directory to tape or disk.. NWDA30. .Log writer logs into OriglogA.. OriglogB. . . bi-hourly for every 4 hours or daily depending upon the frequency of updates.e.e (Offline redologs) the content of oraarch is referred as offline redo logs..159 It is used to backup the offline redolog file to tape or disk i.. When OrigLog A is full it is moved to OrigLog B When OraArch is full it is backed up to a tape or disk.. MirrorLogB -When online redo logs are full then Arch writes contents to Oraarch i.. Mirror Log B. Mirror Log A. Archive_function = SAVE/ COPY/ DELETE Archive_copy_dir = H:\Oracle\NWD Tape_size= 100G Volume_archive=NWDA01.While copying Oracle provides various means of log save because we don't want the corruption of logs.Archive function means the saving mechanism of log files.So the Oraarch content needs to be moved to alternative location on hourly. . MirrorLogA..

. Indexes Export and Import tables) . We can do the following with BRTools..Display profiles. Max datafiles are 250 in SAP. . Each datafile size is 1% of the Whole database (100-200) 2 GB 200-400 4GB.Database standard house keeping jobs (DBStatistics.Database backup . 08-Sep-09 BRTOOLS It uses BRConnect. cleanup logs.Reorganisation (Create. change schema password etc. dbcheck.Extend the tablespace by adding datafile or resizing datafile. adapt next extents) . DB REFRESH 1. BRRestore.Start and stop the database .Redolog Backup .Tablespace management (Create drop alter. BRRecover with various options. mostly create and drop are not used) . Rebuild..Recover Database from Redolog Backup .160 The data transfer from Oraarch to disk is done by BRArchive. SYSTEM COPY/ HOMOGENEOUS COPY/ HETEROGENEOUS COPY. System Copy/ Homogeneous Copy .Restore Database .from database backup . BRBackup.

Source System . DB Refresh It is the process of refreshing the data of one system (OS. DATABASE REFRESH by another system data. While applying patches.select database instance export . To move out from one OS to another or One DB to another DB which is called as OS/ DB Migration which needs to be carried under the guidance of Certified consultant. THE REASONS FOR SYSTEM COPY Unicode Migration or Code Page Conversion 1. 3. i. Heterogeneous Copy When ever there is a change in OS or DB then it is said to be heterogeneous. DB. 5. To setup a new system in the landscape (Only DEV and PRD exists.Specify the export location for Import. now we need to deploy QAS as a copy of PRD) 2. System Copy is performed using export and import of the database. To change the hardware. Kernel Upgrade to test the objects with Production data.specify Profile directory e:\usr\sap\sid\sys\profile . Source System 2. the system is completely build from OS.e.161 It is used to setup a system similar to a PRD. Use Installation Master DVD .System Copy . 3. 4.specify typical .Use Additional Tasks . Database and R3 without changing OS or DB. STEPS for SYSTEM COPY 1. 2. R3) remains the same but only database is refreshed. QAS etc. . Review the inputs and continue the import.specify the password if <sid>adm .

2.e. Users. We don't want any issues that crops up on the production system. Generate the control file from source system. So we need to copy the PRD (DATA files) system to QAS system from time to time to get proper quality done. Process 1. It is required to keep the dependencies of the target system to restore them later i. Create the transport of copies by using SE01 and specify the following objects/ tables USR01. Roles etc. POST STEPS Pre steps Pre Steps on the Target system. screen shots etc. License. so that no background job is triggered 6. . QAS and PRD existing in the landscape. Eg. Printers. Batch Jobs. Restore the database from Tape or Disk. Make the BTC Processes to 0.Copy the cofiles & datafiles in usr\sap\sid\trans .162 Let us say there are three systems DEV. The objects which are developed in DEV needs to be transported to QAS and PRD the objects behave differently in DEV. Create Control file with new database structure of QAS 5. After Refresh the target system QAS behaves like production System. DB REFRESH 3. 1. Delete the entire SAPDATA files. 4. Se we need to delete the source dependencies and restore the target dependencies. Kernel . QAS and PRD. Start the system and restore the target dependencies Pre-Steps for DB Refresh 1. PRD DB Size 1TB 2TB. Eg. So we will take a copy in QAS and apply before PRD. PRE STEPS 2. RFC Connections. A Small report which fetches monthly sales executes 1 Sec in DEV and in QAS where as in PRD it is consuming 30Min. Similarly we need to apply patches. USR02. RFCDES and TBDLS And then we need to release the Transport of Copies. add-ons in the landscape. Take a copy of them using transport requests. 3. The report is good in DEV and QAS but bad in PRD that means quality checks are failed. after refresh.

163 - Take the screen shots of SM59, BD54, DB13, SM37, AL11(All the SAP Directories), WE20 (IDOCS), SMLG, RZ12 (RFC SERVER GROUPS), RZ70 (Inorder to populate the backend system details to SLD), RZ04 (Operation Modes) SCC4, SPAM. 4. And then We need to delete all the datafiles related to QAS system. data1, data2 etc. First we need to stop the oracle services the structure should remain same. Directories like sapdata1.... sapdata..n, MirrorlogA, B, OriglogA, B 5. First Activity After taking the backup of PRD server we need to generate control file. > Alter database backup controlfile to Trace. It will generate the Cntrl File under usertrace directory. Copy the cntrl file to quality system and rename it as with .sql extension. If it is offline backup the foldernames offline b.afd online b.afd

08-Sep-09 BRTOOLS ERRORS 1. Tablespace over flow (ORA-1653, 1654) 2. Max Extents reached (ORA-1631, 1632) 3. Archive Stuck (ORA-255, ORA-272) 4. Datablock corruption (ORA-1578)... restore from old backup 5. Missing end backup while performing a backup 6. stats out dated - run brconnect -f stats 7. Oracle listener, Tnsnames port issues 8. Oracle DLL Compatibility issues (Patch Oracle) 9. International hardware errors ORA-600 (Refer to SAP and Oracle) 10. OPS$ issues related to authentication while logging 11. Connection issues between R/3 WP: Oracle Shadow with error ORA-12560 12. Oracle is corrupted or Disk corrupted, External disk not available, datafile missing, Space issues. 13. Missing Indexes in DB02 14. Database backup not successful due to space issues, tape issues 15. Control file missing - Recreate control file Note: All Oracle errors refer to Oracle/ SAP (ORA-XXXX) 16. Oracle shared memory not available issue with SGA 17. If buffer hit ration below 94% (Increase block buffer size)

164 09-Sep-09 IMPLEMENTATION Installation of SAP System 1. Download the Installation Guide from the Market Place. www.service.sap.com/instguide 2. No of users/ Load on the system 3. Perform Sizing www.service.sap.com/sizing

4. Download the software www.service.sap.com/swdc 32 Bit means I386 cmd> memsize/ memlimit 5. Entry in etc\services PORTS Dispatcher Port Message server Port Gateway Port Secured Dispatcher Port Secured Gateway : : : : : 3200 3600 3300 4700 4800 to to to to to 3299 3699 3399 4799 4899

6. Make sure that Installation Ports 21212, 21213 are not used 7. Kernel depends on O/S 32-64, Database, UC/ NUC Exports are OS/ DB Dependent 8. All the entries are stored in control.xml and installation progress is stored in keydb.xml If the installation is aborted/ cancelled then the above two files will help us to start from the point where it stopped earlier. 9. An installation directory sapinst_dir is created which host the log files of the installation Note: SMSY > System Landscape > Other object > create sap* : 06071992 ddic : 19920706

165

10-Sep-09 TADIR - Stores all the repository objects

Repository consists of your ABAP objects like programs, function modules. ABAP data dictionary consists of tables, domains etc. Data dictionary is like a part of repository only. From SE11 these are database objects Database tables views datatype Lock objects Searchhelp. Type group Domain. Note: Instance No 00: Port No: 3200 Database O/S R/3 sap* : 06071992 ddic : 19920706

Users

DIFFERENCES BETWEEN EARLIER VERSIONS OF SAP AND CURRENT NETWEAVER INSTALLATION

166 1. No Solman Key 2. Pre requisite checker 3. Passwords are default and OS/SB passwords need to be provided in the input screen 4. Central instance and database are installed separately (Central system is introduced with combination of CI and DBI) --------------------------------------NTI386 - Intel Pentium IA64 - Intel Itanium X64 - AMD64 AIX_64- IBM --------------------------------------5. Kernel used to reside in RUN directory and in current versions in sys\exe\UC\NT\I386 6. No screen to review the inputs and change them if required. 7. No interactive / colorful screens 8. Up to 4.6C r3setup is used to install SAP. sapinst is introduced from 4.7 version. 9. Tablespaces are 27 up to 4.6c from 4.7e onwards they are reduced to 6 Tablespaces. 10. SAPDBA is replaced by BRTOOLS in newer versions 11. MMC passwords are required to start SAP in newer versions cmd> startsap name=DEV nr=00 SAPDIAHOST=HOME ---------------------------------------------------------OS = SIDADM SAPSERVICE<SID> ST06 - gets for SAPOSCOLL service Trans - EPS (Electronic Parcel Service) - All the developments are hosted. ---------------------------------------------------------PROFILE MANAGEMENT Usr\sap\SID\sys\profile There are three 3 profiles which are available by default 1. Default 2. start_DVEBMGS00_<HOSTNAME>.pfl 3. <SID>_DVEBMGS00_<HOSTNAME>.pfl Installation Questions 1. Installation Pre-Requisites

167 2. Installation Inputs 3. Difference between earlier and Current Versions 4. Installation Checks 5. Starting of SAP System.

Installation Pre-Requisites 1. Download the Installation Guide www.service.sap.com/Instguide 2. Sizing 3. Download the Software from www.service.sap.com/swdc 4. Install JAVA j2sdk_1_4_2_12 5. Set the Environment Variables JAVA_HOME PATH 6. Set the Virtual Memory 7. Install ORACEL 10g 10.2.0.2 Execute OUI.exe (Oracle Universal Installer) (.) Install Database Software Only 8. Install Patch Installation Inputs Sapinst.exe from InstMaster Folder SAP Netweaver 2004s Support Release2 > SAP Systems > Oracle > Central System Administration Select (.) Typical Prompts to logoff to get some privileges Login as Administrator Select the Usage Types AS ABAP AS JAVA BI JAVA DI EPCORE EP MI OUI.exe

168 PI Browse for Java Components Browse for JCE Policy (JAVA Cryptographic Encryption) Prompts for SID and the Installation Drive [E:] Prompts for Master Password Prompts for DBSID and Database Host Prompts for Installation Exports path (Actual Content lies in Exports) Exports varies from Component to Component Prompts for Kernel and Oracle Client paths System Landscape Directory (.) Configure Local SLD IF Local SLD then Object Server Name [Hostname] Parameter Summary If required change the MirrorLogA and OrigLogA, B to different directories Requires SOLMAN Key from Solman System [SMSY] Task Progress.....~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Install SAPGUI (Setupall.exe)

Installation Checks 1. Users: Two users are created <SID>ADM SAPSERVICE<SID>

<SID>ADM is used to start the SAP system and Administration of SAP SAPSERVICE<SID> is a service user used to run the services. Verify from My Comp> Manage > Users and Groups

169 SAPOSCOL is an operating system collector ensure that sufficient resources are available to start SAP system. SAP<SID>_INSTANCENO used to start the SAP system.

2. Groups: Following groups are created to work on Oracle Database and R/3 Executables. ORA_<SID>_DBA ORA_<SID>_OPER SAP_<SID>_GLOBALADMIN SAP_<SID>_LOCALADMIN SAP_LOCALADMIN 3. usr\sap\trans is created to host the transports. It is a common transport directory where the changes of development are stored as transport requests, provides EPS\in for patching the system. 4. Kernel executables are extracted into usr\sap\SID\sys\exe directory Used to start and manage the runtime of the SAP System. 5. Profiles are created in usr\sap\SID\sys\profiles Which governs the startup parameters, runtime parameters of SAP System. 6. SAPDATA1 is created with datafiles saparch, oraarch, sapcheck, saptrace, sapreorg and redolog files (OriglogA, OriglogB, MirrorlogA, MirrorlogB) Database specific file system. 7. On Windows MMC(Gui based) is created to start and stop the SAP System To start and stop the SAP System 8. On UNIX startup scripts are created on <SID>ADM in Home Directory (startsap, stopsap) 9. Work directory is created in usr\sap\SID\DVEBMGS00\work used to host the trace files(Logs) which are generated during SAP system startup. 10. Oracle database uses (ORASID on UNIX other users like OPS$ Users, SAPSR3, SAPSR3DB) ORA<SID> is the owner of the database in UNIX

exe and writes the log into work directory dev_ms.log if it is not started it writes the log into stderr. 4.. When the process are started they read properties from Instance Profile SID_DVEBMGS00_HOSTNAME. On UNIX login as <SID>ADM .65. 202. When engine is started it reads the startup profile which is located in usr\sap\sid\sys\profile\start_DVEBMGS00_<hostname>.log c) Starts the Dispatcher using executable disp+work and write the log file into work\dev_disp and stderr. dev_wn-1 11-Sep-09 192/ 172/ 10 Global IP Address (ARPANET) If we assign other than this the system are considered to be public.Open Terminal . memory.consists of a entry .pfl Startup Profile consists of a) Starting the database using command strdbs.Startsap (Scripts) 3. buffers etc and writes the logs into dev_w0. On Windows use SAPMMC/ Startsap to start the SAP System 2.cmd .log All the log files resides in Work Directory..V9start. We need to buy public IP addresses from ISP's.146 . In future there is possibility for address conflict. The IP addresses from 192/ 172/ 10 are private IP Addresses which can be used internally in the companies.170 <SID>ADM is the owner(Administrative Privileges) of the database in Windows Starting up of SAP System 1.sql (From here we can find whether the database is up or not) b) Starts the Message server using executable msg_server.136.cmd this command starts the database and writes the log files to stderr1. dev_w1.pfl Such as number of work processes. dev_w2 .log which is in the work directory strdbs.

log. System not started? 1..e. listener hostnames. listener ports. listener status.exe All the startup logs are stored in Work directory.171 NAT . Q. listener. PAM .Supports .Product Availability Matrix 32 Bit . It is also called as Trace directory or Developer traces. Check the connectivity. database startup statuses etc.Extended Binary Code.log which resides in saptrace\ background directory Oracle\SID\saptrace\background Identify for Oracle errors that start with "ORA" Example 1033 . It is translated to Private IP or Routed to PVT IP.2GB 64 Bit .Physical Memory (RAM) The Internet communication Manager ICMON started by using icom. they are available externally by using Public IP.Allocates upto 4 GB Virtual Memory (Hard Disk) ..Network Address Translation All the servers are managed with Private IP but . Check the database is up and running by Start > run > sqlplus "as sysdba" 2. Whenever a request comes from Internet to a public IP. If the database is not started then start the database and look into the log files alert<SID>. DB_Connect Issues. cmd> lsnrctl 14-Sep-09 . EPSIBIC .. The work process is unable to connect to the database. i.

172 07-Jul-09 BASIS Recently SAP -Manufact uring -Retail Applicati on Server Allocates Processes Accelerates the requests INSTANCE It's an Agent Communicates .

.0 (Service) will handle the user request.173 with Database with the Native SQL . ABAP BASIS BW into a common supply chain/ Platform The integrated ITS uses the common HTTP mechanism as in SAP Web AS. performance. no additional Web server is required as. and for this SAP Implemented a component called ITS (Internet Transaction Server) separate tool windows specific. in the case of the standalone ITS. . Analysis.It provides the runtime environment for all SAP Components... tracing. IIS (Microsoft internet information service) SAPWAS: SAP WEB APPLICATION SERVER which is capable of providing internet Including ICM 6. Monitoring.It provides a platform for User Management. auditing and development. 08-Jul-09 BASIS . Administration.Dispatcher As the load goes on increases we will go with adding a Dialogue Instance Accessing the BASIS repository over the web.

Monitoring (CCMS) Computing Center Management System . It is similar to single code page and supports only the like minded When there are no plans to expand the business globally this is the best option. and CRM2005 etc. SMLT Languages like Chinese. code page conversion. Korean. .Audit Information System ... EBP (Enterprise Buyer Professional) etc. ..e.Security Audit .) but each additional languages should be imported. In future we can perform a UNICODE Migration.System Trace . and consistent which are built on ABAP language. BI7. From SAPWEBAS 640 SAP provides only two versions (Non-Unicode and Unicode). Refer TCPDP table and I18N NON-UNICODE: languages... MDMP has various disadvantages during upgrade i.0. the characters are stored in more than one byte.Work Load Monitor .. Ensure that the version is Unicode enabled like ECC6. due to this reason we need multicode page (MDMP .174 SU01 SM21 RZ20 SM20 ST03 ST01 SECR SE38 .Sub Module of SRM All these applications are robust. 2.e.Administration (System Logs) .. SAP Stopped supporting blended (Multi) code pages i. German.Multi Display Multiple Language) on the same system.ABAP Editor There are various BASIS platforms for R/3 APO (Advanced Planner and Optimizer).User Management .Sub Module of SCM BIW (Business Intelligence Warehouse). .. Use SAP Installation Master DVD . Dutch.e. (NON UNICODE to UNICODE) Process: UNICODE Migration 1. reliable. MDMP and introduced UNICODE to support all the languages i. Thai.0. and Japanese cannot be accessed using the above code page. LANGUAGE *************************** SINGLE CODE PAGE: The database is installed on a code page like 1100 which can support the like minded languages around 10 (En. stable.Additional Life Cycle.

Note: As the Kernel is going to be changed during migration the whole database needs to be deleted. Upgrade Migration ..export NUC 3.4. The web requests are received by Wgate which are in the form of .System copy . Unicode consumes 40% of additional resources than NUC.6c to ECC6.Source system .175 . 2.. Refer UCMIGR. Note: We need to perform certain pre post steps. ITS consists of two gates (WEB Gate and APPLICATION Gate) Process Flow: 1.CSS (Cascading Style Sheets). **************************** ITS: Internet Transaction Server In order to provide the web functionality to all SAP components ITS (Internet Transaction Server) is introduced by SAP.NUC to Unicode. In the earlier scenarios APPS Dispatcher used to handle the user request but in web scenario the HTTP requests are handled by ITS. ITS installed on a separate machine or Application server to handle the web requests.HTML or .TASKS . . These requests are forwarded to Agate.0 . Target system System -> Import with Unicode Kernel.

Response is forwarded to Agate. . 5. Agate converts web request into Dynpro specific requests so that they can be handled by Diag Protocol. 4. The Dispatcher in the Application server handles the request and process it.176 Diag is a protocol that is used to handle the request coming from SAPGUI on port 3200 Series 3200 + Instance Number 3.

Internet Communication Manager) which is called IITS (Integrated Internet Server) Tcode: SITSPMON . Update or delete. Instead of ITS SAP included WEBAS 640 and included ICM service within the Application Server. (ICM .177 Time Consuming Not an Integrated Service It depends on IIS (Internet Information Server) to host the pages Non Business User input -> Queue -> Assign a Counter -> Screen -> Withdrawal -> Insert.

0 SRM 4.6c (Kernel Version 4. Knowledge Management. this platform is going to be a common platform for all the SAP Applications even the ICM is introduced in SAPWEBAS and its still require ITS to process the web request. chat.6D) ITS provided the web functionality (APO 3. BIW 3. Rooms. .5 ECC 5. SAP introduced IITS which is integrated in WEBAS640.0.0 ECC 6. WEBEX. Work List.0 SCM 4. It is accessed by the tcode: SITSPMON BIW 3. Logos etc.0 CRM 4.0 XI 3.0 Are the SAP components that are installed on a common platform SAPWEBAS 640. Subsequently SAPWEBAS 700 and 710 are released 09-Jul-09 WEBAS ABAP could not provide Colorful.. dynamic. offline.0 are the last basis components) SAP Introduced ICM (Internet Communication Manager) and named the platform as SAPWEBAS 6.178 IE -> [ICM + IITS] WEBAS Introduction of WEBAS Until versions R/3 4.

Exchange Messages called as Process Integration (or) Intelligent Broker (or) BPM using an adapter.Exchange Infrastructure: Provides communication from one system to another system.179 Consider an Example - XI . .

Knowledge Management CM .180 KM . as and when required The 4 Layers PI.Where the content is fetched either from BI. BI.Content Management TREX Engine . XI. XI.Text retrieval and classification engine searches the information and bring out from Terra Bytes of data. PI . Application Platform called as NETWEAVER .

Portal Content. CM (Content Management). NETWEAVER: Is a common platform which provides EP (Enterprise Portal). BI.181 MDM ERP ECC SCM SRM CRM . ABAP. SAPWEBAS JAVA 640.Master Data Management .Customer Relationship Management NETWEAVER . SAPWEBAS 640.Process Integration . KM (Knowledge Management).PIPA P I P A .People Integration . PI content etc. provided as add-on. PI.Enterprise Resource Planning .Supply Chain Management . .Information Integration .Enterprise Central Component .Application Platform Note: For Netweaver ABAP is mandatory as the business lies in ABAP.Supplier Relationship Management .. JAVA & Mobile Integration.

SR3 or Netweaver '07 all the above content provided on one single DVD. Usage types are ABAP.Java Components . Development Infrastructure. MDM: Master Data Management . However WEBASABAP is a mandatory Note: EP (Enterprise portal is not a business component for Java and it is only meant for GUI and Formatting) and EP doesn't requires ABAP EP = EP Core + JAVA ERP and EP cannot put together in a single box. EP.Data Consistency Try to populate the data from one repository to different servers MDM5. EP.JAVA. MI (Mobile Infra). SR2. PI. SR1. CRM. ORACLE.Kernel . Mobile. and SRM) Netweaver Components: ABAP. EPCORE EP CORE EP . Kernel resides at OS level. Usage types are selected during the installation. BI. EP. ERP and BI cannot put together in a single box. ABAP . . JAVA. SQL. It provides runtime executables/ libraries that are required for SAP Engine (SAPWEBAS) The Installation master provides an option to install all the Netweaver components together with SAP application component (ERP.Both ABAP + JAVA required BIJAVA .. SCM. BI-Java PI . MDM7..Mandatory for all the components except for EP JAVA .JAVA Development .The respective database (DB2. SR3 From Netweaver '04 S.0 Netweaver Components accelerates the business components.The software that is required is Installation Master . XI..182 Netweaver is introduced along with SAPWEBAS 640 but most of the components as add-on. JAVA. SR1. BI. Usage Types: Provides certain functionality to the business components.communication between one process to another process. (OLTP) and (OLAP) XI .Mandatory for PI. MaxDB) After installation the entire content resides in the database only. i. JAVA. EPCORE.5.e. also called Netweaver '04 S. PI. SR2.Exports . BI.JCE Policy (Java Cryptography Extension) .

Provide the following inputs 1. SQL. Select the installation Database (Oracle.exe for windows and . CRM. Netweaver Installation: 1./sapinst on UNIX) 3. 4. (sapinst. Provide the path for Software dump (Kernel.JAVA Message Server 3200 .3999 . Master password for the users : <SID>adm : SAPService<SID> DB : ORA: Sys. SID 2.. JAVA Components) on UNIX we may need to abrupt the installation and install the database but on windows the database can be installed before in hand.JAVA MOBILE . MaxDB. Instance Number (00 to 97) 3.3697 . Outln.which is used to provide secure communication over the web. MSS (Microsoft SQL Server): <SID> OS (UNIX) : ORA<SID> R/3 Specific application users : SAP*.ABAP Message Server 3900 . However when we choose to install ERP.) 4. JAVA 10-Jul-09 Netweaver alone cannot bring business it should be coupled with one of the SAP Business component like ERP. 5. JCE Policy (Java Cryprography .Dispatcher port OS . Use Installation Master 2. CRM. 6. Select the respective Sapinst. SCM etc. SCM they gets installed on ABAP platform which is a part of Netweaver..183 Infrastructure .ABAP.3297 . Ports 3600 . System. DDIC R/3 DB Owners : SAP<SID> upto WAS640 : SAPSR3 for ABAP on WAS700 : SAPSR3DB fro JAVA on WAS700 MSS : <SID> Select username from DBA_USERS. Exports.

01 (EHP1). BW.Dispatcher security port .184 4700 .com Startsap all : (Includes the Dialogue Instance) Startsap r3 Stopping ABAP Engine: Windows: UNIX : Starting JAVA Engine: Same as starting ABAP Engine Starting Integrated Engine (ABAP + JAVA): ABAP dispatcher starts the JAVA instance provided the parameter rdisp/ start_j2ee is set to true or use SMICM to start manually.sap.Secured gateway port .SSL (Https) ref: help.59916 50008 .Gateway port .12.SDM Ports (00 . 7.JAVA instance port if instance number is 00 Say for eg if the instance number is 25 then 50000 (100 + 25) = 52500 04 is for Administration port : 52504 Say for eg 99 .4797 3300 .22:50001 50001 Starting ABAP Engine: Windows: UNIX : MMC (Microsoft Mgmt Console) startsap . BASIS) Enhancement Pckg : is an upgrade to the current functionality 700.4897 50000 . MMC (Microsoft Mgmt Console) stopsap Notes (Patch) : This does the small corrections Support Package : Group of patches Support Stacks : Group of Support Packages (ABAP. 7.04 (EHP4) .3397 4800 .Instance Number) Eg: https://201.59904 .Telnet Port 50026 .17.

Central Services Instance 2. Gateway and Spool) Except Message and Enque (Dia. . BTC Message. Note: ipcclean in UNIX pagefile.Foreground ABAP Instance: Central Instance DVEBMGS (Dialogue.sys in windows is used to clear the pages Resource at the disk level is a Semaphore. Database Instance Central Services instances are provided in JAVA Engine which consists of JAVA Message Server and Enque Server to provide load balancing to the web users and central locking for all the JAVA instances. gateway & Update) Database Processes Consists of Dispatcher & Server processes Dialogue Instance: Database Instance: JAVA Instance: Dispatcher-ABAP is used to handle the requests and process them based on FIFO Dispatcher allocates the requests to work process (Dialogue) for interactive communication.185 Upgrade 640-700-710 Installation of Instances: It is an integrated installation which consists of 1. Update. Dispatcher-JAVA is used to handle the requests and process them to server processes. Spool. Central Instance 3. Enque. BTC. Dialogue Process .

186 .

Create Support Message.OSS_MSG -Save .Maintain .Create the change request .187 11-Jul-09 A Business Configuration Set is a set of Customizing settings which are grouped according to logical. business management criteria to a unit. SCPR20 . For documentary.BCSet . ABAP Request Handling . Service Desk Creation.Service_Desk_change_st32A13 . quality assurance and re-use purposes which is independent of the original Customizing tables/views which is accessible across the system landscape.expert mode Continue Goto satellite system SM30 Look for BCOS_CUST Help .

Task Handler interpret the request and submit the request to Database .Dispatcher serves the request based on FIFO . JAVA Request Flow . .User submits the request using GUI .Dispatcher assigns the request to Work Process .The database process the request and response is sent back to the user.188 .Dispatcher keeps the request in Queue.Work process handles the request using Work Process Task Handler .The request is received by the dispatcher .User submits the request .

Central Instance . . In order to start the JAVA engine Jcontrol process is used to initialize the system.Database Instance .Central Services Instance .Request is handled by JAVA Dispatcher . Process of JAVA Startup . The system is started by using startup profile START_DVEBMGS_<Hostname> (Integrated Engine) START_JC00_<Hostname> (Standalone JAVA Engine) 3. It also uses START_SCS01_<Hostname> for starting SAP Central Services 4.SMICM .Server process communicates with DB and the response is sent back to the user.189 .Server process assigns application thread manager to process the request . 5. User uses any of the above startup methods to start the JAVA Engine 2. It uses default profile to start the engine with minimal parameters that are required by all the Dialogue Instances. . . It uses the instance profile to start the engine with instance specific (Memory Buffer etc) <SID>_SCS01_Hostname for SCS and <SID>_DVEBMGS00_hostname for Integrated Engine and <SID>_JC00_Hostname for Standalone Java Engine 6.Server process processes the requests till it is completed/ or the memory is exhausted/ timeout .ATM Handles the user request internal process/ Intra process (For Locking) is handled by Server process.Use MMC .or rdisp/j2ee_start=true used to start along with ABAP Engine but consumes at least 10 Mins to 30 Mins.JAVA Dialogue Instance (Optional) Process Flow 1. (During an update) JAVA Startup .Startsap command .Dispatcher assigns the least loaded server process .Central services are used for load balancing and locking purposes.

JControl starts JLaunch process by reading instance. What is JAVA Instance/ JAVA Cluster 2.190 7. What are the types of Installations and which of them are recommended based on the usage types? 3.? 6. files. JControl initializes the bootstrap process to read the parameters from 8.Dispatcher JLaunch . What are the various profiles that are used during startup & Explain the significance of them? 5.properties Error logs are stored in DEV_JControl from the WORK Directory DEV_JLaunch DEV_Dispatcher DEV_Icm It consumes more time to start because bootstrap reads the parameters from the database to instance. What are the inputs that are required during the installation? 4. jlaunch for SDM and while initializing Jlaunch for server process it synchronize the binaries(All logs) of the dispatcher and the servers. logs and profiles that are used. Explain the JAVA file system? LAB . Explain the process of JAVA Engine startup & Describe the executables.properties and bootstrap initializes Jlaunch for dispatcher.properties JLaunch . 1.server process JAVA Engine Startup Flow Note: JControl reads from SDM/config/sdm_jstartup.

0 on Win 2k3 Server Enterprise Edition Install the O/s .000 MB = 15GB .0 .4.2_12 .My Computer .under performance click on settings for C Drive for D Drive eg: 223467MB = 223GB .provide the Admin pwd : admin123 Install the LAN Drivers and assign the static IP Address : 172.0 Copy the SAP dump by accessing another machine \\willsys04\d$ Installing ECC6.under Advanced tab .Properties .Assign the product key .Allocate 15.2_12\bin Set the Environment Variables from .11 255.4.ok Setting Virtual Memory .under variable value : c:\j2sdk1.click on New Set variable name : JAVA_HOME Set variable value: c:\j2sdk1.ok Now under system variable Search for "path" and highlight it and click on edit .191 Installing SAP ECC6.Assign the computer name : willsys11 .0.4.click on environment variables .2_12 (without \bin) .After installing copy the path from c:\j2sdk1.17.10.Advanced .Organization name : willsys11 .4.2_12\bin .255.provide the system name : willsys11 .Allocate the remaining During installation of O/S . se v1.Install the j2sdk.

12-Jul-09 Usagetypes.exe During Installation it prompts for various inputs .cmd . DI (Development Infrastructure).Oracle 10G .select C: drive and set .custom size Initial size: 2046 Max-Size : 8000 If RAM is 2 GB we can select up to 8GB from HDD. Installing Database .D: .Exports .properties .run sapinst. .Master Password . EPCORE. EP.Kernel And prompts for SOLMAN Key get this from SOLMAN System.provide the SID eg: W11 SAP Installation. Machine Type . BI JAVA.Access the folder oraclelog\NT\Oracle\sapserver.JAVA Components .click on change under Virtual Memory and Hit change . Usage types ABAP.SID .select advanced tab . PI and MI 2.properties Specifies the configuration of the Netweaver system 1.192 .Used to identify the usage types \usr\sap\<sid>\config\ usage. JAVA.

It contains the following directories. It also specifies the users that are created during installation along with the encrypted password. The number of CPU's and CPU speed 5.193 NT INTEL. Note: SAPJSF user (Security Framework user) is created in ABAP Engine to communicate with JAVA Engine. It contains binaries that are required to start the above process. JAVA engine doesn't let us to create users as the Data source will be in ABAP. Hostname and ports used along with backend ABAP Client. Memory available on the system 4. Dispatcher + Server = Local instance (Cluster) 2. DATA: Used for storing the lock entries.properties to start the instance (We can find by what time the instance is started) . server and bootstrap process. engine type. It consists of the following directories 2. IDM : Identity Management SAP* DDIC SAPCP These are not counted for Licensing DVEBMGS<Instance Number> . J2EE: 1. 1. IGS: 3. This user reads the ABAP user master and ensure all the users are in the JAVA engine. HP UNIX etc 3. statistical data etc DVEBMGS it is a Kernel directory (Soft link to the physical one) Internet Graphic Server which is used to provide graphic services over the web. Note: In an integrated installation (ABAP + JAVA) J2EE_ADMIN is the administrator and on standalone JAVA Engine (Administrator) is the userid that manages J2ee engine. instance number. It also contains instance. System ID and Instance Number 6.Straight away we can see the ABAP Engine It is the Instance directory which specifies the types of processes. It also contains the directory Standalone Log Viewer to display the logs of the J2ee engine if its not started. Cluster: It specifies the dispatcher. It specifies that the JAVA engine is installed on the Machine. Admin Directory: Used for administrating the J2EE engine using Visual Admin tool.

Log Directory: sol\DVEBMGS00 it specifies the MMC log/ SM21 Logs with log goto slog . JSPM: it is a tool to apply patches (JAVA Support Pack Manager) 6.clear all the logs and that is equal to Syslog. XI.194 Cluster\dispatcher\log Defaulttrace. EP. 1. JVM Logs (Java Virtual Machine). Config Tool: It provides a tool to change parameters of the instances either globally or locally. 3.bat Under choose action . Adobe services etc. Sys\exe directory : Consists of run time executables (Kernel) Sys\profile directory: consists of profiles to start and also to control the behavior of the instance Sys\global directory: consists of SLD (system landscape directory). SDM: <sid>\DVEBMGS . profiles. global directory.bat (. Template Config Tool : It resides in global directory \usr\sap\<sid>\sys\global It is initialized by cfgtemplategui.Software Deployment Manager It is used to apply the patches for various Netweaver640 and 700 and it is discontinued in 7. 5. 4. Deploying: It is a tool that is used to deploy the small programs in to the JAVA engine. SAP Provides predefined templates to configure BW. Standard error logs starts with std and these are used to debug the startup errors.0. Double click on cfgtemplategui. template config tool.sh in UNIX) This tool is used as a part of the post installation and used to set the system with minimal parameters that are required for an usage type. XI folders. J2EE engine etc. \work directory: consists of developer traces.1 NETWEAVER TOOLS \usr\sap\<sid>\sys\global Sys consists of system executables (Kernel).trc is a file available in the log directory for both server and dispatcher.

standalone 3.JAR) Changing the SDM Password: if SDM password is unknown we can set a new password using command line interface . date and time.war (Web archives) etc. SDM is started as a process using the executable jlaunch.ear (Enterprise archives). SDM : Software deployment manager This is used to deploy and undeploy the support packages. CPU etc Note: Should not be executed after setting up the system because it will over write the changes. SDM has its own directory which contains binaries. severity etc. There will be only one SDM in the entire system. small developments that are coming with extension . (Displays the logs in user friendly format) \usr\sap\<sid>\DVEBMSG\j2ee\admin\logviewer. 2.properties in the \sdm\program\config.sdc (\sdm\prog\config) During deployment (applying the support pack) it takes backup of the repository. SDM is initialized by using remotegui.0 onwards. Log Viewer Standalone tool: It is used to provide the log access at O/S level when the instance is not started and also used to display the logs based on search text. It requires SDM Server data like hostname & SDM port 50018 During initialization it will read the repository information from sdmrepository. log and libraries. SAP recommends to use JSPM from 7.195 Select apply and hit next. It is recommended to execute in the initial stages.zip. SDM Directory contains a document related by SDM itself (SDMKIT.sda (SAP Deployable archives). The major advantage of SDM is to undeploy the support packages(during conflicts) but its a disadvantage when compared with system consistency because it can undeploy the dependent packs also. . It is started by using sdm_jstartup. In WEBAS 640/ NETWEAVER 640 JSPM is not available and in NW710 SDM is not available. config. . Select the template file and click next Used to set memory. ..sca (SAP component Archive) .bat from \usr\sap\sol\DVEBMGS\SDM\program.jar (JAVA Archives). .

sh on UNIX It resides in \usr\sap\<sid>\dvebmgs00\j2ee It connects to the database to modify the parameters of the J2ee engine when the engine is offline or online. click on Deployment Tab. file system or J2ee engine. Download the support pack from the market place. the window is closed but the SDM Client is still connected to the server in this case we need to restart the SDM. Depending upon the nature of the patch it updates any one of the above Click on next and click on start deployment Logviewer tab provides the deployment status along with the duration of the deployment.information option in the home page http://<hostname>:50000 SDM startup modes are standalone/ Integrated. Deploy (or) copy the patches into the shared folder so that (DEV. SDM can be started in standalone or in integrated mode using command sdm jstartup sdmhome =<. patch location can be a database. SDM reads the files from the specified location not eps/in and it has its own inbox to process the deployment.sca file and hit next 6. Modifications will get effect only after a restart of the J2ee engine (the parameters are static) J2ee engine startup is not required to work with config tool. Config Tool: Used for Offline configuration. login to SDM Tool 4.196 sdm changepassword. It is used for the following purposes a) To increase the server processes up to MAX 16 .. Deploying a support pack through SDM 1. 2.bat /. 13-Jul-09 4..> [mode = integrated/ standalone] Note: it is always recommended to logoff from the SDM instead of closing the window. QTY. The patch status is obtained from system . Click add browse for . 5. PRD) are accessed (Not mandatory to EPS) directory 3.. It is initialized by using a script configtool.. Note: In order to change the password SDM should be running in standalone mode. Default mode is integrated and standalone mode is used to change the password.

(Platform specific JVM should be installed on the customers system) b) It is used to configure various managers and services. d) It is used to configure the user management to LDAP engine ie. To handle the load we have to add server process. c) It is used to store the Administrator password using option secure store.197 cluster = disp + server process Note: if we want to have more than 16 then we have to include dialogue JAVA instance. JVM contains Byte code verifier and class loader. It consists of java run time environment to interpret the JAVA programs. this option is used to enable SAP* user. Initially JVM checks the class files and verify the bytes in the code and then signals to load the class file to display the screens/ Logic executed. (ABAP/ JAVA) e) Offline configuration mode to change certain parameters eg: when all the users are locked. users who are created in AD (Active Directory) server. when SAP* is enable no other user can work on the system. a) When JAVA programs are defined they used to save extension . It is the only tool used to modify the JVM Settings.class file.JAVA (eg bank. This class file will be distributed to the customers irrespective of the operating system Authenticate . Unlock the admin users and disable SAP* (two restarts are required) f) It works only on the database as it needs to connect to the database using the OS authentication (doesn't require any userid and password) 5. This is the reason why JRE is required to execute JAVA Program. The server processes are used to handle the user requests. LDAP protocol is used to transfer the users from AD to the Application platform.java) it is compiled into bank. Visual Admin Tool: . JAVA VIRTUAL MACHINE It is a platform specific software provided by sun Microsystems. b) it is used to configure the JVM (JAVA Virtual Machine) memory settings.login Authorized .Executing tasks These files are interpreted by using JAVA Virtual Machine. This is required when memory is available to configure the additional server processes.

From Command prompt telnet <Ipaddress/Hostname> telnet willsys11 50008 <port number> Provide the login details as J2EE_ADMIN and the password Prompt changes to > > lsc (list services) > man (gives the manual) In Netweaver 7.bat /.198 This is an admin tool which is used to change the static and dynamic parameters (Except JVM) It is initialized by using go. It needs admin user . Shell Console Tool (or) Telnet tool It is used to login to the system remotely when the system is congested (Hourglass mode).To identify the processes . It can also used to start/stop various services and applications. hostname and port p4 (50004). It can connect from any system using the above credentials. memory and restart the processes if required. password. 14-Jul-09 6.1 SAP provides Shell Console Tool in the J2ee Directory and up to Netweaver 7.0 telnet tool has to be executed manually from the command prompt.10 NW but widely used in 640/ 700. \usr\sap\<sid>\DVEBMSG\shellconsole from 7.sh in UNIX which resides in j2ee\admin It works only online because it needs to connect to J2ee engine. Command=> 0 to Exit Command=> 30 to refresh the instance data (It is used to clear the shared memory in use) 12 . JCMON or JControl Monitor It is initialized by using command line executable jcmon suffix with Jcmon pf ="path of the instance profile" Eg: D:\usr\sap>jcmon pf=d:\usr\sap\<sid>\sys\profile\wis_dvebmgs_hostname It provides the menu to administer cluster.1 only 7. It is discontinued in 7. It is used to configure various services and managers.

. JSPM has its own patch level similar to SPAM which is updated by JSPM. .This is used to monitor the status of the instance 8. It is also used to upgrade kernel where the system will be restarted as per the requirement (NW Consultant should take the backup of the kernel) Process: Download the respective software into EPS\In directory (.e missing the sequence). Specify the patches target level (Select or Skip) Note: In earlier cases before applying any packs need to apply SPAM but here JSPM. It is only executed in the <SID>ADM home. new software components & additional usage types. Select the type of the package to apply Eg: Single Support package JSPM reads the EPS\In directory and displays if a valid support pack is available. manager self service.sca. It is also used to control the transport of objects between systems in the landscape.199 5 . SDM is not available in NW 7.bat Specify the SDM Password (SDM and JSPM should not be operated simultaneously to avoid inconsistency of the system).sda. The main advantage of JSPM is undeployment is not possible. patches from \usr\sap\trans\eps\in Similar to SPAM but it works on SDM port and password.1 It reads the support packages.bat which is available in JSPM directory. JSPM . Initialize JSPM by using go. It is initialized by go.0 to replace SDM tool. JSPM is used to deploy business packages like employee self service. (The environment required for JSPM is provided by user <SID>ADM.sar etc) and place them in EPS\In Ensure that the logged in user is <SID>ADM. . consistency between support packages are checked and displays the source and target patch levels.JAVA Support Patch/ Pack Manager tool It is introduced in Netweaver 7. The another major advantage is the patches can be deployed arbitrarily like 1 to 5 (i.

SLD Tool (System Landscape Directory) http://<hostname>:50000/sid It is a landscape information provider service to provide the information of all the systems in the landscape along with products. components etc similar to ST03. administration. 066) .18 EHP1 . process and applications. It is used to perform the post installation activities based on the usage types.200 Support Packs SOL ERP NW . patch levels. Standalone JAVA engine has various options lie user creation and password management in the user admin tool but whereas in the integrated engine the user management is taken over by ABAP Engine except assigning J2EE roles. (000. UME . It provides reports related to users.001. groups and roles. From NW7. Select the target SP level can click on next to deploy the patches.0 and used for JAVA engine. 9. 11.For user management PORTAL . software components. clients information etc. JSPM maintains its own log files if any dependencies are missing it will abort the deployment.10 all the visual admin tool tasks are performed by NWA Tool. USER Admin Tool It is used to administer the users. 10.for Portal engine J2ee . User admin is a part of NW Identity Management tool. memory. NWA Tool (NETWEAVER Admin Tool) It is available since NW7.roles Note: ABAP roles are groups in JAVA Engine.EHP1 . configuration and monitoring.For J2ee Engine ABAP . Also used to start/stop various services.EHP4 Note: Among the selected packages SAP Identifies which one be prioritized first in this case JSPM goes first. performance.

Config Tool 3.65. JSPM (JAVA Support Pack Manager) 7. Visual Admin 5.201 It is accessed by using the url : http://202. Template Config Tool.146:50000/sld It is effectively used in XI. 2. Standalone log viewer 6.136. User Admin 10. SDM (Software Deployment Manager) 4. NWA (Netweaver Admin Tool) 11. SLD (System Landscape Directory) JAVA Startup Framework . Shell Console (Telnet) 9. PI and became a mandatory component as per ITIL/ Standards Infrastructure Library. 15-Jul-09 1. JCMON (JControl Monitor) 8.

202 .

Bootstrap reads properties from DB 4. Libraries. Server Kernel. JControl Initialization 2. JControl initialises JLaunch (SDM) 8. Libraries are synchronized before they get started 7.Server Starts the Application Note: Thread Manager is for System process Thread Application Manager is for the customer (Dispatcher cannot handle ATM) Kernel provides runtime which consists of Managers to work at J2ee Engine level The J2ee Engine contains the following Managers 1.203 DVEBMGS\ J2ee\ cluster\ server0\cfg\kernel Applications lies here for sync. JControl Initialises Jlaunch (DISP) 6. \server0\apps\sap. Binaries are synchronized before they get started 10. DTD: Data type definition JAVA Startup Framework 1. JControl initialises JLaunch (Server Process) 9. Application Thread Manager . Initialize bootstraps (Cluster) 3.com Applications only sync by the server process. Dispatcher Kernel.properties 5. Bootstrap updates instance.

..204 So each manager/ service has four values and the priority of execution as follows Global Default Global Custom Local default Local Custom Global configuration doesn't have any ID Eg: Have 5 dialogue instances with 5 server process each. one for server and the other for the dispatcher Services: These are similar to SAP Transactions to perform certain tasks on the J2EE engine.. It needs to maintain 5 Dispatchers/ 25 server process which requires editing the config tool 30 times or simply use Global configuration and edit only 2 times i.e. These are also used to perform certain post-installation activities..

Traces: These are explicitly switch on by the user to trace the user activities. Logs: These are by default written to the default log locations without any initiation/ Initiative. Enque. It can be edited by choosing the server/dispatcher. Licensing Adapter Service: This is used to apply the license from the text file. VA services are explanatory than config tool services and also VA provides additional functionality. It is used to set the log locations for the applications. 16-Jul-09 3. Difference between categories & locations Logs & Traces We can also switch SQL Trace similar to ST05 to identify the expensive SQL Statement. It is also used to set the traces for certain activities. RFC. Log Viewer Service: It is used to display the logs and it is similar to standalone log viewer service. logs. Goto Market place : www. Buffer ST05 Trace) the traces. or using the service in config tool/ Visual admin tool. It is used to set (SQL. These are logged into categories.sap. These are logged into locations. Log configuration Service: This is similar to SM18/ SM19 to trace the user activities.com click on SAP Support Portal under FOR CUSTOMERS Provide SUSERID and pwd Click on Keys and Request Tab .205 1. J2ee\cluster\dispatcher\log 2. Set the granularity of the log level (Using Min & Max) Severity is also setup based on requirement. Most of the services are available both in config tool and visual admin tool. Eg: In Log Configurator Service Tracing option is provided in VA Tool whereas in config tool it is not provided.service.

0 (2004 S) System: NT/ INTEL Database: Hit Continue Note: In earlier versions we use to type the command saplicense -get From Visual Admin Tool Licensing Adapter for Hardware Key Note: It contains 2 licenses one is standard license (Permanent) which is valid till 31. 4.12. For ABAP . Program ID plays an important role to establish connection between the systems.Click (Install license from File) and Upload the file.SAINT & SPAM For JAVA . JCORFC Provider Services: It is similar to SM59 used to create RFC connections to the backend systems. From Visual Admin Tool .206 Click on Request Permanent License Key Select the Installation Type Click on New System Provide SID as PRD System Name : Hostname System Type Product: NW Version: NW 7.9999 and the other one is maintenance certificate which is valid up to 3 months.SDM & JSPM Apply the license through Market place Display license script Download to PC From Visual Admin .JCoRFC Provider Provide : Program ID : JAVA_2_ABAP Gatewayhost : WILSOLMAN Gateway Service : Sapgw00 Service Count :4 . Maintenance certificate locks the SPAM and JSPM after 3 Months.

Note: [ANT] is a tool to archive . They will wait in the queue until they are processed (or) timeout (This is applicable for dispatcher only). Userid. From VA Tool .207 Application Server System Number : 00 Client Logon Lang User : wilsolman : 001 : en : sapuser (Backend EP System) SMGW is the T-Code to verify whether the connection is established or not. On server side we have to set Cache Size up to 999 and file buffer size & Other parameters specified bye SAP from VA Tool. From Visual Admin Dispatcher . Specify Hostname. Client.ear format files . 6. It is also useful to deploy the small application like (*. Language (Details of the backend system) 5. if not manually run/ start the application. For single Prog ID Max 20 RFC can be generated. HTTP Provider Service : It is used to handle the request and keep them in socket queue. It is widely used in XI/ PI to check the specified applications are running.ear) Enterprise Archive files. Specify Program ID. Gateway Host (If the gateway is installed separately) Gateway service (< Instance>) Server Count (To specify the number of server processes that can work simultaneously for this Program ID. Deploy Service: It is used to start and stop the deployed applications.Click on Deploy The small programs which are developed in-house are moved using this service (When NWDP not in place) Netweaver Development Infrastructure. Password.Services HTTP Provider Keep Alive time to 75 instead 15 Sec.

We need to switch on the trace explicitly for a specific module along with the user name. Monitoring Service It is used to provide monitoring for all the kernel. 13. If no threads are available the system marks the respective Manager/ Service in traffic light signals (Yellow-Green) in this case it is Red. SLD Data Supplier Service: This service populates the JAVA Engine information into SLD for every 720 Minutes (12Hrs) in ABAP Engine RZ70 is used to populate SLD. (Process needs to be followed) Enqueue Table (100MB size) determines the locking table size enque/table_size 8. UME Provider Service: . It is also similar to SM04 to display the login Users. It is similar to CCMS Monitor (RZ20) alert monitor. RFC. 9. Security Provider Service It is similar to SU01. We can select the user and release the lock. 10. Eg: If the defined threads are completely used then Thread congestion occurs. 12. Pfcg which is used to create users and assign roles.208 7. component and requests. Locking Adapter Service It is similar to SM12 and is used to identify the users who are explicitly locking the resources for update. threads. Performance Tracing It is similar to SE30 runtime analysis of ABAP Program and ST05 system trace to trace SQL. JARM (JAVA Application Response Time Management) Used to fetch the information of users. Buffers and enqueue. Similar to ST03-(Work Load Analysis) 11. services and performance of the system.

Adding Server Process (Config Tool) 4. CR_Content . Defined the user management UME . UME(Java Itself)) define user store. Both the systems are used to maintain the landscape information. LDAP. Installed additional dialogue instances 13. Working with UME Provider service to restrict the parameters of userid and password 8. Configured SLD 18. Note: Solution Manager installed with usage type JAVA and SLD is configured on it. Define RFC connections from JAVA to backend systems (JCORFC) 10. for a standalone JAVA engine (SU01. Note: Form Netweaver 7. 17-Jul-09 Post Installation Activities for JAVA Engine: 1. Define System Landscape (http://<hostname>:50000/devinf) usage type DI should be selected. 15.This is content repository This two information's are updated by SAP as per Note 669669 . Assigning security roles using security provider service.209 It is used to set the logon parameters similar to security parameters that starts with login in RZ10 Login\password digits Login\lang etc. Configured JVM memory using config tool. Configuring JAVA System to send information to SLD (SLD Data Supplier Service) 6. Defining Admin Users 7.Component Information Model. Defined backup schedule using BRTools (Oracle). Enterprise Manager in SQL Server 12. Need to take complete \usr directory backup for JAVA CIM . 16. 9. 17. add-ons using SDM & JSPM (Update the system to level 18) 11.for Integrated SU01. Applying patches. Configuring logs (Log Configurator) 3. Defined process documentation 14. Configuring Time out period (Http Provider) 5. Applying license (Licensing Adapter Service) 2.10 onwards VA tool is discontinued instead NWA is implemented. Installed Netweaver Developer studio to start the development.

JAVA System Copy 2... OS For this take the backup of PRD DB New system build Patches Install central instance Sapinst Tool Install database . Heterogeneous System Copy ....Management Studio Select the system Goto Maintenance plan Define the schedule for backup.. Or Select database rt click .Backup BRTOOLS Backup Recover Restore tool DB13 calls internally BRTools.. On the SQL Server .210 Always one patch less than the Market place available patch........ Scenario: 1...... 19..... System Copy of JAVA Based systems System Copy / Homogenous Copy Existing System PRD Upgrade PRD without touching the box PRD.. DB Refresh/ System Refresh DEV QAS PRD Restoring 120GB 125GB PRD QAS 2009 (500GB) Rename PRD to QAS Repository consists of Functions... Goto DB13 or BRTOOLS to schedule backup.. Screens. Programs etc.

select source system (PRD) . 19-Jul-09 No class 20-Jul-09 .select export database 1. In case of a system refresh select Database specific tools so that the DB can be restored from a valid backup which will minimizes the export and import. Database backup Only export the file system . 1. Insert Installation master . OS / DB Migration changing OS or DB Note: It is a time consuming process because the complete database content is exported into an independent format which will suite to all operating systems and databases.211 JAVA System Copy/ DB refresh ERP CRM SCM SRM EP XI BI DI With JAVA Stack SAP Provides system copy option in the installation master DVD from Netweaver onwards. Code page conversion 2. File System 2.Goto the target system import the database System Copy: While performing a system copy using SAP tools it will prompt whether database can be exported (use database specific methods) This option should be unchecked if we are performing the following. SDM and application specific content.Additional software tasks life cycle . In this case it exports the directory structure. (D:\tmp) 18-Jul-09 Discussion class about System Copy.Preparation Export Split .

It should atleast 20GB or 3 times the RAM (which ever is larger) Shared Memory: The memory that is shared by OS DB and R3 Processes. Virtual Memory: (SWAP) The memory that is installed could not cater to the requirements of the users so a part of disk is used temporarily which is referred as virtual memory. Local Memory: The memory reserved for a work process Ztta/ roll_area Extended Memory: The memory that is exclusively measured for all the SAP WP (It is a part of shared memory) .212 Memory Management Physical Memory: The memory that is installed on the machine and allocated to the machine by PHYS_MEMSIZE.

WP congestion or Hour glass Mode WP goes to pvt mode then use DPMON and kill the session.213 Ztta/roll_extension per user context Em/initial_size_mb = 512MB Heap Memory: The memory that is dedicated to a process till the completion of the task or timeout. ABAP/heaplimit ABAP/heap_area_dia ABAP/heap_area_nondia ABAP/heap_area_total Note: If any error encountered like Storage_parameters_wrong_set its a memory issue. Memory Usage sequence: Zttaroll_first Zttaroll_ext Roll_Area ABAP/ Heap 20 KB 500MB 20MB 2 GB PVT Mode DIA . Eg: Note: Use only 50% of Extnd Memory for PVT Minimizing the work process will causes Hour Glass .

Roll. ST02 Over all memory Page. Heap SM50 Refer : SM56/ SM66 Note: All the memory parameters need a restart as the memory is @ OS level. Command soladm> memlimits Multiple instances on a single server Then for eg : 64GB 16 16 16 16 PHYS_MEMSIZE .214 Eg: Search for Rdisp* from Rz10 Rdisp/max_priv_time Rdisp/wppriv_max_no (wont waits for default 600secs) Eg: Say for eg: 4GB 50% 2GB 2GB/ 250 = 8 Note: SM04 is used to find how much memory is consuming with Tcode.

JAVA uses heap memory to ensure that the requests are completed. JAVA MEMORY ALLOCATION JAVA memory is managed by JAVA Virtual machine. Each dialogue WP serves 5 . Dispatcher and server has their own values. Each WP required around 75MB to 150MB (DVEBMGS) of memory. Heap memory is configured using -XMS 1024M from config tool. configured by ztta/roll_extension 4. If local memory is not sufficient the it uses the heap memory that is configured by abap/heap_area_dia which is a part of abap/heap_area_total 6.e. . This memory should be configured by (PHYS_MEMSIZE). If Extended memory is not sufficient then it uses the remaining part of the local memory i.e. If this memory is not sufficient then it uses the extended memory i.215 MEMORY ALLOCATION: 1. only local configuration is allowed. In order to roll in the User Context it consumes memory that is configured by memory ztta/roll_first. The programs are loaded using class loader. configured by ztta/roll_area 5.e. 3. 2. The above scenario is on process based. When a user request for a resource the Work Process rolls the user context for handling the task.10 Users. byte codes are verified before they are interpreted.. It is only configured for Active instances i. if the work process uses the heap memory it is said to be in private mode and its runtime cannot be controlled by Rdisp/max_wp_runtime but it is controlled by Rdisp/max_priv_time If more number of WP goes into pvt mode then memory bottle neck/ hourglass/ WP congestion occurs which can be resolved by killing the expensive work process using DPMON because logon is not possible to kill through SM50.

216 While interpreting the requests if a new content is fetched it uses NEW GENERATION MEMORY which is configured by parameter. It effects only after restarting the system.It provides userid and password .the data/functions that needs access are provided with the help of Roles and Profiles. .XX:MAXNEWSIZE It will be 1/3rd the size of heap memory Eg: for 1GB(1024) Heap 341MB PERMANANT GENERATION MEMORY: If the content that is interpreter is required permanently (JVM) (classes. methods) then it will uses PERMANANT GENERATION MEMORY. If the content is not eligible to store it will be thrown into garbage (GC) Should be careful while changing the memory parameters 1. OLD GENERATION MEMORY: (Tenured Generation) If the content is old and can be reused then it will uses OLD/ Tenured generation. packages. It is configure by the parameter -XX: PERMSIZE -XX: MAXPERMSIZE It will be around 1/4th of the Heap memory. It is calculated by using new generation memory.XX:NEWSIZE . .SU01 or USR02 table authentication in SAP system .User Master record in SAP system . 21-Jul-09 JAVA Authorization Concept . Heap memory = OLD + NEW GENERATION MEMORY For server process the new generation memory will be 1/6th of the Heap size or 1/4th of the PERM size. Note: Only server process requires more memory because it needs to process the user requests.

Universal Description Discovery and Integration is used to populate the users from the third party database (Oracle. Authorization fields & Activities Pfcg. It is an industry standard to populate the users from one database to other using web services. Directory server using LDAP 4. su24. Siebel etc). User store can be 1. surc. . users can be populated in ABAP engine using LDAP. The default store is UME store (User Management Engine). 3. bat) JAVA Authorization Concept ABAP using SU01 JAVA Using UME Directory Server Using LDAP UDDI provider Goto Security Provider service in Visual Admin tool . Using ABAP SU01 (Mandatory in case of an Integrated Installation i. ABAP + JAVA). Note: No need to create RFC's to have the users to replicate in JAVA which has been created in ABAP (SU01) & LDAP. UDDI (Universal Directory Description Integration) How to configure user Goto Security Provider in Visual Admin Tool (go. JAVA Engine itself. su22.Authorization objects. The details are available in UME Provider Service from VA tool. UME resides in J2ee Engine UME can get the users in the following ways 1.Authorization activities table creation of TACT & TACTZ .e. It is also possible to have LDAP in the back end engine i. We can also use VA tool to get the configuration of the back end engine.217 .JAVA uses (Userid and Pwd) Authentication method comes from user store.e.Click on Manage Security Store Do not modify the store unless it is recommended by SAP. pfud . su20.User Management Change Mode . ABAP Engine 2.

218 Note: In case of Integrated engine. a) LDAP (Light Weight Directory Access protocol) b) SU01 of ABAP Engine c) UME itself d) UDDI (Universal Directory Description Integration) a) LDAP (Light Weight Directory Access protocol) It is used to populate the users from a directory server (MSADS . users are created only through SU01 (The back end engine can get users from either LDAP or CUA) Note: No Client Mechanism in JAVA Engine Stand alone JAVA Engine In order to ensure the consistency of user management SAP Allows only one data store to populate the users.Config Tool (usr\sap\<sid>\jc01\j2ee\config tool. IPlanet. (Lotus-Domino from IBM). UME can get the users from any one of the following Data source. Goto . ABAP engine take over the complete user management i.Microsoft Active Directory).bat) Select UME LDAP data and provide the following info. .e.

. c) UME Engine The UME manages users by itself (Very rare) Goto ....xml) ...219 (datasource_ldap....net .specify the active user.User management to create users Roles: Roles are used to provide access to data and functions....this user contains the role.saperp. As discussed above users are only populated from the backend systems we need to assign roles in the J2ee engine to access the functionality over the web so. account and group path. password to read the info from ADS .User Admin to create user Assign roles etc We can also use Visual Admin tool ... Save and restart to get this effected....save and test the connection/ Test authorization Userpath: it shows where the users are placed common name : BASIS The above information is provided by Domain administrator..specify the userpath. SAPJSF . willsys.. .. http://<hostname>:50000/ useradmin Click on Configuration_provider and provide the above details. The same can be configured using User Admin tool.... b) Users from ABAP engine Goto ... 389 (default for MSADS) . userid/ pwd. Logon lang and host name. * SAP_BC_JSF_Communication_RO (read only) we can also cerate our own user but the above role is required to communicate with J2ee...Specify the server name .UME Provider service / User Admin tool Click on configuration Select the abap.security provider service ..specify the server port .. in order to access a report on the web the user should have permissions .xml file and specify Client..

Roles are used to protect the base of the JAVA Engine NOTE: SAP_ALL (S_RFC is not accessed) ABAP roles wont play any role in JAVA authorization SOX: Segregating roles to different users.are the groups in JAVA Group of roles are controlled by authorization group. menus. R/3 Roles are groups in JAVA Engine UME Roles Security Roles R/3 Roles . Refer: TDDAT.To restrict the application . TDRG 22-Jul-09 ROLES JAVA Roles Actions Permissions Defined in programs ABAP Roles Authority check Authority Object field value Role: Is the collection of favorites. A business transaction should not be assigned to a single person to avoid the fund misusage . composite profiles etc.To work on JAVA Engine . SU54 Authorization Group.220 both on the J2ee/ ABAP (back end system). If any one of them are missing user cannot access the functionality.

. ABAP roles does not have any authorization in JAVA Engine. UME Roles 2. J2EE Security roles. UME Roles: J2ee core engine is built with Java programs. a) User Administration b) Role and Administration c) Support and Administration J2EE Security Roles .Actions are assigned to the roles Note: There is no need to create UME roles unless SOX is in place. Each program that needs control is defined by permissions. JAVA Roles are defined as 2 types 1.221 Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOX) 23-Jul-09 AUTHORIZATION ROLES: Roles provide the activities that can be performed by user.Permissions are grouped into actions .

RZ (Profiles. Alerts. User should authenticate to login JAVA and Authorized to access the screens. As the programs needs security the developer should identify and define them during development.Security roles. these roles will be moved to portal roles and can be assigned using User Admin tool. Even though full authorization is provided in JAVA engine we may not able to access the content/ functionality in the back end system unless ABAP roles are assigned to the user. SAP_BC_Roles SU. Example: SLD: The role name is lcradministrator is now displayed as UME Role. Also should have authorization in the back end engine. These roles need to be assigned to the users using VA tool. CCMS) SM (Monitoring) ST (traces.Services . Specify the connection (LDAP Connector) 4. Material information.xml contains the roles and these are displayed in Visual Admin tool . Connect to the LDAP server using system user 7. Note: ABAP roles are used to protect the sensitive data like HR information. In most of the programs web. During deployment the descriptions should specify the roles. Execute SM59 2. pages to display the above data. Transport) LDAP . Define a connection of Type T 3.222 SAP Applications are ported on J2EE Engine.Security provider service . Define LDAPMAP for user attributes (users that are defined in ADS needs to be mapped w. programs or generic connection to the back end) Each Application should be defined with roles that appears as J2EE security roles. The traffic light should be green . SU01) 8. These applications provide functionality to communicate with backend system (functionality means screens. Due to the discontinuation of VA Tool. Java roles provide screens. However other application roles will be displayed as portal roles.SM59 1. Sale Info etc. Portal roles are application roles that are used to protect business packages. Functional information.r.t. Create an (System User) not SU01 user 5 Define LDAP Server by using connector 6.

The DB growth will be normal as there were no updates but keep an eye on the size of DB if custom updates are defined. The backend system may sabotage(damage) the response time of J2ee Engine so it is also required to fine tune the back end systems (running DB stats. The response time is defined as 2 to 3 seconds depending on the system resources. 7. patch application. Monitor the growth of the Archived logs. Use RSLDAPTEST in SA38 to test ADS (Active Directory Server) JAVA Monitoring 1. 2. 333 Where as for SAPSR3 29327 6. Use log viewer service to monitor the logs related to the applications.trc J2ee\cluster\server0 3 Monitor the space (there should not much growth on the file system. Use LDAPLog to check the user synchronization logs. Log files in cluster directory and archive them frequently. 10. Using monitoring service to monitor the user request overview. unless the log files grow abnormally. JAVA require only memory and CPU no need of DB Request -----> JAVA ----->Stores in the ERP ABAP System Select count(*) from DBA_TABLES where owner = 'SAPSR3DB'.(It purely depends on the backend system database time) 10. Ensure that traces are not switched on during normal operations(they will fill the OS and the J2EE engine may not be started) 8.223 9. Schedule synchronization using RSLDAPSync_user 11. identify the missing indexes etc) . tran/eps/in (Can be cleared) 4. component overview and identify the critical requests with high response time. Monitor the work directory so that Dev_Rfc. 9. Dev_Rd are not populated largely (the growth indicates the RFC issue). Log files such as default. 5.

Defined products. Defined technical systems of ABAP. Deployed business packages like ESS. Define the landscape and include all the systems in the landscape. MSS. Defined XI Domain and included technical & business systems. User creation and role assignment 12. . 24.224 11. Upgrade the kernel to level 185 14. Upgrade the system to NW EHP1 15. XMII and BI Note: X Cross APPs . Performed backup of the SLD so that it can be imported during SLD Inconsistencies 23. Configured ABAP engine using RZ70 to populate information into SLD. Configured JAVA engine using SLD DS service to populate info in to SLD 20. 19. Installed standalone gateway/ and configured parameter Data supplier 18. 26.It is a manufacturing. Imported the latest CR Content into SLD from the Market place. Displayed the SLD Logs during Import errors 25. 22. Worked with SLD assigned roles LCR* to configure SLD both manually and using NWA Tool. SOLMAN Administration TADM 10_2 SLD SLD is only a landscape information service based on J2EE engine. integration and Intelligence 16. JAVA and NON-SAP systems 21. software components for third party vendors. Patching the systems using SDM and JSPM 13. 17.

SLD . because SLD needs a gateway which is available through ABAP engine.225 24-Jul-09 SLD: SYSTEM LANDSCAPE DIRECTORY AND SOLUTION MANAGER SLD provides the landscape information of both SAP and NON-SAP systems. Startup and also the availability of SLD to other systems. SLD can be initialized by using NWA tool.DMTF SLD is available using url http://<hostname>:50000/sld. In order to work with SLD we need lcradministrator role. DMTF. RZ70 NWA Tool .Distributed Management task force is an initiative to provide the information of the available systems in the landscape.click . This is required as a part of the ITIL standards. By default SLD is configured in the J2EE engine. To work with standalone gateway to be installed on the SLD.deploy and change configuration views . IT Infrastructure library standards. SLD on a standalone J2EE engine is not available to other systems. NWA tool is to check the SLD. It can be assigned using Visual Admin Tool but now in User Admin Tool. Eg.

REGISTERING ABAP SYSTEM: We can register a system in SLD.226 .Standalone Engine .Gateway . but it is recommended to use RZ70 in ABAP engine .Netweaver 2004s . Installing Standalone Gateway: Sapinst.Initial configuration or . etc. BI. EP.exe . MI.Gateway installation SLDDSUSER (for Directory Server User) SDAPIUSER (for communication) Created with master passwords SLD_UC SLD_NUC RFC's are created to establish communication with SLD.All configuration tasks Post Installation activities can be done from here for PI.

Used to register ABAP. . message server etc. 5. Specify the RFC (Use explicit if there is an RFC customized to communicate with SLD. Run Visual admin tool 2. Automatic (Recommended) RFC to SLD_UC/ SLD_NUC. 4. Under software Catalog . It is also used to import and export the CIM information. BTC job interval (default is 720 minutes) 2. SAP Application. JAVA and NON-SAP Systems. It provides the details of each managed systems like OS. Used as LIS (Landscape Information Provider System) 3.Click products SLD is used for the following 1. 3. Goto SLD Data Supplier Service 3. Remedy can be registered as a third party systems. Specify the SLD Bridge information SLD host and the gateway (we need to install gateway in case of J2EE engine) 4. Seibel. DB. SAVE and Activate / Execute to send the information to SLD. It uses SLD_UC RFC connection (Type TCP/IP 'T') REGISTERING JAVA ENGINE 1. Specify the details like SLD Host and Gateway 4. The system is registered in SLD REGISTERING NON-SAP SYSTEMS Systems like XI. logon groups. It provides the available and current patch level information using CIM/ CR_Content (Component Information Model and Content Repository) This information is updated by downloading from SAP Market place using note 669669. client information.227 Specify the following details 1. SAP_SLD_DATA_COLLECT SAP_SLD_DATA_STARTUP 5. patch levels. 2. To define a third party system we need to define Product and the Software component version. Save the settings with interval 720 Minutes. number of instances.

CR_CONTENT. 25-Jul-09 SLD. TYPES OF SLD 1. 7. GE.228 6. DISTRIBUTED SLD Companies like HP. It is used to define the system landscape and system domain.zip contains their own versions Goto SLD Administration and click on details to display the versions. XI.zip.4. CIMSAP. So it is recommended to have individual SLD for each landscape and communicate each other using data suppliers. All the systems to configure as backend for EP. Note: 1. Coke has their global presence through out the world which maintains multiple landscapes across the world. SINGLE SLD There will be only one SLD in the landscape which provides the complete information of systems in the landscape. It is possible to have more business systems from a single technical system. Downloads Tab > SAP Distribution Center >Downloads >Support Patches and Contents . It will be difficult to fetch the information of all the systems using single SLD. BI needs to be registered as Technical systems in SLD. 8.31 contains 382 Products and 2189 Software components. This is used in small mid sized companies where only one landscape is maintained. RFC and the Gateway) But business system is a technical system pointing to a business client. Used to define business systems (Business systems are associated systems that are used in XI Domain) (Technical system is a system which is pointed to Hostname. 2. P&G.

229 >My Company Application Component CIMSAP_CR > Import the file to this folder. Used to display the logs of a SLD runtime 3.ZIP. To display the SLD. SLD can be started and stopped using the option Administration. All the production systems in the landscape uses a different SLD called as ISLAND SLD. QAS and PRD. Production systems and they doesn't want the SLD to be shared between DEV. SLD Log 1. 3. It provides the log settings and filter 2. CIM and CR Content Profile It is used to set various parameters that are required by the SLD (Do not change the parameters during import. CR_CONTENT. It will not effect the operation of J2EE Engine. It is used for comparison with market place products. ISLAND SLD Companies may require Data security. export and backup) . CIMSAP. Export and Import logs 4.ZIP provides the product and software components versions that are released by SAP.

Backup (Copy of SLD Content) Export: It is similar to backup but versions are maintained between exports along with time stamp. Default trace should be false. TREX server. It contains only time stamp to differentiate between backups. . class name and the time interval. Also used to define associated systems in the XI-Domain.230 Eg: In a standalone J2ee installed reset the Data supplier parameter. Adapter Engine. Backup: It is used to take the backup of SLD content. gateway service. Gateway host. Content Maintenance: Used to define the role of systems in the landscape Eg: XI-Domain. System Message: SM069 SM02 Content: Import export backup. Import: Basically this is used to import the content that is delivered by SAP. Integration Repository. But we can also import the content that is exported earlier from the same SLD. Class Browser: It displays the class information of the CIM Model. Data Supplier: We can configure other SLD's in case if we are defining distributed SLD. Change Logs: Used to display the logs of content change based on user name. Note: ABAP should know which gateway it should be used. It provides the product and software component information along with systems that are configured on the SLD. Name Space: Used to define the namespace for developing the objects by default SLD/Active is provided.

0 vice versa because the complete DD and Repository is different. 21% + Country Taxes.2 Years The license is valid till 31. Different DB but same R/3 version with patch levels. From JAN 2009 maintenance certificate will be issued for every 3 months.7EE on ECC5. 19% and 7 Year and 8th Year with additional 2% i. The upgrade only upgrades data dictionary and repository objects. patches. The Hardware doesn't support the current load and users encounter-frequent bottle necks on memory CPU and storage.e.50 Lakhs 150 Users . license key. After 3 months it locks the SPAM. R/3 patch levels for homogenous. Upgrade never impacts on the DB Size.9999 SAP Supports support packages. Eg: R/3 4.231 26-Jul-09 UPGRADE MOTIVATION 1.e. notes.Heterogeneous.. runtime support.. upgrade.e. The same OS. DB.50 Lakhs + 10 Lakhs ----------. The product is out of maintenance and support. All of the above can be obtained by using suserid of the other company Maintenance optimizer is introduced to approve the patches related to our landscape. 17% 6 Year with additional 2% i.6C maintenance is expires on Dec 2005 Each SAP Product is supported based 5-1-2 i. Different OS. stacks.7 Enterprise edition normal maintenance ends in 2009 100 Users . .6C and below. 5 Years with normal maintenance fee i. developer keys etc. then the version is 4. SAP upgrade may involves O/S and database upgrade which drastically improves performance on the new hardware.e. If the DB Schema ID/ Owner is SAPR3. The additional fees are based on total cost + additional users 4. It is not possible to refresh database of 4. To get the enhanced features that are provided in the current release.12.

ECC5. Download upgrade master/ upgrade technical guide 2.0 If the DB Schema ID/ Owner is SAPSR3SHD then it is a shadow instance on NW7. 16.4 R/3 4. 14. Define the best strategy for upgrade (Downtime/ Resource) minimised 18.another instance.6c to ECC6. TP if required. 9.0 SR3 19. Do not skip any phase in prepare/ modify the logs manually.log for the prepare errors. DB should not be done at a time) Eg: WinNT Oracle 8i 4. Decision on Add-ons 11. 27-Jul-09 . R3TRANS.6c OS upgrade from NT to 2003/2008 Oracle 8i to 9. 17. 15. Perform Hardware sizing with expected growth of database for next 3 years. DB upgrades as well plan them accordingly/ separately (OS . SAPCAR. Download the software from Market place/ SWDC 6. Upgrade should be performed in the sequence of landscape. UPGRADE PLAN 1.0 SAPSR4 . Run the prepare well in advance. Verify the compatibility of OS/DB/SMP/PAM (Product Availability Matrix) 3.2. Upgrade key from solution manager and upgrade key from master note are required. Upgrade SAPUP. Decision on Languages 12. Download relevant JRE 7. Decision on support packages 10. Read the checks. Download upgrade notes and known problems 8.2 to 10. R/3. Unicode consumes atleast 40% more than the current system resources.0 If the DB Schema ID/ Owner is SAPSR3 then it is an ABAP system on NW7.0 If the DB Schema ID/ Owner is SAPSR3DB then it is JAVA sys on NW7. 5.7EE . 4. 13. Upgrade may involve OS. SPDD and SPAU correction needs to be handled.232 If the DB Schema ID/ Owner is SAP<SID> it is 4. The upgrade timelines should be calculated on the mock system with production data.0.

22.log Mount the upgrade master and execute prepare.server mode.. Running Prepare Prepare need to be executed and ensure that all the prepare phases are run successfully. VERTEX. Background Schedulers like TIDAL. It is used to run before upgrade ..) Accelerated Components (XI.PI.bat to create a directory and extract executables. Use that list to document the phases and to update the status to management and SAP.) All the components are priced based on business suite. BI. VIRSA. SR1 ->SR2 ->SR3 ->EHP1 ->EHP2 ->EHP3 Say for Eg: if a product costs 60 Lakhs 50% discount will be given by the SAP 30 Lakhs but the maintenance cost is calculated on the whole (60L) PREPARE Can run during production operations..0 from below versions 4. SCM... Use the following commands to start the server and GUI JAVA -cp<upgrade directory> \ua\ua. CONTROL IN etc... Document all the interfaces and 3rd party tools like IFS.233 20... A user created in component can access other components with same license key.. Development and Technical teams need to certify the upgrade before going live.6c MySAP (CRM. Prepare prepares the system for upgrade by checking all the pre-requisites and documents in checks. REDWOOD. MAESTRO. Prepare and upgrade phase list are provided with expected percentage of time. On UNIX we may need to create /usr/sap/put with SIDADM as the owner with atleast 10GB of space. SRM.jar NOTE: There is no upgrade to ECC6. So upgrade server needs to be started to run the upgrade assistant. Upgrade runs on client . 21..

Mount point of CD's (Upgrade master. Instance) are corrupted or not readable the PREPARE fails. Default.0 II.log OS. batch host (The instance that provides the background process). . kernel. It checks for the following OS Versions. kernel. DB versions. During initialization it checks for OS. \put directory is an upgrade directory. readability of profiles etc. Disk space. All the above phases can run individually or can run as a total. In the INPUT phase provide the following 1.234 I. Instance number. INITIALISATION PHASE Specify the parameter dir_put (put = \usr\sap\put) put directory is the upgrade directory which hosts exe. upgrade exports) From 4. Checks the connectivity with the DB. checks RFC connection using DDIC pwd and the client. upgrade languages. log etc. Profile paths \usr\sap\<sid>\sys\profile. INPUT PHASE It checks all the pre-requisites and writes into checks. DB Versions. Host name. DB upgrade.6c to ECC6. languages. Additional Hardware. Patches. File system. SAP<SID>. Eg: If profiles (Startup. checks for enough space in the put directory for import.

Checks the Archive directory (ORA-272. function modules etc. add on conflicts. kernel directory. (ORA-1653 & 54) Archieve Issues Ensure that all the prepare modules ran successfully to proceed for the upgrade. During the prepare phase we need to download the upgrade fix FIX. 1. It also checks for incomplete imports. INSTALLATION Provide the following details for upgrade shadow system.12500) . Add-ons in IS_SELECT phase and languages LANG_SELECT. port number. Instance number of shadow system.Free database size and recommends the tablespaces that needs to be extended. It performs a test import (DDIC Import) activation.There should not be any unreleased transport requests SPAD/ SPAU During the upgrade it only changes the SAP standard data structure like tables. Patch. profiles (\usr\sap\put). It checks for unreleased transports. Note: \usr\sap\put\log specifies the log files during the upgrade.The should not be any terminated/ Pending updates . . Stack etc. menus. ORA-255) .Checks the space in the upgrade directory . ORA-1632) . Customer might have changed the above objects by obtaining SSCR keys (SAP Software Change Registration) or they are upgraded by Note. distribution. IMPORT PHASE It performs extraction of release dependent data and the support package imports. Include support packages in the BIND_PATCH phase.Free extents in the tablespaces which needs to increase (ORA-1631. create DB_user for shadow instance. move name tabs and performs main import. conversion.235 III. language compatibility and database issues like table space over flow (ORA-1631 & 32). programs. .Checks the connectivity to the database (ORA . Support Package. IV. screens.SAR 28-Jul-09 PREPARE also checks the following .

com > My Profile > Single sign on for SAP Certificate 4. which can be included in the upgrade of other systems in the landscape. From service. Eg: Employee ID is 25 .log . domain and the dataelement).7C TO ECC6 SICK SE06 RZ10 System name : Can be find from RZ10 Stms Slicense (HW Key) E:\usr\sap\put\us> java -cp ua.sap. The SPAD & SPAU changes can be recorded in development system to change requests. 2.stores the installation time taken.jar UaServer to bring up the Upgrade (Assistant) Wizard From Menu Start > PREPARE . EMPID 25(INT) is changed into EMPID 50(INT) SPAU: for repository objects like (Reports. Screens. SAINT TABLE E070 UPGRADATION FROM 4. Programs RICEF) that is code which is written in ABAP is changed. SAPINST. TIPS 1.236 During the upgrade it prompts SPDD/ SPAU SPDD: for the data dictionary elements (like table. TABLE E070 . SDM. SPAM.jar UaServer us> java -cp uagui. 3.stores all the change requests.

Downtime minimised provides high availability to the system which is going to upgrade. CRT.237 Provide the following or follow the on screen for inputs Host : willsysdell User name : administrator Mount Points . R3TRANS should be capable of communicate with DB Libraries and update database. Add-ons.Provide SAP Components .Kernel . In order to apply them to a specific database and O/S TP. .R3 Trans] ------Communicates with DB Depends on OS TP Connects to the database using R3TRANS.upgrademaster\UMN Windows . DB Exports are OS/ DB independent.\upgrade\sap upgrade1\UPG1 . ACCTIT Large size tables COEP 29-Jul-09 [TP .Lang1 . R3Trans is capable of converting the DB specific data into OS independent/ DB independent cofiles/ datafiles That is why support packages. Notes.to UPG16 (TO car the sar files) (Support Packs) Sapcar -xvf *. After 14 days we need to obtain SCCR Keys Upgrade Process: We need to choose the strategy either downtime minimised or resource minimised.sar Usr\sap\trans\eps\in The standard objects should be corrected within 14days after an upgrade.to Lang6 .

tsk.log *. R3TRANS should be compatible with DB specific libraries to connect to DB for import. Note: No business data @ OS level or file system. *.Primary Key I .Index View. Structure .pfl TP initializes R3TRANS and writes all the jobs in TRBAT and TRJOB.toc *.str These all will be in the Task File STR files are provided by SAP (We can create STR Files during the exports) 1.238 TP.tsk *.ctf (Create Task File) R3load .cmd *. > tp connect DEV pf=E:\usr\sap\trans\bin\to_domain_dev.Data P .I/E *.data *.tpl *.bak T . RDDIMPDP. RDDNEWPP jobs should be scheduled in client 000 using user DDIC (DDIC should not be locked) RDD* Jobs are scheduled in the background which reads content from TRBAT and TRJOB and import into DB R3load .pfl To read parameters from tp_domain_<SID>.Table D .

DB export method Use option 4 only heterogeneous environment/ Unicode conversion Export the structure Import the structure Perform table splitting The above two options are used to handle large databases to perform parallel export and import. DEVELOPMENT INFRASTRUCTURE DI JDI is used to provide development of JAVA programs DI is an usage type which provides JAVA transport Management system (Change Management System) to move the developed objects in the landscape. DB Export . However DB export will be performed by option 3 only. Splitter 3. DB Export with DB specific method 4.. Programs/ Reports SE38 Domain Data element Tables Function Module Screens Menus SE11 SE37 SE51 SE41 .239 2. Experienced OS/ DB Consultants can trigger all the above at OS level using R/3 load..

ABAP Development is Central where as JAVA Development is Local. Data files. 6. 2. PI there is a locking system) 7. R3Trans to move the objects from DB to OS specific and vice versa. ABAP requires both compiler and Interpreter (F3 & F8) Save. Transport Requests will be in our scope 1. Change request of type Work Bench 2. TFDIR.240 Forms Transaction SE71 (Medruck) SE91 Note: Transaction is a logical entity (internally contains Programs/ Reports) [Prog/ Report] in pfcg role Cofiles. TRDIR. Data Inconsistency (In BI. Refer Table TADIR. ABAP uses client mechanism to differentiate customizing . 8. ABAP development consists of the same program with different versions from developers. ABAP development resides in the Database. 4. Customizing . ABAP requires SE38 transaction to perform development. ABAP Objects are consistent because the objects are locked by a developer while modifying the code while others can only display. No specific format for ABAP Programs. 3. DD02L. ABAP uses TP. Activate and Execute. 5.Table entries 30-Jul-09 1.

JAVA uses the entire system to differentiate customizing because JAVA does not have client customization.JAVA DEVELOPMENT INFRASTRUCTURE. *.Change management system 6. 9. 3. JAVA Programs are executable provided we have JRE 8.* Import java. ABAP uses transport routes/ Transport layers to transport the objects. JAVA development resides at file system. javac and java to save. 7. INSTALLATION . 2. JAVA 1.* Public static void Main() JDI .awt. 1. 10. ABAP are not executable outside the SAP environment. JAVA is Case Sensitive but ABAP is not case sensitive. JAVA requires JRE. compile and execute program 4. JAVA uses tracks to transport the objects. Eg JAVA program import java. ABAP uses transport routes/ transport layers to transport the object. JAVA uses CMS and four system landscape (At least 3 system landscape) CMS . JAVA can be programmed using any of the editor at file system. 10. It is an usage type provided by SAP to develop programs in-house for meeting the specific requirement.*. JAVA objects are defined based on product/ SWCV version (Software Component Version) that are defined in SLD. ABAP objects are defined in the custom name space 'Y' and 'Z'.241 9.net. JAVA uses SDM to move the object to the landscape 5.

NWDI Administrator JDI Administrator NWDI Developer JDI Developer Use url http://<hostname>:50000/devinf devinf : displays design time repository DTR The DTR provides central file and folder based on storage of source code. http://<hostname>:50000/nwa form tab Deploy and change option select scenario as DI from the Drop down. Consider the diagram .242 Select the usage type DI during the installation POST INSTALLATION. Select NWA to perform post installation activities. Execute. users require certain roles to work on CMS. It enables effective team work among developers distributed over different locations. NWDI_CMSADM NWDI_DEV NWDI_ADM These users are created during post installation to work on DI. Version histories and concurrent work on resources. Provide the passwords for the following system.

(usr\sap\trans : usr\sap\jtrans) Configure Check in > NEW Click on Landscape configuration to configure the JAVA system Landscape.243 Each Individual system is a DEV System but development is not done in the DEV system. Click on DOMAIN DATA and specify the following - . NWDS (Netweaver Developer Studio) In order to work with DI we need to be NWDI Administrator http://<hostname>:50000/devinf Click on Change Management service Configure check in so that the objects are checked in using the default directory. If any changes required it will be sent back to individual systems which is considered as Development.

PORT NUMBER 50018 & PWD.244 CMS Name CMS Desc CMS Url CMS User PWD Transport DIR Now under Domain Domain ID Domain Name Domain Desc Ext Servers SLD Url Save the domain. SAVE and Click on SAVE & RESTORE TRACK Track is used to define the path to move the objects. Track is mandatory to move the objects. Note:/ Mechanism: The Transport Mechanism performed by using SDM. CONS. In ABAP engine the objects are assigned to development class and development class is . HOST. PROD. (Generally domain will be development). Click on the Tab Runtime Systems Check the following options : Development. Consolidation. TEST. The objects are checked into DEV system using the credentials that are provided in runtime systems. Test and Production That needs to be configured as a system in the landscape Provide the details of each system as follows Specify SDM HOSTNAME SDM PORT NUM SDM PASSWORD J2EE Engine URL J2EE Engine User ********** http://willsys28:50000 DEV DEV DEB DEV DEMO http://willsys28:50000 NWDI_CMSADM ********* d:/usr/sap/trans/eps/incmswillsys28DEV : J2ee_Admin Select 4 systems in the landscape DEV. Developer uses developer studio to develop the programs upon successful completion they will check in the objects into \usr\sap\trans of domain.

Include SWCV defined in SLD Defining a Track From CMS Click on the Tab TRACK DATA Click on NEW Provide .Track Name DEMO .Track ID DEMO .245 assigned to a transport layer and layer is assigned to a transport group and subsequently assign the route to a system to define the landscape.Repository type DTR . : . In JAVA TRACK is equal to DEV CLASS and LAYER 1. Goto CMS define TRACK 3.Design time repository Design time repository is used to maintain the versions. Define software CV/ Product 2.Track Desc DEMO Design time Rep URL : http://willsys28:50000/dtr Comp build server URL: http://<hostname>:50000 SAVE DTR .

SAP components are installed on code page 1100 which supports English. transport mechanism to transport the objects.e.STMS EP .is deployed on portal so it uses transport of the packages.Multi display multiple processing. Define the tracks 4. all the products will be released on Unicode only.e. 1. Deploy service is provided in Visual Admin Tool to import the small objects. XI. German & Other languages. Define users and assign roles so that users can work on CMS Installation of NW Studio on developer PC's Note: Even though DI is introduced for transporting the objects EP. SAP from 2007 onwards implemented Unicode i. blended code page. If the customer is not satisfied with the Single code page then we need to install additional code pages i. MDMP . BI . Include the run time systems 5.Export Objects and Import Objects BI-JAVA .Transport of Packages (Export/ Import) PI/XI . There are around 3000 MDMP logon/ system_lang = EN .246 CBS . Move the objects between systems either manually or using DI 6. Eg. It is not possible to access the system in Chinese. MDMP has various issues during upgrade and migration.e. selected. 31-Jul-09 SINGLE CODE PAGE Each database supports various languages depending upon the code page i. software components and programs specific to industry requirements. BI has their own transport package.Component build service used to build the components Note: This DI Configuration is only required when there is a need to develop the products. Define the Domain 3. As a new consultant we need to perform the following. Define Product and software component version in SLD 2. Japanese and Korean etc using the same code page.

Export the database using Non-Unicode kernel. Executes the background jobs from the Unicode conversion 2. While exporting select Unicode(Little Endian or Big Endian) 4. Little Endian is used by Windows NT. It runs for hours 1. Big Endian stores the most significant byte in the smallest address. Zcsa/ system_language Abap/buffersize Unicode consumes 40% resources than a Non-Unicode system. Pooled and Cluster Tables) depending upon the size of the database. Install the system with option target system using Unicode kernel.247 Unicode supports all the languages because if it is installed on double byte code depending upon the language. It may take hours. Execute the transaction SPUMG and schedule the consistency check for all the tables (Transparent. 3. SUN SOLARIS and ISERIES. LINUX Big Endian is used by HPUNIX. SAP Note: 648016 Conversion to Unicode. .Multiple language with different code page. Specify the parallel process at least to increase speed depending upon the available resources. 5. Unicode to Non-Unicode is not possible Blended code page . Note: Without executing SPUMG Unicode conversion is not possible. * NUC to UC happens only during the Exports. Unicode is installed on code page 4101 or 4102 which depends on Endian [Little Or Big]. Pre-Requisites for Unicode From market place/Unicode (Unicode Media library) SPUMG: It checks for all the tables that needs to be converted to Unicode. AIX.

People centric. role based single point of access. SAP GUI. Web server GUI. 1. in the specific language to all the applications. Portal is meant for . Too many applications like ERP. Single interface with back end connectivity. IE etc. SCM. role based.e. SAP ERP. 4. Web browser 2. Mailbox. functional consultants and end users. Siebel. Less Productivity. WebTop i. Customers having applications like Microsoft. 3. web based. Lock of Interface and Integration. 2. File Browser. browser used to communicate without any GUI Installation. Oracle Apps. technical consultants. 5. Too many GUI's (Outlook Client. Customer needs multiple GUI to communicate with each of them. 4. language specific.) 3. It provides an interface to communicate with all the applications . Single sign on to communicate with all the applications. single point of access to all the applications. Motivation of Portal Portal provides a role based.to make effective use of JRE. Web Server.248 01-Aug-09 Current Environment Problem 1. Exchange Server. Domino Server. SAP Introduced Enterprise Portal to overcome the above issues. How to resolve? 1. File Server. Customer (SONY) should provide the feasibility to work from home for developers. It provides the following. 2. single point of access to applications. CRM. Too many passwords to remember. XI. Customer needs the people centric. Single point of access to all the applications. user based. SRM. SRM etc.

11. 16. No GUI is required (Browser serves the purpose) 5.249 3. SSO provides only authentication (Single Sign on) 6. 13. announcements' etc. 7. EP provides rooms. fonts and colors etc. ABAP engine user can use EP without any license. 10. over the web. SAP provides predefined content in the name of business packages which can be deployed by using JSPM. 17. vendors. favorites etc. quick poll. SAP provides administration environment for Monitoring. SAP provides development environment using visual composer which is a web based tool. 15. EP provides Interactive environment where logos. user forums. It provides self registration features for the guests. 12. suppliers. others customers communicate over the web. screens and desktops can be customized. managers. history of navigation. However authorizations needs to be maintained in the back end systems. news. EP Provides collaborative environment where employees. 8. Transportation etc. banners. Administration. . EP provides content management which is the part of Knowledge Management to access the documents from various repositories. 9. 14. It provides 20 Languages by default. User management. FAQ's. 4. chatting engine. It provides user friendly navigational features. Single sign on is configured to communicate with all applications. Its License cost is around 1/5th of the ABAP license cost and cost depends upon negotiation. It resides on the proven JAVA Engine there by using all the features of JAVA. It provides personalization to select our own themes.

It is used to calculate the hardware resources that are required by the selected application based on number of users. Users are categorized into 3 types 1. Dialogue steps 1.One dialogue step 3. Issuing SU01 Tcode . Selecting field . ABAP Users 1. Logging in .One dialogue step *ST03 Work load analysis We can find number of dialogue steps 2.250 INSTALLATION Similar to JAVA Engine we need BI functionality is required over web then Include BI-JAVA usage type. HARDWARE SIZING Sizing is an activity that is calculated over web using sizing tool provided by SAP. User creates 8 POs per day. But in general PO is created with 8 DS 96/8 = 12 PO's per day. Medium Users 3. Medium users 480-4800 Dialogue steps/ 40 Hrs 3. Medium Users Each DS = 40 *60*60/4800 = 30 Seconds I. High Users (concurrent users) 2. Low users 0-480 dialogue steps/ 40 hrs 2. 120 PO's per day .e.One dialogue step 2. High users 4800 to 144000 Dialogue steps / 40 hrs 480 dialogue steps = 40 * 60 * 60 seconds Each DS = 40*60*60/ 480 = 300 seconds Assuming each PO high volume consumes 12 dialogue steps. Low users Users are segregated based on the answer time between pages.

User SAP Proprietary tool (QUICK sizer) 02-Aug-09 SIZING Tools 1. EP. Cust info like contact no.e. medium. CPU could not arrive as a direct measurable unit like memory and Hard Disk which is independent of the Hardware vendor. Specify the customer number 2. 5. RAID. CPU systems of SAP (SAP APP) benchmark for performing standard It is calculated based on SD Module i. STANDBY Server. for every 2000 sales document that are created 100SAPS/ Hr Sales order contains more dialogue steps. XI) 6. SAP's is an unit to measure CPU. SUN has their own measurements for CPU calculation. Memory . Storage Capacity 1000 GB 3. CLUSTER. High Users Each DS = 40 * 60*60/ 14400 = 10 Seconds 360 PO's per day JAVA SIZING As it is web based the time taken to flip between pages is considered. Platform/ Hardware details like OS DB. Low Users Medium Users High Users Consumes 600 Seconds Consumes around 180 Seconds Consumes 30 Seconds. Country Name 4. Celeron and ) each processor has their own unit. Band width etc. Specify the component (Usage type BI. Vendor (Pentium. Specify the users low. Backup mirroring.251 3. SAP S is an understandable unit of hardware.32000 MB 4. CPUS specific to Hardware. HP. 800 SAP's are generated by I Series CPU (IBM) similarly DELL. high 7. Name the project 3. maid. Save and calculate the result Results provide the following 1. Hard ware details like CPU. Memory and Storage 2. Network Connectivity. Vendors to calculate the number of CPU's required. . Cytrix.

2. Database growth for the next three years 3.252 Ordering the Hardware Do not order the sizing output directly. Calculate the OS. you need to 1. Storage size should be net storage/ not gross storage. DB and other applications utilization. A company buys 10 HDD of 160GB Total 10 * 160 = 1600 (consider only 1400) Remaining will be for format etc. DUMPS and other software (One disk each) d) RAID one disk for parity (Hot swappable drive) 160 * 6 = 960 * 90/100 = 850 GB (NET STORAGE) . a) Space is reserved for firmware (10% of the disk) b) OS mirroring and Log Mirroring (One disk each) c) SWAP. Example.

BI_BASIS We can view these from System > Status POST INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES 1. It does not have any specific steps in NWA like BI. BASIS. SMS. If the component is SAP-APPL then its an ERP Component BPP-CRM CRM Component BICONT BI Component ABAP. . SAP_BW. Front end customization can be performed based on requirement. Most of the EP content is available through roles 5. Mail Server. 2. SRM and SCM) (Memory required at CPU Level) In Principle add 30-40% more the net calculation while calculating sizing for portal 1. Knowledge Management and Collaboration. EP by default cannot contain any business transactions. CRM. 4.It is a platform and we need to have an application installed on it. MI and SLD. The deployed business packages contains roles. Note: The purpose of JAVA standalone . Paging.253 Note: Consider the number of interfaces on the system (Job Scheduler. UME provides portal roles to access the EP content. 3. EP is an application that resides in JAVA Engine. The business packages need to be deployed to communicate with backend systems. XI. There is no single role which provide access to the entire content. The collaboration and KM features are available which needs activation/ enablement for access. CPU and memory are major bottle necks on the portal. webdynpro connections which needs to be configured. 8. 7. EP consists of portal. 6. Calculate the number of interfaces 2. BIW. KM repository & CM repository (Stores in the Portal) 3. PI.

Collaboration. JSPM. the same process is applicable startsap stopsap Portal logs (Config tool.) Portal User Management JAVA UME is used for user management. SDM. Visual composer for development etc. Navigational Elements 1.) http://<hostname>:50000/irj (integrated run time java) PORTAL DESKTOP/ HOME PAGE SAP provides default desktop for the portal which can be customized. EP. Portal Security Portal roles are available to access the portal content. The portal desktop elements are the following 1. EPCore. Header Area 2. Portal utilizes the J2EE engine runtime along with deployed portal applications (BI. VA tool. RTC Real time Collaboration. NWA Tool for monitoring. Header Area a) Mast Head . Content Area 3. Portal is accessed by using URL http://<hostname>:50000/irj 03-Aug-09 Starting and stopping EP As portal is installed on JAVA Engine.254 9. Telnet tool. Visual Composer. Memory Usage Memory concept is as same as JAVA stack. KM. Content Management.

Save favorites detailed navigation. Content Area It is used to display the content and it will be around 2/3 of the page. c) Top level navigation The third and fourth strip on the page TLN is a role based and tab strips are displayed based on assigned roles. They resides on the LHS to the page. Eg: Home ----. BROWN 3.255 It is the first strip on the page. It contains collaboration. b) Tool Area It is the second strip on the page.Third strip contains company. Navigational Elements It is used to provide various navigational elements. SAP provides various themes to customize the desktops. PORTAL DESKTOP It is default desktop that is provided by SAP. Third strip contains the header and fourth strip contains detailed actions under that role. home. It contains salutation. LOGO. team documents and portal information on the fourth strip. work. logoff. 3. It provides an option to save the screen as favorite. SAP best practices provides 3 Three themes 1. BLUE . banner. search and advanced search collaboration need to be enabled. history of pages navigated and flexibility to move forward and back. 2. personalize and SAP logo. Personalization is only available when EU_ROLE is assigned. RED 2. We can change banner and logo. salutation can be customized. d) Page title bar The fifth strip on the page and it contains page title. SAP also provides theme editor to create and edit the themes.

Developing pages internally for training. export and edit themes Goto Themes import > specify the path and import the theme into the portal. ABAP engine) Installation and Post Installation Activities/ -----Install Portal Apply patches. -----TASKS . personal. content management etc) Working with user management (LDAP.Developing the pages for E-Filing Tax returns.Screen desktop.Single sign on Deploying business packages Patches Establishing connectivity to backend systems. logos. common folders and Taxonomy (displaying in a structure) 4. MSS and XMII Customize portal. PORTAL ACTIVITIES 1. Development .256 Goto System Administration > Portal display > Theme Editor Theme editor provides options to create. Public. MSS and XMII configuration (Manufacturing Integration and Intelligence) Defining roles and User assignment Enabling various functionality of portal like (Personalization. banners.. branching and Images etc. Administration . Customization 3... .. Goto Theme Editor and select a theme ..Knowledge management from various repositories. Change the theme according to the requirement. Content Manager . 18 patch Deploy ESS. save it as a new theme and customize accordingly. import. Dealer management. ESS.. collaboration. RTC... login screen. Update etc. 2.

Netweaver 04 Installation (based on 640) 1. SR3 EHP4. SAP provides MDM where the synchronization starts from MDM to all the systems i.0) All these components need to be maintained customer.0. CRM7. SRM7. Motivation for portal. 04-Aug-09 SAP Netweaver certification books (TEP10_1.e.257 List down the JAVA Activities List down the SOLMAN Activities What is the purpose of DI? Explain the process of upgrade (326) include prepare Explain HW sizing Explain the functionality of Market place with respect to customer environment.0 (SCM7. ECC6. material master records in various systems and synchronization is becoming difficult. TEP10_2) MDM: SAP introduced MySAPBusiness suite 7.0. KM 3. vendor. JAVA Engine 2. supplier. one Master data for all the systems Note: Web dispatcher identifies the least loaded ICM when going for BSP . Collaboration.0.

258 Note: Central Services Instance Central Instance Dialogue Instance --------.Rough ---------Refer ST07 UME . User Groups Roles Tcode: SUGR Authorization > transfer > change Authorization of Group check S_USR_GRP --------------------------------05-Aug-09 .User Management Engine Note: If SAP * is enabled we cannot login with the other users.

User Mapping: (Remote Iviews) While accessing the data remote systems specify the userid authorized in the backend systems. Work Protect Mode: This option is used to set the work protect mode i.259 ENTERPRISE PORTAL PERSONALIZATION It is used to setup the portal desktop along with specified language. TCODE: SU2. Eg: Users uses standard HR user to get the HR related information from the back end. Enabling Collaboration Option Http://<hostname>:50000/irj Click on content administration> Portal Content > Portal users > Standard Portal Users > Open default Frame work page Check . Every user needs EU_ROLE (Standard End user role) which can be customized according to the requirements. SU3 authorizations required for that user.e. Fonts. Due to the performance issue on the web the personalization is restricted to change the password and contact info only. Under "Personalization Tab" Portal Theme: It is used to change your portal desktop. Add the role to the end user group and assign the group to every user.Tool Area . address and organizational elements. when a user partially entered data in the screen while navigating away from that screen it should prompt whether to save changes or open up a new window or discard the changes or save the data. contact info.open . On a standalone JAVA change password is also provided. themes and manage personal data.objects Select tool area > open + Enable collaboration launch pad (CLP) Set YES . User Profile: It is used to change the general information like email-id.

Instant messages.260 Enable RTC Real Time Collaboration Set YES SAVE. Select the template . monitor the tasks etc.willsys. 06-Aug-09 DEFINING SYSTEM Each back end system needs to be defined as a system in the Portal. Click on the Tab System Administration . It is also used to move the objects based on the folder name. Select the folder > Rt click> and select create "New system from template (new system from portal achieve) par file. Unlock the object System Administration.Specify the system name: ERP . System Definition 1.i. 5. 3.System Landscape . Login to the Portal 2. Select SAP with dedicated application --> Next .net) .System ID Prefix EWD (System should have atleast two dots like com. Home > Documents Collaboration is used to provide various options to communicate with employees. create tasks. sending email.saperp.System ID: EWD . .e.SAP with dedicated application server/ load balancing when more than one instance is available.Portal content > Rt Click > Create new folder to identify our objects (Your custom portal content).System Configuration . 4.com or EWD. assign the tasks. logon load balancing is configured in SMLG/ RFC server groups configured in RZ12.

Click on next .Specify description [ ERP system as a backend system ] .Open the object for describing the backend details and specify application host [Willerpdev] gateway host [ ] gateway services [ ] sapgw00 SAP Client Client 800 Port 3200 System type SAP_R3 Save.261 6. Aliases is a pointer to the backend system. . THERE ARE 3 SYSTEM TYPES 1. SAP_BW 3.Close System aliases is a name that will be used while defining the portal content objects. User] [Save] Display System Alias Add Alias name: BAS Save .Finish SAVE . SAP_R3 2. When the content is defined like ESS and MSS they will use alias name which intern points to the real system. SRM can be considered as R3 systems Now > GOTO property type : [ User Management] Select type : [SAP Log on Client] Logon Method: UIDPW Mapping type [ Admin. The real system will be customer system. Select the language . The alias name will be unique through out the landscape.EN . SAP_CRM Note: Supply chain management (SCM).

Iviews are created as an copy or as an delta link.. Browse > Select Folder > Rt Click >Create > New Iview. The properties are inherited from the Master template only. PCD is the portal content database which are in the directory structure i. pages.saperp. Select Iview template. webgui.. Portal content contains the following iviews. MSS configuration ---07-Aug-09 PORTAL CONTENT DIRECTORY .. FINISH.... It is displayed in the content area. specify the iview name For Eg: Name . ---Portal + ERP ESS.net Select the GUI type > Next> select the system ERP .. Iviews are pointed to an alias > Rt click the Iviews and preview. url etc.262 Defining the portal Content Portal content provides the data that needs to be displayed over the portal. Using delta link the properties are inherited from linked iview and master (template) iview.. portal content directory.e. not from the copied iview. Portal content is built using templates and delta links. worksets and roles GOTO > Content administration Portal Content Select the folder that is created above > Rt click the folder to create PCD objects..Monitor Specify the prefix Custom mon. Iviews are defined from a portal template when we copy from an iview it is completely copied pointing to the template. layouts. Iview can be SAP transaction. IVIEW: It provides an internet view to the content.

There are locate name prefix which is displayed in Quick Info. Select the iview and paste same. Create System 2. pages. 3.) Transaction Iview > Next > Select the system [ALIAS] > FINISH > select the iview and preview. so you need to create alias one again.263 Enterprise port contains predefined content that is available through PCD. SAP also recommends to use the predefined prefix to identify the objects uniquely. * Portal provides user based. (Portal Content Database/ Directory). Now Goto > System Administrator > Support > Sap Application > Select type > Transaction > RUN Now Goto your Folder > select RC > IVIEW > (. . Copy copies the content without any references. role based and secure interactive content. worksets and roles. views. System Administration> System Configuration > System Landscape Select the System Landscape > Right hand side corner click to add to favorites. 1. Provide an user mapping ID in user admin to access the content without userid and password. Once you add it refresh it till you get in under portal favorites. Goto > Content Admin > Portal Content > Select the folder and create the respective content. ADD SYSTEM LANDSCAPE TO FAVORITES. DEFINING THE CONTENT. PCD contains folders. Goto User Admin Tab > Identity Management > Add Identity Search name: ABAP J2ee_Admin Hit modify Goto User Mapping for system access > System : Your Back End System Eg: NW6 Userid : Superuser Passwd: Admin123 Note: When you copy the system to the FOLDER the alias will not be copied.

role defines a group of activity and mostly a position in a company. role.) Role needs to be assigned to the user. 5. After Import > Goto Content Administration > Portal Content > Content provided by SAP > Specialist > Here you will find all the roles and iviews.) Default page > Next > light : 2 Columns > ADD > T-Layout > Next > Finish.Enterprise Portal Archive.Back end system user and Password. Now Goto > Identity Management > Find out the user J2EE_Admin > Goto > User Mapping for source system tab > Give the mapping users & password > Mapping user id sapuser -. Server which reads from directory D:\usr\sap\nw\sys\global\pcd\import. documentation. PAGE : Select the Folder > RC > page > give the details > Next (. EPA . From Client 2.Best Practices) System Administration > Transport > Transport of Packages > Import.264 4. (. Download the content from Market Place 2. BP Best Practices provide predefined content. Importing Packages. roles. DEPLOYING ESS/MSS AND XMII 1. Delta link also copies but with reference & inheritance. Page define the layout. (BP . Select the Iview > RC > Add to page. > Give the path > Select Import. User JSPM to deploy . Similarly define page. Copy it into usr\sap\trans\eps\in 3. Now Goto > User Administration > Identity Management > Select the user J2EE_ADMIN > modify > Assign role called Finance Manager select Finance manager ADD similarly add material manager. Now Goto > System Configuration > System Landscape > Assign the alias name as SAP_R3_BP > SAVE. worksets. users to implement in the landscape with high productivity. It provides two options. 1. worksets define the activity.

What is the significance of BP/ 12. Standalone. How the user request is handled in portal when compared to ABAP request? 9. What is webdynpro (JCO Destinations) in portal? 29. CON. What is the significance of NWA Tool? 30. server. What is the difference between Knowledge Management & Collaboration? 14. Explain Portal branding techniques (Logo Banner etc) 24. How did you configure UME in the portal? Explain with steps? Expected user store in Visual Admin. What is the difference between config tool and visual admin tool? 7. What is the significance of SLD in Portal? 28. (Java Connector) 08-Aug-09 Questions PORTAL 1. 5. single sign on et. pages. Explain the significance of JAVA startup (Jcontrol. template. Explain the directory structure (VA. Shell Console. What are the various patches that you have deployed? 11. What is SSO and how did you configure between ERP & Portal? 18. How they are calculated? 19. What are the post Installation activities for Portal? 5. What is the significance of the portal number. Define the webdynpro connections. My Portal could not be started? How do you start and where do you start from? What are the developer traces? 22. How did you perform Sizing? 3. Config Tool. cluster. How do you install Portal? OS and DB? 2. Bootstrap. What are the various tolls available to work on Portal? 6. ABAP 13. worksets.265 4. What is meant by system alias and how do you create systems in portal? 27. What is meant by personalization? 15. What are the various mechanisms for fine tuning portal? 17. How security is controlled in Portal? 26. 25. What is portal content views. What is the significance of memory in JVM. Check the dependencies before deployment.) 21. Jlaunch) 23. boot strap. How do you transport packages (Export and Import) in portal? . How do you configure them? Explain the ratio between them? 20. dispatcher. roles. Name the significance of Services and Managers? Explain some of them? 8. LDAP. global config directory etc. Backend system is recognised only when it is configured in SLD to create JCO. aliases. What is SDM & JSPM and explain the difference between them? Which one of them are consistent and why? 10. groups etc. What is ESS and MSS and how do you configure them? 16. What are the factors considering Sizing? 4. 6. log.

It can contain iview. 34. groups or roles. What is the purpose of Portal? Explain few differences when compared to ERP Engine? A. components and services to portal users. All the above can be assigned as a copy or as a Delta link.266 31. Role: It is a synonym of a position. user role) No user gets access to the portal content without defining permissions. It can contain iviews. How documents are stored in Portal? How do you create documents? 36. How do you configure BI in portal? Explain the steps? 32. SAP Provides transport of packages option to include the content in the package and transport. Goto > Permissions Editor (System Administrator Tab) Select enduser role. Import and Export: The developed content can be exported to global directory to transport to other systems. News. Favorites.epa (Enterprise Portal Archives) Permissions Editor : Used to assign the permissions to the content. Roles are assigned to users and groups. 09-Aug-09 . workset and role. Forums. page. Page. What is Visual Composer? Adobe SVG Viewer? Iview . Allows us to set authorization permissions on portal objects. Portal lies in JAVA Engine where as ERP lies on ABAP engine. Client : Path Server The extension is *.Internet View which displays the content. Note: Iviews cannot contain anything Workset: It is used to display an activity. How do you work with Quick Poll. pages and a workset. Rooms? 37. How do you monitor the portal? What are the various tools available? 35. It is recommended to use delta link because inheritance from parent to child exists in Delta link.Page is a layout to store and display the iview. Role assigner (Include it for a group. To use portal we need only internet explorer where as for ERP we need SAP GUI. How do you configure CRM in the portal? Explain the steps? 33. Page can contain page and iviews.

10 when is it upgraded where as it comes 7. MSS. .02. SDM is also used for undeployment which is a great disadvantage/ because of dependencies may not work. EHP2. JSPM .Enterprise services repository. Deploying Business Packages SAP Provides predefined packages that contains views.0.267 SDM .When the BP is deployed the predefined content is also deployed as well.10 PI.10 and BW3. user mapping or Single sign on etc. Webdynpros etc.select the business packages & select the system in the system landscape if NWDI is in place.01. Identifying the Patches. . It is discontinued from Version 7.bat . roles. . PCUI needs to be downloaded from the market place.Deploy the packages.Copy the content to usr\sap\trans\eps\in. 4) when EHP is applied.0 to PI7.04 (EHP1. 3. .10 . ESS.SOFTWARE DEPLOYMENT MANAGER It is used to deploy the patches up to version NW7. BI are available Eg: XI3. support stacks and business packages. We need to import the package and define the JCO connections.0/ NW640 becomes NW7. 1.5 to BI7.SDM uses port 50018 and password to deploy the packages.10 Note: NW7. .On 7.start JSPM using go. 7. ESS/ MSS package is required to get the portal content. pages. 7.JAVA SUPPORT PACK MANAGER Used to deploy the patches/ support packages. 3. 4 associated patches. 7. PCUI (People Centric user interface) need to be deployed to get the interface in the Portal. .03. JCO Connections. BP ERP is required to deploy ESS/ MSS 2. JSPM reads from EPS\IN where as SDM needs to be feeded with the path ESR . If DI is not configured then select no NWDI control. worksets.

Eg. personalized. people centric. the request should go to the backend ERP system. End user etc) Assign the roles to users and ensure that the respective tabs are displayed. User sends a request to modify the leave request. Single sign on provides an access to all the back end systems without any password. The logon ticket is send through the request and gets authenticated on the back end system.268 . SINGLE SIGN ON The portal is role based.Goto Webdynpro (in Content Administration Tab) . The user login to the Portal 2. Meta Data/ Dictionary Data Connection should be created using logon load balancing. 3. SSSO cannot provide Authorizations. it provides only authentication. . PWD) and user is issued with a logon ticket. SAP_TRAVEL_METADATA: SAP_TRAVEL.select the JCO connection and Create There are 2 types of JCO's Application Path Connection should be created using dedicated application server. Define the permissions for the deployed content. Predefined roles are available only we need to set the permissions (Role owner. The logon ticket is stored as a non-persistent cookie on the browser and valid till the browser is closed or logoff. language specific. 4. The user credentials are authenticated (UID. Application data should be created using a dedicated Application server. Test the connection Refer to ESS/ MSS documentation and create systems and aliases accordingly. Mechanism: 1. web based interface to the users. user based.

JCORFC provider service) 2. SU01 .To transfer the data or client copy with in the system or local clients in the system 2. Dialogue User. Reference Users . Create RFC's in BW and EP using program id (SM59. 4. Create BW system in EP 5. login is possible. CONFIGURING SSO EP to BW 1. digital signature. Export the certificate in STRUSTSS02 and import the certificate in EP Key store administration.Under Role tab.269 5. 5. Execute RSPOSRT. authentication scheme. When the user is absent the reference of the other user will take care. 6. PWD doesn't expires. SU01 Types of users 1. 3. Perform user mapping. Configure SLD RZ70 . Similarly export from keystore admin and import in STRUSTSS02. Maintain the portal setting in RSPOR_T_PORTAL in SM30 back end systems 3. date of expiry. we need to setup single sign on parameters from RZ10. issues. information about the issuing system. STRUSTSS02 1. Production target/ bonus. JCO. System User . pages and worksets. 7. In order to setup SSO. Communication User: To transfer the data from one system to another system. The login ticket does not contain passwords. Service User: Is also called as reporting user. 10-Aug-09 DEPLOYING MSS/ ESS Deploy using JSPM: The content deployed contains predefined roles. The backend system will provide authorization to modify the leave request. 4.To Provide additional rights to the user. 6. It contains userid. like RFC users.Repopulate info to SLD .

role assigner. sets. The mapped user should have a valid employee ID which can be assigned in Transactional HRUser.Users ----. Role . The Data access is controlled in the backend engine. Role assigners and administrators. Regarding Permissions> System Administration > Employee Self Permissions > Permissions Permissions > 1.users ---.to behave as owner.Group of users . role or a group. end user. read only. Iviews.Directly to behave as owner.Assigned with roles Note: Even though roles are defined on portal they are used to only to control the access to tabs.Role. . end user.to behave as owner. Content -------. read only. role assigner. pages. The Content can be administrated by using a user. read only. Groups . Content --------. Each Portal Content is assigned with a role 2. end user. role assigner.270 The user from Enterprise portal communicates with backend system using mapped user. The roles are controlled by assigning them to end user.Roles ---. Content Assignment to group -----.

271 11-Aug-09 NO CLASS 12-Aug-09 * SU01 users should belongs to ESSGroup .

There will be a SMTP server built-in.272 Collaboration: Enable the collaboration launch pad/ real time collaboration From Content Administration Using default framework page >Open > Rt side select > Enable the collaboration > SAVE Restart the engine Collaboration provides the following . 3. It can also be server as Intranet portal for the larger companies. Collaboration brings the integration between people and provides all the features which are available with yahoo. 2. Contracts Management (Add. . meeting invitation etc. JSPM or SDM . Create tasks to the subordinates and check the status of update from time to time.For Knowledge Management JAR files. Favorites etc. We can check the users availability to send email. Note: Portal provides runtime for any kind of JAVA or Webdynpro ESS/ MSS . Edit) 4. Google etc. COLLABORATION It is available by default when the portal is installed. 13-Aug-09 What are entry points? Entry points are those in the home page of the portal like public documents.Webdynpro is deployed through.Send email Collaboration means communication between people. Delete. Folders.Show the status of the users . Instant Messaging to the users who are logged on to the portal. Collaboration provides the following : Work : 1.

We need to configure rooms before we work with teans. If you click on physics you need to get statics and dynamics. 3. Group ware transport are used to configure the Microsoft exchange server. Http://<hostname>:50000/ user admin Identity Management LDAP Server. chemistry. Common Folders: It is used by a team or group to store the documents between them. Favorites: It is used to store the accessed in links/ documents and provide navigation in one step. Teams: It is used to collaborate between group of people. SAP also uses TREX to search and classify the information. Goto > Content Admin > Collaboration Content > Room Creation (in Right Hand Side) Give the description and details > Hit Next > Add User > Finish. 1. Recently used: It provides the list of documents that are recently accessed. 2. 5. Click on NEW > Provide the user logon domain. It provides 6 entries. Lotus domino server or any other mail servers. The information is fetched and organized by topic. Eg: Science/ Physics. Taxonomies: It is used to organize the date in categories. TCODE: SCOT to configure mail server in SAP. Personal Documents: We can store our personal documents and can display from any part of the world provided access to portal is available. 4. Note: All collaborative activities using system administration > System Configuration > Collaboration in RHS and click on group ware transport. biology.273 Navigation: Home > Work > Documents etc. Here we can create the documents. . Documents: Home > Documents SAP provides entry points to store and access the documents. Now click on Enter Room http://<hostname>:50000/irj Content Management .Quick Poll Administration.

customers and business process owners) .Password rest. assigning to a group and group assignment to users. Content Manager role to change the NEWS.Rare Job (Sys Admin ----System Config) Apply support packages/ business packages etc.Portal Users . Portal ---.Request Overview. Goto Security Provider service and monitor the user sessions and if we require to terminate we can terminate the session upon approval. Customization. System Administration . JSPM we can jump from 6 to 9 Directly where as in SPAM we need to follow sequence. using JSPM and update Kernel. Webdynpros mainly transported using JDI. . JSPM is cumulative/ growing and SPAM is incremental.Users are created in ADS (Active Directory Server) ---> Populate What is the difference between JSPM and SPAM? SPAM is for ABAP and JSPM is for JAVA. QUICK POLLS etc. MM group etc) Understanding the user and security mechanism. employees. .Assign Portal Roles ---.ensure backend system mapper user (Service User) has relevant authorizations. Portal Thread Weaver is a monitoring toll. It is always advised to terminate the user session instead of terminating the locks. User creation. It can be enterprise portal archive or webdynpros. Modifying the system IP Address (Host Name) in systems if required --. vendors. defining roles based on content. (like SD group.Monitoring . Releasing the object locks similar to SM12 approval is required.User Mapping --. Monitoring the user load on the system. (Use transport studio to transport objects or SDM to deploy them manually) User management (End user requests from suppliers.000 portal users will be maintained by using user groups. Eg: A company with 30. Role Assignment(in portal and backend system). https://<hostname>:50000/irj. user mapping.274 14-Aug-09 PORTAL DAY TO DAY ACTIVITIES Transportation of Portal Content Objects. We can download from Market place and apply. FAQS.

Request. Userid etc. We can recreate the index by using BRTOOLS also. We need to work with JVM and their Patches 4. 1. It contains time because the database engine is a backend system. 8. We can display the content based on search criteria like duration.. We need to work with Browser IE/ Mozilla Patches 5. If the calls are more and response time is high we may consider deploying of a proxy server. CPU time more than 40 to 60% of the response time then consider CPU is expensive.275 Monitoring content overviews . It is used to identify the expensive users at that point of time. We need to work with OS and their Patches 2. total number of calls.200 6 -----. Fine Tuning the Portal.Content Overview Identify the component which consumes more gross time.Monitoring .It is used to display the components that are accessed. of Calls etc.1000 5 -----. Each component should not consume more than 2 Seconds on all average. CPU time and No. We need to work with Backend systems. 6.10000 2 -----. We need to work with DB and their Patches 3. SGEN.. Component.200 As the calls are more Response time will come down Request overview provides the user and component accessed along with CPU time and duration. DB Statistics. We need to work with Iviews 7. System Administration . User uses only CPU and Memory of the portal to get the content displayed. We need to work with Cache Note: Tune Performance of Enterprise Portal . Request summary is used to identify the CPU time.e... Server Procurements is not as per Hardware Sizing .Search in Google. it is running expensive Iviews (Embedded Iviews).2000 3 -----. i..2000 4 -----. ST04 > DB Buffer init ratio DB02> Missing index. find out the missing index and recreate. Average response time. Missing Index and buffers are small.. 1------.

(In Netweaver 7. 3. 7. Decision Making System 3. SAP_BW) comes by default. 2. Web Broadcasting 5. Dash Boards etc. Roles etc. Configure Thread Manager in Config Tool. 15-Aug-09 BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE/ BUSINESS WAREHOUSE / BUSINESS INFORMATION WARE HOUSING Versions 3.0 3. Pie diagrams. BIW From WEBAS 640 it is by default available with the Platform i.1C are the Basis versions . Archiving system (Date from legacy systems is achieved into BI Systems. Line Charts and graphical representation . Thread Manager assigns the request to server process 5. 8. Eg. Never exceed 80 to 85% of CPU load for extended period of time on ABAP 70% 10. Requests are handled by server socket queue of http provider services. Compare the date that is available in market DUN & BRAND street to define the competitive reports.276 9. SAP_BASIS.1 3. 1. Thread managers are used to serve the user requests... Request is handled by dispatcher and assigns to Thread Manager 4. 4. Business Cockpit (In BI7) New 6. ECC/ ERP system is consuming more time to run the background jobs. BI is used to run those reports with out effecting the performance. User Submit the request. Graphical Representation with help of BO (Business Objects). Analytical Reports 2. What does BI do? .e. Reporting system to run the heavy background jobs. Bar Charts.000 as per the Industry standards. When ABAP is installed (SAP-ABAP. So. SAP Provides BI_CONT (BI Content) which contains predefined info cubes. Threads min is 500 and Max is 10..0 It became a part of architecture with Information Integration) Motivation 1. Server process assigns the request to Application Thread Manager So we have enough threads to process the user request.

XCelsius can also be used to fetch the reports from BI system. The data can be a master data with transaction data The report fetches data from various data sources so more memory and more BTC work process are required. Set up the Master client in table RSADMINA --. Small tables are grouped in to (DeNormalization) Big Tables.03 (Deploy atleast 703 because upto 702 are out of maintenance) current is 710. Download the BI-Cont and deploy through SAINT (SE06.BWMANDT = 1 save. Establish connection between ERP and BI system . BI Communicates with various backend systems (ERP. 2. Select the usage type ABAP for a normal BI system. STMS etc) other wise SAINT wont work. It becomes intelligent by deploying the business content through SAINT.csv. 7.RSADMINA .goto SE12 Specify the table --. 8. Define logical system to client (BI uses ALE Mechanism to transfer data from ERP to BI) so the communication happens between logical systems only. BW User = BW user 6. Installation of BI System 1. The Data is not eligible for fro updates. Flat files (*. *. If BI Portal along with webdynpro development then select DI as well. 7.xls. These tables are used to define various reports as per customer requirements. Crystal reports.Change . CRM etc) and fetch the data into FACT and Dimension Tables. 5.txt. Normalization is a process of splitting up the larger tables into small tables upto sixth normal form to have the granular information and establishing the key relationship between tables.277 BI is an SAP ABAP application system with platform ABAP. Front end can be BEX or an Enterprise portal.specify the field MANDT = <CLIENT> SE11 . If BI Portal is required then select ABAP-JAVA-BIJAVA-EPCORE-EP 3. *. Initialize RSA1 to replicate and activate the BI System. 4. Now it supports XML files through PI BI is an Analytical system it is based on OLAP Technology (Online Analytical Processing).

com/ SWDC .Add to download basket & Download BIADMIN also from the Market place.NO CLASS ----------17-Aug-09 DOWNLOAD BI CONTENT www.sca format) Now goto JSPM & initiate go. Now Under system administration > Monitoring > you will find Business Intelligence .service.> Select -> Download Once downloading copy it to usr\sap\trans\eps\in (It is in . RSA1 > Goto Source systems Select SAP > Create RFC Connection Available destination: DEVCLNT001 SID: DEV Sys No: 00 Users ALEREMOTE. Check test and activate the connection. RSPOR_SETUP is a program (BI and EP) Maintain settings for Integration into SAP EP.bat Select business package -> Next > SAP BI/ ADMIN (next) . BWUSER are created with password provided. Once deployed goto > /irj > User Administration > Identity Management > Find the user > Modify > Assign roles > Search for "BI Administrator" role > Add > SAVE.sap.sap software distribution center .downloads .BI Content 7. With this we can admin BI System through Portal. ST03 .My SAP Application Components .278 9.Deploy will be finished. BI ADMIN is a business package provided by SAP BPBI Administration .Installation & Upgrade . RZ20 . 16-Aug-09 --------.03 around 500 MB Select download .downloads .

1. It is a web based BI Admin Tool introduced in Netweaver 7. Analyzer. EP. 4. Click on new entries. Activate the content by using SAINT 6.0 2. Perform other post installation activities like (SE06. BI-JAVA. BI-JAVA functionality is required. 2. 3. Execute > Setup call to BI Admin cockpit. STMS. Broad Caster can be used over the web. Easy Administration for Complex BW's Navigation Goto > SPRO Why do we need EP for BI Administration? 1. JAVA. For WEB Monitoring using Business Packages 2. Reporting retrieval settings > Overview Integration into Portal. SMLT. Implement Usage of BIADMIN cockpit.279 RSC_COl is a background job runs to pump the date to ST03 MONI is the table from here the data will be read by the above Job. SMLG. 7. a backend system in TCode RSA1 8. BI Integrated planning that is modeling can be performed over the web. We can perform Technical . Define Master Client in RSADMINA Table. Business Explorer. Now goto> SPRO > SAP IMG Reference SAP Netweaver > Business Intelligence > General BI Settings Setting for Administration Cockpit. Modeling & Administration etc. Define source system i. Installation of ABAP System. Download BI Content from Market Place 5. . Download the BP[BI ADMINA] from Market place copy it to \usr\sap\trans\eps\in directory Use JSPM to deploy the Business Package [BI ADMIN] BI ADMIN COCKPIT 1. SR13. Installation of ABAP. EPCore when EP. Assign the roles to users in the Enterprise portal. 3. Backup.e. Standard Job Scheduling (SE36) and DB13 etc.

BI_JAVA. Note: Logical system names are required to change only during system copy. 18-Aug-09 SARA : Tables and Archiving objects TDM_365_BW : BW Security .. Define SAP_BW as a system and create alias.. To perform this we need to go with BDLS and change LSN RSPOR_SETUP (SA38) is a report specify the steps that needs to be followed to integrate BI with JAVA Engine./irj > Content Administration > Webdynpro > Maintain JCO RFC. Instead use BDLS to change the logical system.. After performing system copy in the landscape we need to change the logical system name. /nwa RSPOR_SETUP (SA38) SPRO in BI System Or manually in BI System.. BI Intelligence. Define JCO Destinations in webdynpro (Four Connections 2 Metadata and 2 Applications) Goto . Note: Don't change logical systems name once they are assigned to client. BI Explorer.280 The roles are : BI Administration. Define the Integration between portal and BI Engine (Reporting Setting) in SPRO Use NWA toll to perform. post installation activities. System Copy in Landscape The above figure shows it is a system copy in the landscape. You cal do it by using NWA ..

is the prefix for all reports. composite roles etc.281 BI SECURITY 1. New Security Features 2. SU21. authorization classes. roles. Netweaver onwards the above transaction is obsolete. activities. authorization profiles.0 the RSSM. Info cube Sub object SAP Provided RSSM and RSSMTRACE upto 3. Now it is RSECADMIN. menus. The area that differs is to protect the info objects at field level. .e. authorization objects. SU25 with authorization field. Web tools for modeling. .Info Area.0 Eg: To Create custom authorization object we use SU21 in R/3 where as in BW(BI) we use RSECADMIN. Info Provider. favorites. S_RS_COMP . Info Cube. Solution Manager is a CRM System. development. S_RS_COMP1 . administration and deployment BI Security is similar to R/3 Security which consists of SU20. reporting component.Reporting component.Info Area. user comparison.5 i. user assignments. composite profiles. RSR and RS . RSSMTRACE.In BW3. BI System & Solution Manager System. From BW3. SU22. SAP Provides around 20 authorization objects which are required for reporting administration.1c version of BW. RSSMQ has been moved to RSECADMIN in Netweaver 7. Qry Owner S_RS_LCUBE . If you install Solman we will get all the above components.

Goto > RSA1 .Select Info Objects .Create Zrole ... SP01. objects .Select the char which is in authorization relevant.Info Object RSA1 is the TCode which is used to activate the content and replicate the content.. . TRANSPORTATION OF OBJECTS In RSA1 define the objects -. .. Clean the database (SAPDATA1.Click on change authorization tab -> X .. Chars. We have another button Object Changeability with this we can give the object as a edit compatibility.Info Object . Note: Every user will have the default tcodes (SU53. SAPDATA2... Info Cubes. DEFINING CUSTOM AUTHORIZATION Goto RSA1 .Add manually .) . 19-Aug-09 SYSTEM COPY (FOR BI SYSTEM) 1. SU56.give the object which is authorization relevant ..We can also include authorization object in a Transaction SU24..Select the object click on Truck BEX we can transport in this way. Pre-Steps on the target system (The tables/ Data that need to be restored after a system copy) 3.Goto Business explorer tab Authorization Check relevant. Now Goto > PFCG -...282 In order to protect the reports at object and field level we need to make them authorization relevant in RSA1 where as SU20 in R/3.. It is also use to define key figures. Save..Include Authorization object manually or .Goto Authorization Table .Transport Connection . PFCG will defaultly we need to use. SU3). Take the backup f the production system (Source) 2.RC .. Info Objects.Define Role -.Change .Select the grouping . Now Goto > RSECADMIN > Maintain > Create Give the description . We need to provide this to every user.. In RSA1 .Use Object Changeability tab in RSA1 to ensure that the object can be modified in PRD system. DSO.BI Content .do the user comparison.Assign the user . It is also use to define the transport connections and editability in the Target systems.In the next screen .Perform user comparison Goto PFCG .Collect them in package and transport -.Save and generate the profile in PFCG and assign the role to the user.

. Remote_OS_Authenticate = True 3. 6. SAPSR3 is the schema user whose password stores in table SAPUSER which is owned by OPS$<hostname>\SIDADM Note: OPS$ mechanism provides a means to connect to the database without any password i. Up to 4. Process relogins to the database with user SAPSR3 who owns the complete SAP database. user with prefix OPS$. When the user log in with userid/ password/ mandt/ language it goes to the table USR02 (Internal security of SAP) to validate users. 5...0) on wards SAPSR3 is the owner of the database for ABAP. From Netweaver 04S (WebAS 7. SAPSR3DB is for the JAVA system. up to ECC5. Run "Oradbusr. c.. SQL> select bname from SAPSR3... User i..283 SQL> Select username from DBA_USER. Now the user can access the complete SAP Schema.sql (Change the SID and path name of datafiles accordingly) 6.. The OS user is created in the database with prefix OPS$(OS Username). SQL> Select table_name from dba_tables where owner = 'OPS$willsys99\NWADM'. 4.sql" to setup permissions on the database to create OPS$USERS a.0 SAP<SID> is the owner of the database...USR02. 4. Remove the entries before "startup nomount" and after "Characteristics WE8DEC' Run Control file on the target system 7.e.e. Mechanism: 1.) 5.6c SAPR3 is the owner of the database. work process connects to the database as user "OPS$<Hostname>\SIDADM to get SAPSR3's password. .. b. SAPDATA2.. 2. Generate control file (Alter database backup control file to trace) A trace file is generated in saptrace directory Rename the file to control.... SQL> select count * from dba_table where owner = 'SAPSR3'. The Process gets the password and disconnects the session. The connection is only possible when . Restore the database from backup /or physical copy of the datafiles (SAPDATA1.

Change password .. 1. How can you achieve this? This will be achieved from SECATT Tcode. Export that data as excel sheet. SAVE Goto that particular SU01. If it is manual we need to change in two tables. Truncate the table RFCDES. DBA_USERS 2. Change .com/ecatt ------------------SM35 Create new recording .Save.give the record name. Click on Execute F3 In the main screen >> In the toll bar. Change the password & username and . Now go to change mode > click on Pattern www. SQL> Insert into table 'OPS$<hostname>/SIDADM'.Give tcode SU01 .284 Note: If any of the 1-5 fails then R3Trans -d results (0012) snote : 400241 SAPSR3 password resides in two tables. SAPUSR TABLE SAP recommends to change the schema user password using BRTOOLS/ SAPDBA. This is sued to truncate all the RFC connections. Or You have different users with different roles and profiles..SAPUSER values SQL> Alter user SAPSR3 identified by "New password" When you insert password it is alphanumeric(It will be in the encrypted format after restart) Goto > Tcode SECATT Test [ ] create Description [ ] Component [BC] Question: We have 300 user and every month their password needs to be changed.erpgenic. ------------------Ensure that R3Trans -d results in 0000 POST ACTIVITIES 1. If not the restore system behaves as a source system and triggers the jobs. [SAVE] . Now goto SM35 you will find all the activities on SU01.

extended and roll memory sequentially where as dialogue uses roll memory. SMQ1. BTC uses Dialogue uses abap/heap_area_nondia where as abap/heap_area_dia .RFCDES. queries. Use 1. system specific programs. SLICENSE. reports transactions.Is a report to pause the background jobs BTCTRNS2 SM37 . If the memory is not sufficient in both the cases the process gets terminated or hangs up. For this we need to create a self RFC. Screenshots. Pre-Activities SM51 .Logon Load Balancing RZ04 .All the clients SMLG . Specify the RFC name in FINB_TR_DEST. Table . RFCDES. SQL> Insert into "OPS$willsys99\NWDADM".Global Instance SCC4 .'ADMIN123'.TOC (SE01) Transport of copies 2.sapuser values < 'SAUSER'.285 SQL> Truncate table SAPSR3. Alternatively you can set rdisp/ wp_no_btc=0 before you start the system or set the time to rdisp/btctime = 0 (Don't worry as SICK results in error) 3. Programs .Operation Modes STMS .Profiles.List of Background Jobs RZ11 .Transport Group BTCTRNS1 . 2. While client copy in ECC error: FINB_TR_DEST type 3. extended and heap memory. etc. 20-Aug-09 BI MONITORING BI uses batch processes to execute the reports. which consumes more time and resources. CDCLS(Cluster Table) we can truncate strictly Backup need to take USR02. SMQ2.Relocation of objects SE01(Relocation of objects) 3. STMS configuration. DBLS (Used to change logical system names) Client information. Technically batch process uses heap memory.

286 ST03n is used to identify the response time of the users, Transaction of reports and processes. Response time depends upon the data to be fetched, query being used, or the duration of the report. (From Date - To Date) Scheduled: When the jobs are defined the status is scheduled. Released: When the execution time is specified for a defined job then its status is released to execute at a point of time. Ready: When the specified time elapses then the status will be ready. Process Flow 1. BTC jobs are defined in SM36 2. The jobs are saved in table TBTCT, TBTCS...... TBTC* 3. A background job SAPMSSYST which runs periodically for every 60 seconds or the time specified in the parameter rdisp/btctime = 60 Secs. This period job runs in the dialogue mode and collects the jobs and runs them into active mode which are in the ready state. Active: The job is actively running on the system. Finished: The job is successfully completed/ Terminated Cancelled: The job is failed The possible reasons for Job Failure: 1. The memory is not sufficient 2. User authentication/ authorizations/ validity ......... issues 3. The variants are not properly defined. Variant is a selection criteria to provide the inputs runtime without user intervention. 4. The dependent jobs are not completed in the process. 5. Database specific issues related to space during the data extraction from backend system. 6. File system issues when extracting the data from flat files (File corrupted, file not opened, file system permissions are not as per ETL format. CDCLS is the cluster table which is having huge data DB02 - We can find the top 50 Tables. TCodes RRMX - It is used to start the business explorer and analyzer. RSRV - To repair the info objects

287 RSPC - It is used to monitor the process chains and check for the links that are broken. RSA1 - ADW RSPC Variant RSPC Process Log Note: Each BI System has its own process before you start working ensure that you are well aware of the process of DTP, Source System, Process Owner, Critical Jobs and their priority and escalation levels. Capacity Planning: DB02--------- Space Analysis------- Identify top 50 table and record them every week to identify the growth of the table. (It is also used to identify the accidental data growth) ST04 : Buffer Monitoring ST30 : Global Performance Analysis 22-Aug-09

DATA TRANSFER TECHNIQUES RFC: Remote function call (SM59) it is used to call the other system using the gateway to fetch or send the information. There are 4 types of RFCs 1. ARFC 2. SRFC 3. TRFC 4. QRFC ARFC : Asynchronous RFC: It is used to communicate between two systems but the source system process may not get the acknowledge from the Target. Some times the data may be lost in transition. The source system process does not bother whether the information is received by the target system. It is similar to a post card. It is not reliable and consistent. SRFC: Synchronous RFC: It is used to communicate with receiving system and wait for acknowledgement. If the acknowledgement is delayed it will go into RFC/ Sleep/ CPIC Mode. It is reliable but the resource gets blocked at the target system. If the target system is not available (Example BTC Process waiting too long in the active state) - All BW Systems uses SRFC.

288 SM58 - To find all the IDOCS TRFC: Transactional RFC : It is an advanced version of ARFC. It is used to communicate with receiving system and if the system is not available it will generate a Transaction ID in SM58. and a background job RSARFCSE runs for every 60 Seconds. It is reliable, gets the acknowledgement and data transmission is consistent. Example: Central User Administration Parent client creates users and send it to child clients. If child client is not available it creates a transaction ID in SM58 and ensures delivery when the child client is available. QRFC: Queued RFC: It is an advanced version of TRFC to ensure the jobs are processed in a queue. To execute QRFC we have a job called QUIN Scheduler - We have SMQ1 (Outbound), SMQ2 , SMQR - Quin Schedulers QRFC generates the process of LUW's in the sequence. When the sequence is mandatory in the data transmission QRFC is recommended. SAP Implemented all the above services to ensure the quality in the data transmission. SAP named it as QoS (Quality of Service). SAP consider SRFC, TRFC and QRFC.

1. SRFC --- BE (Best of Efforts) - With best of efforts it will deliver to Target system. When you find BE it is SRFC. Majorly we are going to use in BI and XI Systems. 2. TRFC -- EO (Exactly once) - It checks exactly once. 3. QRFC - EOIO - Exactly once in Order. ALE: (Application Link Enabling): It is used to transfer two loosely coupled systems (SAP to SAP systems) Eg. BW to CRM; ERP to ERP etc. SALE/ BD64/ BD54 it is used to define the logical systems and sending/ receiving systems. Each system that participates in the data transmission is identified by it's logical system name i.e. SIDCLNTCLIENTNO. Transfer ----------- Exchange -------------- Transmission => Are Same And is recommended to define the RFC's using logical system name to uniquely identify in the landscape. 1. Define the distribution model (In Sale TCode) in BD64 (Change) - Create Model View - Give the tech name - Continue.

289 2. API's Application Programming Interface: It is an interface in BD64 select the model click on ADD API defined based on your application either to send or receive data based on the business it is called as BAPI. (Business API's). The BAPI will be assigned between the sending and receiving system

BAPI contains one or more methods. Methods are similar to function modules to perform certain tasks. EDI: Electronic Data Interchange: It is used to transfer the data between SAP to Non-SAP systems and vice versa. In order to monitor the EDI used TCODE WE05 IDOC: Intermediate Document: It is in the understandable format of both sender and the receiver. Non SAP systems could communicate directly with SAP systems. They required adapters (File Adapter, J2EE Adapter, IDOC Adapter, HTTP Adapter etc) When the supply chain market is growing the necessity of 'E-Commerce' Electronic business EB's) is gaining importance and the vendors, suppliers wants the documents flow electronically with out any paper In order to monitor multiple senders and recipients it will be difficult to use SAP Standard transactions, SAP standard systems and mechanisms. XI/ PI EXCHANGE INFRASTRUCTURE/ PROCESS INTEGRATION It is used to communicate between SAP to NON-SAP and vice versa. It communicates with both sending systems and receiving systems via Intelligent Broker. XI Communicates with out Adapter for the versions based on WEBAS 640 and above i.e. 4.6c is involved then it requires an adapter. SLD : http://<hostname>:50000/SLD

290

1. Why SLD is mandatory in XI? - SLD is to define technical system (Hostname) & Business system (Client) that are going to participate in Integration . - It is used to define the roles of business systems in the XI domain. - It is used to define the XI Domain - Architectural components need to be defined. Integration Directory is nothing but customization Integration Repository is nothing but Development. 2. How to open the XI home page from ABAP? - By using Tcode SXMB_IFR => To Open the XI Home Page. We have default user PISUPER Password : Master Password. Design means IR Customize means ID config time. 23-Aug-09 XI 2.0 very limited XI20 to XI30 is called as Migration. XI 3.0 very limited based on WEBAS 640 XI30 to PI7.0 called upgrade. PI 7.0 Immediate release on WEBAS 700 which required both ABAP & JAVA Environment. It required both command on ABAP & JAVA Environment. XI is Used to exchange the information between SAP to SAP and NON-SAP systems vice versa.

291

- XI/PI is an Intelligent broker to communicate with systems using adapter with RFC Mechanism...... (BE, EO and EOIO) - XI/PI has not penetrated into market because ALE, EDI, IDOC, file transfer, Batch inputs, BDC (Batch data transfer communication) are in place. To replace them we need a new server i.e. landscape (DEV, QAS, PRD) environment which is expensive and technology required.. Where as companies are habituated to use TIBCO, ROSETTANET etc. Eg. In India Reliance, Hero Honda is using XI3.0 Xchange Infrastructure 3.0 based on WEBAS 640 Process Integration 7.0 based on WEBAS 700 PI 7.10 based on WEBAS 710 PI 7.10 based on EHP1 WEBAS 710 It requires both environments i.e. ABAP and JAVA. XI Architecture: Integration Builder -------- Integration Server Integration Directory ----- Business Process Engine Integration Repository --- Runtime Work bench Central Adapter Engine. PI is deployed through Integration Repository (IR). - Integration Builder is used to build the objects that are required for Integration (Source and receiving system). It contains two areas IR and ID. - IR is often referred as Design Time (Integration Repository) which is used to create and design the integration objects. NOTE: XI/PI license is based on date transfer like size -- 2GB, 5GB, 10 GB. XI Uses global format (XML Format) Extensible Markup language with the help of SOAP (Simple object access protocol). XML is an industry standard which is in the understandable format (Using meta data (Data about data)) It uses its own tags <address>, <price>, <customer>, <shannu><willsys> - ID (Integration Directory) is referred as config time (Integration directory) which is used to configure the run time objects (Sender, Receiver, Interface, Agreements). - To avoid complex developments SAP Provides predefined XI-Content which can be deployed using Integration Repository. The content provided will be in ZIP format which contains ".TPZ" Extension.

292 Note: 1. How did you deploy XI-Content? Through IR. 2. Architecture of XI? 3. How did you apply patches? Through JSPM 4. How did you transport the objects. Extensions: CAR SAR JAR WAR SCA SDA EPA .ZIP EAR TPZ - Compressed Archive --- Mostly for Patches - SAP Archive -- Mostly for SAP Kernel. - JAVA Archives - Web Archives - SAP Component Archives - Deployable archives software SAP - Enterprise Portal Archives - Zip Files - Enterprise Archives - XI/ PI Content

Tools Visual Admin Tool. Usr\sap\sid\dvebmgs00\j2ee\admin\go.bat On UNIX ./go (JAVA parameter need to set like environment variable) Config Tool. Usr\sap\sid\dvebmgs00\j2ee\configtool\configtool.bat SDM Usr\sap\sid\dvebmgs00\SMD\remotegui.bat JSPM Usr\sap\sid\dvebmgs00\j2ee\jspm\go.bat NWA http://<hostname>:50000/NWA SLD http://<hostname>:50000/SLD Template config Tool.

Integration Directory User PIREPUSER . For XI we have XI Super and PI we have PI User Users in PI .Adapter User PIDIRUSER .ABAP Engine)? EP Url's IR http://<hostname>:50000/irj Useradmin: http://<hostname>:50000/user admin J2EE engine: http://<hostname>:50000 XI Url's IR: http://<hostname>:50000/rep (SXMB_IFR) Tcode ID: http://<hostname>:50000/dir (SXMB_IFR) Tcode RWD: http://<hostname>:50000/rwp MDT: http://<hostname>:50000/MDT .Integration Landscape user PISUPER .Integration Server User PILDUSER .You can find in SU01 -> PI* Press F4 PI_JCO_RFC .message Exchange Profile: http://<hostname>:50000/ exchange profile In order to ensure SOD (Separation of Duty) XI creates users during installation only. REP etc for user name analysis) .RFC User PIAF User . Users created in standalone JAVA & Integrated engine Administrator. How do you apply kernel? 4.Integration Repository user PIISUSER . UME in standalone JAVA & Integrated Engine (JAVA . DIR. J2EE_Admin? 5. Difference between SDM and JSPM? 2.Super User PIRWBUSER . Difference between config tool & visual admin tool? 3.Runtime Workbench user.293 Usr\sap\sid\sys\global\templateconfig Standalone Log Viewer Usr\sap\sid\dvebmgs00\j2ee\admin\logviewer\standalone\logviewer Questions IMP 1. (In the above user names take out PI and use the AF.

0 Install ABAP Instance (Central and Database Instance) Create a client and perform ABAP .Select ABAP. This can be installed at partner landscape. XI requires both ABAP and JAVA components. JAVA and process integration.294 Note: All the system that need to participate in the integration must be registered in SLD along with software component version and products. . Production Landscape .XI3.0 In PI7. Integration server to process the messages 2. This is used to communicate with XI/PI to transfer data to SAP systems. If the participating system is ABAP a technical system pointed to business system is mandatory.0 all the above can be selected during the selection of usage type.. XI Installation 640 .Post Installation Activities Install JAVA as an add-on on that client Install XI_Content Install Adapter Engine PI 7. There are two roles in the XI System 1. XI Landscape XI Usually connects to ERP and SRM There should be at least two systems in the landscape one for DEV and one for PRD. Application system which is a sender or receiver 24-Aug-09 PCK: Partner connectivity kit.

EP. BI maintains their own SLD.1 it is recommended to use NWA tool only (like creation of Users (SUSERS). MANUAL PROCESS. These can be performed manually or using NWA tool. Earlier these activities are performed during installation. . Check all the services are running from Visual admin tool. generation of roles and profiles and assignment of roles to users. 2. Post Installation Activities 1. You can use NWA Tool to perform the post-installation activities automatically. Note: CPIC_MAX_CON=500 (Environmental Variable) to avoid the error max connections reached. 25-Aug-09 1. now moved as a part of post installation activities. POST Installation Activities 1.295 XI. Note: In PI 7.

Execute transaction SWF_XI_CUSTOMISING to configure the basic settings for XI/ PI . Note: There will be only one integration server in the XI Domain that is used to process the messages. 4. 2.We can use ABAP/WEB to display the end to end monitoring of a message.remoteprofile Com. Assign application role to user group in SLD data Supplier service click on user group icon. Application system integration server.It is used to populate the monitoring into ABAP Engine. Config SLD . 12. .sap.e.lcr Com. RZ70 with the help of RFC "SLD_UC" 10.Use the URL: http://<hostname>:8000/sap/bc/spi_gate With user PIRWBUSER & password . 11.rprof.sap. Configure ABAP system to SLD using transaction.Define RFC type "H" INTEGRATOIN_DIRECTORY_HMI to refresh the service in J2EE Engine.sap.. 9.xi Note: Deploy service is also used to deploy small applications. Define RFC connections "T" from ABAP engine to JAVA Engine. AI_DIRECTORY_JCOSERVER: Points form integration server to the integration builder. Senders & Receivers are configured as Application System.It is used to set RFC destination. Create RFC connection of type "H" for PMIStore (Process Monitoring Infrastructure) . Time Unit. 13.Assign LCR roles to users (P1APPLUSER) 3. Use SLD data supplier service to populate information of JAVA engine to SLD Note: 9 & 10 are mandatory for all systems that are going to participate in the integration.sap. 8. a technical system with specific client. The Program ID corresponds to the entry under for the J2EE Engine (Used to refresh the runtime cache) AI_RUNTIME_JCOSERVER (SLDAPIUSER_<SID>. Assign roles to PISUPER (4 Roles) 7. Number ranges etc. . Assign user in SZDAPICUST (PIAPPLUSER with LCR Rights with assign password) 6. Define the role of a system in SLD.296 Com. LCRSAPUSER 14.aii Com. . Define a technical system in SLD & assign the product and software component. Define a business system i. Define RFC type "A" 5.

af.cp . Use RFC/ IDOCS to communicate with backend to import the IDOC/ RFC structure to use the sending/ receiving system data structure.Integration server & application systems are defined in SLD itself . If the integration engine is configured as an Integration Server then it is called as XI Engine & other are called as Application system (Senders or Receivers) Similarly as Master system in BI (RSADMINA) SXMB_ADM Configuration . software component. 16.0 So to .Integration Engine Configuration (Change Mode) Menu . Initialize integration Repository 2. Configuring Integration Server on ABAP Engine . Define URN (Uniform Resource Name) Com.tpz files . 4.sap to define the objects .XI Content contains predefined integration objects to avoid the design & development of objects. business system. . 1.Register Queues (Should say Registration Complete) 17. Import the design objects provided by SAP 3.Unzip the content into . .(Infocube objects) 5.So each system that needs to participate in the integration define itself with a system role. Import the landscape information for custom development.Change Global Configuration data Select the business system roles and save it.XI content should be relevant to the backend engine version ECC6.cpp to trigger SAL self registration.tp2 file The XI Content is available in the shipped DVD or download form the Market Place.Edit .aii. Importing content to Integration repository Resides at sys\global\XI\repository server\import\.In principle XI Domain is defined in SLD & associated.Each system is registered in the SLD. Message mapping . Set to integration server.Import Design objects Development. Triggering the self registration of Adapter Engine Deploy comsap. product.Manage Queues .Integrate Repository . .297 15. . define technical system. 6. Register Queues SXMB_ADM Administration . but ABAP engine process the messages flow between them using Integration Server. . 18.Tools .Execute transaction SXMB_ADM (Integration Engine Administration) Each ABAP engine is a Integration Engine.

Export XI Content 3.Java prog (IR)) ABAP . 4. 26-Aug-09 INTEGRATION REPOSITORY 1. Import the system landscape (Products & Software components) into Integration Repository.298 7. Go To > Int. Repository > Environment > Configuration of Integration Directory It is also JAVA webstart on all the client machines Business System . XI/ PI should be updated (kernel. Patches). Clear the cache if required for SLD Note: IR requires JAVA webstart which is around 30MB on each XI Consultant desktop. CIM should be updated before any other system in the landscape. Transaction SLDCHECK is used to check the SLD Connectivity 20. Import XI Content 2. Patching XI/ PI Use SPAM to patch ABAP Use JSPM to patch JAVA Maintenance certificate is mandatory for all the patches in NW04S SR3 form January 2009 onwards. Maintenance certificate locks SPAM & is valid for 3 Months. Generate proxy objects (sproxy in ABAP) (Tools. Transport Organizer User Interface INTEGRATION DIRECTORY It is used to define the configuration that will be used at runtime.. SLD. The interface objects are cached in the table which can be monitored by transaction. SXI_Cache (Status of XI runtime Cache) 19.SPROXY (Tcode) 8. Define the uniform resource name 5.

1. SF01 to configure & Schedule the archiving) 4. Goto : DB15 Tables in Object : SD_VDDAT 6. SARA. Party in a company customer. Configuring Logs severity Goto T-Code : SXMB_ADM Integration Engine Configuration Click on specific configuration Click on change .Process Monitoring Info.It is used to delete the messages (Activating the delete switch) . (In ERP we use DB15. 3. Schedule delete jobs Job Name: SAP_BC_XMB_DELETE_<Client> . Scheduling Archiving Job It is used to schedule the archiving based on time and date.299 The system that is defined in SLD (assigned with client no. Configure delete procedure in SXMB_ADM . interface. We can specify the sender & receiver whose messages can be flagged for archiving.The service defined in SLD.new entries Select the category Specify the parameter value QM1 . 5. Receiver Determination to define namespaces. Category : Parameters Monitor : PM2_Monitoring Tuning : EO_ 2. to a technical system). Defining Interfaces for archiving & retention period. Business Service . It is used to define the time period before it gets archived. When the data is not updated in the messages during runtime. Then we will go to ID to clear SLD.Each XMI Message in flagged for archiving or deletion upon processing. File. IX0S & DARK are third party tools for archiving.

Message Mapping Process Flow of Message The message is sent by a sender using by calling a outbound interface (Sending System). There are 6 Pipeline (Central. Central_back. receiver. Error Analysis Settings It is used to trace based on users. Sender_back. Argument: 3 If the message id is 235 then logging in 1 If client is 000 then logging is 0 Display pipeline definition. Create specify condition Username : DDIC Action: Trace level. 27-Aug-09 http://<hostname>:8000/sap/xi/engine RUNTIME WORKBENCH . It is used to process the message from Sender to the receiver. It uses pipeline call integration server. 7. client & condition also set for tracing. The message is received by the inbound proxy of the receiving engine & it acknowledges back to the integration server. The message is received in IE or Server by using Inbound with logical routing & the message is processed through the outbound processing using LTM. Sender.Logical Routing T . receiver_back) Each pipe line internally contains pipeline elements. Message processing is based on LTM L .300 It is used to delete the messages that are flagged for deletion.Technical Routing M .

The status determines whether the message can be processed or not.301 It is used to monitor the XML messages from one end to another end. End to End Monitoring COMPONENT MONITORING: (INTEGRATION SERVER) It is used to monitor the Integration repository. On day-day basis we need to identify the messages that are not processed and escalated to the respective trans. Sender sends the message to integration server. Message Flow: 1. 2. Messages can be filtered based on status. Component Monitoring 3. (Register in the SLD) . which will be displayed in the message monitoring 3. 1. XSMB_ADM Message Monitoring: It is used to monitor the XML message use transaction SXMB_MON1/ SXI_MONITOR to monitor the message or the web option (rwb0 to monitor the message. sender. receiver. this should be displayed in the message monitoring. Message Monitoring 2. The message is received in the inbox of the integration server. It provides the following monitoring elements. Integration directory Runtime Wrokbench SLD Integration Server Note: We need to see the icon as green Yellow means warning Red as error. It specifies where the message is stuck in the error category. The message is processed with receiver determination to identify the receiver who is configured in the integration directory. data and time.

TOO_MANY_RECEIVE_CASE_BE There should be only one receiver in a synchronous message. 6. It consists of various adapters (File Adapter. J2SE. Mapping Errors No_Mapping_Program_find (Indicates problem in the mapping programs) RFC ERRORS Check the RFC connectivity. No receiver . Check and refresh the cache using SXI_CACHE or check the configuration in the Integration Directory. Technical Routing: This is where the exact business system of a sender and receiver is identified. If third party adapter like Tipco is used. i. There are mapping failures (in IR). It is possible to define more than one receiver E010/ E0 Technical routing fails with message outbound binding not found.e. J2EE.exactly are the message has to be transferred.Thread Adapter Problems .case . Mapping: The sending message data structure should map with the receiving message data structure. SOAP. 5.Full disk or database errors.ASYNC . monitor the status of queues. Call Adapter: If required central. PI supports it. HTTP.302 4.cannot be resent. If receiver agreement not found than this error occurs. too many receivers are not allowed in BE SYNC (Synchronous) i. RINF. Interface determination Interface has to be determined so that the message will be pick by that API. adapter engine is called (CAE). 'BE' .Connection Exceeded (Increase the ICM Threads/ Soft shut down RZ10) ICM/ Min . BE . ICM . 7.restart not possible.e. ROSSATANET). QUEUE MONITORING SMQ1. SMQ2. Userid and Password. Gateway. if the error is like SYS_FAIL .

. WE05. IIOP and Telnet protocols.the SCS (System Central Services) for the AS Java. ● AS Java components (in the graphic on the right): ○ The Server Processes execute Java requests. A dialog instance with AS ABAP and AS Java consists of the following components: ● The Internet Communication Manager (ICM) sets up the connection to the Internet. The graphic below shows the components of the SAP NetWeaver Application Server (in grey). In addition to multiple dialog instances that execute user requests. ○ The work processes execute ABAP or Java programs. WE21/ To check IDOCS. IDOCS: If the messages are still processed using IDOCs use SM58. there is a special instance that contains the message server and the enqueue server . message exchange. ○ The SAP Gateway provides the RFC interface between the SAP instances (within an SAP system and beyond system boundaries). It can process both server and client Web requests. P4. Technical Components An SAP system consists of several application server instances. To retain clarity a few communication channels are not included in the graphic. HTTPS und SMTP protocols for the AS ABAP. ● AS ABAP components (in the graphic on the left): ○ The dispatcher distributes the requests to the work processes. It cannot process any dialog requests. ● Central services (message server and enqueue server) are used for lock administration. In AS Java the ICM supports the HTTP(S). ○ The instance controller controls and monitors the life cycle of the AS Java instance. We also need to refresh adapter cache in SXI_CACHE into adapter engine cache. and load balancing in the SAP system. as well as one or more databases. The SAP NW AS can act as a Web server or a Web client. More information: Internet Communication Manager (ICM) Work Process (BC-CST) SAP Gateway Java Cluster Architecture. If all the processes are occupied the requests are stored in the dispatcher queue. It supports HTTP. the ASCS (ABAP System Central Services).303 Check the adaptors and connection between IS. Receiver and sender. IDEX5 is used to identify the XML Messages (IDOCS) in the adapter.

304 Upgrading Integration Develop * Customization Basis Platform .

2.0 3. 3.. 7. Oil. 7.0 3. Insurance BI. 3.0 i 4.0 c 4. Non Unicode / Unicode 4.i BW Portals 4. . MM. 7. DB Independent 9.1c. Continuous improvement by releasing Support Packs. Supports MCOP [OLAP/ OLTP) Supports all kinds of interfaces Will use XI to communicate with other GUI Developed in PHP or JAVA .0 b 4. 3. HR.5. Intranet and Internet (Web based) 13.305 Advantages of SAP 1.5. 6. CO..1.1 12.0.7 ECC5 ECC6 ECC7 2. High level Security 5. Upgrades and Enhanced Patches 2.0. PS. 7. Exchange information between SAP to SAP and NON SAP 11. Netweaver 7.. FI..1 5.1a b c . OS Independent 8. Tightly integrated with rich set of modules SD. Unicode system (Multi language Support) . PM. 3..0.0.0 a 4. PI etc.I18n 3. Industry Specific Solutions 10. Supports (24/7 * 365) 6.0.

High Level Security (SOX) 15.. Chemical. BI. IS Textile. Solution Manager and CRM) ECC. Fabrication and Banking 17. Pharmacy. Supports all third party tools mobile. SMB (Small Customers) .sap. Insurance.Small Midsize Business BI (Netweaver) latest in BI Suite7 Notes / Packs Support Packs Solution Manager EHP Good Feedback from the customers Good service provider from service. XI. Oil. Installation of all the above components 2. Post Installation Activities + Specific post installation for (CRM.com Internet/ Intranet http://<hostname>:8000 EWA MCOD/ OLTP BASIS NETWEAVER Requirements in the Market Basis Consultant Netweaver Security Consultant Enterprise Portal Tech Solution Manager Basis: A foundation layer for all SAP systems and with out Basis there is no SAP System Role of the Basis Admin 1.306 14. 16..Enterprise Central Component .

Role Management 6.307 3.1. 5. 4. 12. 7.5. Customize and Development. 3.0. | Security | Different level of Designations in SAP 1. 3.0. 6. 4. Load Balancing 9. 13. Web Application/ Portal Engineer SAP Business object Consultants People Soft tech lead-security/ Portal/ Admin SAP MM Consultant SAP SD Solution Architect SAP Basis Senior Consultant SAP FICO Consultant SAP Security Engineer SAP Development Lead SAP Security Admin Lead SAP technical architect consultant SAP Abap Principle Consultant (Exp in Life Cycle Stages) SAP XI/PI/ Enterprise portal lead developer/ programmer SAP BW Migration SAP Basis & Virtualization Consultant Basis Layer up to 4. 4. Performance & Fine Tuning 7. 8.6) ECC BI B SCM A S SRM I S CRM Note: Application Server provides Internet and Intranet to BASIS SAP Web Application Server . User Administration 5. 2. 9. 16. 14. 11. 10. .Integration of BASIS and Internet/ Intranet all functionality of SAP defined in ABAP so called as SAPWEBAS ABAP SAPWEBAS JAVA to be more interactive through web. 15. 4. Patch Management 4.6D (3. Administration & Monitoring 8.

3. 710 PI 7. PM. 700. MM.0 SOLMAN. SD. WEBAS Basis Layer Netweaver 7.0. 7. MDM7. PS. PI7.SAP software change registration. XI Security WEBAS Java Security. EP ITS NETWEAVER is a PIPA Application Platform People Integration Information Integration Process Integration BASIS ERP Security SD. Multilanguage SAPWEBAS Application platform to host all SAP Application components. SSCR .0. CO.10 XI 2.0 SAPWEBAS ABAP Provides Business Functionality SAPWEBAS JAVA Interactive/ Dynamic.0. .308 Enterprise portal 640. SOX HR Security/ Structural Authorizations Netweaver User Management Engine J2EE Roles Single sign on LDAP User Administrative Monitoring BI Security. FI.0 (SAP Stack) BI7.0. PM.

and click (not double click) on the Database server and then click on release notes.6D and so on . libraries and tools How to know the kernel version of a SAP R3 system ? Goto transaction sm51. 4. /usr/sap/<SID>/SYS/exe/run—the directory that holds a local copy of all SAP instance executables. ..0B.309 24/Jun/09 SAP R3 4.5B. 4. 4... There you will see the SAP R/3 kernel and patch level etc.6B.

executables etc between systems in the landscape. To manage computer memory 2. Major functions of kernel are: 1. To control access to the computer 3. It provides set of services that can be used by programs insulating these programs from the underlying hardware. -SAPMnt: Is a shared SAP Mount which is used to host the directories related to SAP. To maintain file system 4. To handle interrupts 5. (It may be required to create SAPMnt in earlier versions but in the current versions based on Netweaver it is created automatically) SAPLoc in Windows This SAPmnt is shared because it needs to share the transports. or KERNEL: The kernel is the part of the Operating System(OS) that interacts directly with the hardware of computer through device drivers that are built into the kernel. profiles. To perform input and output services (which allows computers to interact with terminals storage devices and printers) and 7. To allocate the resources of the computer (such as CPU and input/output devices) among users.310 Kernel or Shell : The core that provides basic services for all other parts of the operating system. To handle errors 6. support packages. [Dev] ---------->[Qlty]---------->[Prod] SAPmnt .

SAP start ORA<SID> -.Multilanguage Support This requires additional 40% of resources. A server has its own address and sometimes multiple addresses. Interface / Screen Exports/ System Copies Kernel [ Dependent] . Earlier case Individual passwords need to be set but now day's only one Master password for all the userids.311 Default Users <SID>ADM -. and is its own machine. Multiple Components on a Single DB repository A host is either a client or a server. It provides access to services and information.For UNIX SAP SERVICE <SID> (OS Level Access Related to SAP) Sys system J2ee_ADMIN SAP* DDIC SAPSR3 SAPSR3DB Master Database Java Web SAP R/3 Unicode . A client accesses the servers. A host has its own address on the network. It requires its own address.

It process data rather than carrying data. DB] Multiple components on a Single DB SID .EPD EPDB SMNDB Owner 1.SAP<SID> First Shipment Customers . GUI Presentation All the passengers Application Resrv.150 Customers (Beta. App server doesn't contain any data on its own.312 Install Mstr Java Comp JRE Exports [ Dependent] [ Independent] [ Dependent] [ Independent of OS. Caching/ Buffers Note: If one App server is down no need to worry we can access another application server. . Counter <They do not carry Any thing> Database Centralized (Native form of Database) Mobile IE Debit Card ATM * Commit occurs then only amount (Synchronous update) will be debited from the ATM.SMN SID . Alpha Versions) Libraries (Linux) ~ Exe (Windows) R/3 Architecture Eg: Consider the Reservation Counter.SAP<SID> Owner 2 .

DB. Used to convert the data in to Native SQL Statements. Kernel Set of Executables (OS.Rarely changed. (database users) (Sap Users) SAP K E R .Run . Frequently accessed/ rarely changed (Master Data) Eg: Address.sqlplus "/as sysdba" Select username from dba_users. Unicode.313 Sql Server Oracle .Transact SQL . Company name.USR02. 32/64 bit dependent) \usr\sap\sol\sys\exe Start . It is intelligent to store the frequently accessed data as in Cache/ Buffer . Select BNAME from SAPSR3. Users always communicates in OPEN SQL which is SAP Specific format and not dependable on any database.Pl/ SQL Presentation Server: Submits the user request Application Server: Process the user request by interpreting the request and it has a queuing mechanism based on FIFO.

Specifies the installation success / failure .bck Sapappl0.tsk Sapappl0.log Sapappl0. Each task is commanded by . 2.314 DB OS Kernel Provides communication between SAP. Usr\sap\sol\sys\exe\uc\NT1386 25/Jun/09 Installation Logs C:\program files\sapinst_instdir\solman\system\ora\central\as Sapinst.log Sapinst_dev. Extracts the software.tsk. What happens during installation? 1.Structure of the DB Control.str .tsk file specifies the table/ index etc that needs to be created on the DB.xml -Helps to restart installation from the point where it is failed.log file Eg: Sasapappl0.sap.cmd Sapappl0. DB and the OS.com/swdc .also provides similar log in case of installation is aborted .log . Sapinst tool is used to install the software if required we need to download it from service.cmd file and during the process they writes into .xml Keydb.

It creates local groups and global groups and assigns them to users .Can create the userid Note: The user who initiates the installation should have the privileges as Local administrator to install the software. On Windows OS <SID>ADM is also responsible for database but on UNIX ORA<SID> is the owner to work on the database. AD Admin . Checks for user <SID>ADM (SAP System Administrator) Who owns SAP System and has all the privileges on SAP (Start/ Stop/ Environment) Domain Admin. Windows App Server <SID>ADM UNIX App Server <SID>ADM Database ORA<SID> Database <SID>ADM Note: SAPSERVICE<SID> is a service used to start and stop the services (Password never expires) <SID>ADM expires for every 30 days Eg: SAPOSCOL. (This problems occurs in a Domain) If the user does not exists it creates now.315 3. create users. ORA<SID> provides the runtime environment for Database. create services etc. assign groups. create groups. SAPSID-Instance Number 5..

SAPOSCOL is started first to check whether the resources are available (Operating system collector) It is used to collect the OS Utilization information and pass into SAP system.Domain Level Local groups . SAP<SID>_01.316 Global groups . It creates Services SAP<SID>_00.OS Dependent .Extract Kernel Executables (OS. From Computer Management -> Local Users and Computers we can view this Users Groups Services Creating directories Executables . SAP<SID> is used to start the SAP System.Create MMC for Windows to start/ stop sap system From cmd prompt Startsap name=SID Sets the user as nr=00 SAPDIAHOST=willsys28 SAPSR3 for ABAP SAPSR3DB for Java Engine .Master password is set accordingly to the company policy . SAPOSCOL. SAPCCMSR is an agent to collect JARM (Java Application response time Management) and pass it to ABAP CCMS (Computing Center Monitoring System) It is only used in JAVA and ABAP stack. SAPCCMSR are created and Run with user.DB Dependent Note: . DB) . if the service is not started SAP will not start.Locally SAP_LocalAdmin SAP_SOL_GlobalAdmin SAP_SOL_LocalAdmin 6.

.Installation Successful -- Installation Directories D:\usr\sap \USR directory is created with a shared folder SAP with shared SAPMNT & SAPLOC Eg: SAPMNT: SAPLOC: \\willsys\sapmnt ~ d:\usr\sap Both in Win and UNIX Only in Windows not in UNIX These are shared between systems and accessed locally and globally CCMS .TPL Tablespaces are just like almoras in a house. 9. Creates the tablespaces and datafiles on DDLORA.e. Upon running all the tasks the SAP Database is created and DBStatistics runs. 12. Now command files are created pointing to . Creates the Database and runs the scripts 8. 29769 ABAP related tables. Select count(*). DB Users are set with default password and SAP Application open RFC Connection. --.str and data on the exports 10. Query: Select count(*) from dba_tables where owner = 'SAPSR3'. The task files are created to create the tables and load the entries The task files are displayed as process on the installation screen "2 complete 3 running 4 waiting" 11. 7.317 Where the systems are installed with these schema owners i. owner from dba_tables group by owner. these users owns the respective databases.

318 PRFCLOG PUT SID HOSTS Trans CCMS .the complete SAP Application Server. .These are also populated from JAVA Engine (Generic Request Message Generator GRMG) .Used for alert logs that is populated by the service SAPCCMSR (Java Stack Only) PRFCLOG .is used during upgrade . ECC6.0. Installation Inputs SAPInst SID . Netweaver & CRM2007) I.is used to host the Developments PUT SID Hosts Trans 26/Jun/09 TASKS Installing SAP Component on SOLMAN On Windows/ SQL Server On Windows/ Oracle Windows/ DB2 Linux/ Oracle HPUnix/ Oracle AIX Solution Manager Connects all the three systems (ERP i.e.

319 Instance Number (Default 00.cmd.tsk. CreateDB. . Installation Logs Significance Sapinst_dir (Win. SharedMnt.str. utilization and upgradability Eg: root in Unix C:\ in Windows 3. log. Check the Hardware conflicts using OS Utilities Run . groups. Kernel (Extraction).tpl. Check the installation Logs 4. Updated Stats. Login to the system as <SID>ADM with the specified password 2. RFC's POST INSTALLATION To Check/ Test the installation Pre. RDBMS (Structures)) 1. Unix) Sapinst. .toc. sapinst_dev.cmd .Requisites for the Installation (JAVA. VMACHINE. Check the disk space. III. Services. . LoadDB. 01) Mater Password JCE Policy Path for the CDs. . II.DXDIAG Tool on windows to check the consistency of the hardware . . Directories. Linux. Installation Steps Users.

Check the USR Directory (SAP Instance files. App) predefined shared SAP Directory with SharedMnt. Trans Directory .Used for transporting the Objects Note: SID Specifies the Application Server and is possible to have multiple <SIDS> differed by the instance number Queries: SQL> Select status from V$Instance.. SAPOSCOL .Cmd .Used to collect the OS Resources 2.ABAP Instance Checks the DB Status 98-99 for routing . SAPSERVICE<SID> 6. and SAPLoc on windows Run .. Check the services and ensure that they are running 1.Which is mandatory to start SAP 3.msc 8. Check the groups SAPLOCAL_ADMIN SAPGLOBAL_ADMIN ORA_SID_DBA ORA-DBA ORA_SID_OPERATOR 7. Check the two Installation users on OS From Local Users and Computers <SID>ADM."\\Willsys\Usr" 9..320 5. SAP<SID>_00 . (SAPMnt). SQL> Startup followed by enter key SQL> shutdown immediate Note: Only one SAPOSCOL per system Max of 97 Systems on a single box SAPOSCOL_00 .ef | grep ora* On Windows services.Oracle Listener service should be started on the specified Port (1521-1529) 4.. Listener . Oracle Service<SID> Which is required for the Database On UNIX ps .

321 SAPOSCOL_01 .... DVEBMGS <Instance Number> DVEBMGS00 .JAVA Instance Note: Each SID uses different Ports Note: In the console tree of SOLMAN if all the three entries (SERVICES. <SID> Directory \usr\sap\<SID>...is a ABAP Engine JC00 .ERP (ECC5... \usr\sap\<SID>\config on a particular <SID> ERP <SID1> EP BI JAVA ABAP ERP<SID2> EP BI JAVA ABAP Note: Now-a-days its possible to install different engines as add-ons.SRM Suppliers ..used to specify the usage types that are installed on the system.properties .SAP Central Instance DVEBMGS00 contains J2ee/ SDM/ JSPM direntories then it is Integrated Engine (ABAP + JAVA) Note: Portal is only an application that is not based on ABAP Engine Eg: Consider Hero Honda Land Scape BI .. 10.. 11.Standalone JAVA Engine SCS01 . Config.PI Dealers Enterprise Portal .CRM .. USERS and GROUPS) are available then only we can confirm there are 3 Instances in one single system. Usagetypes.0) ...

cmd In order to start the system it looks in to the profile START_DVEBMGS00_WILLSYS28 <Instance> <Host Name> 3. sapstart. Checks the DB startup User issues a command called startsap 2. SYS Directory Contains executables and profile parameters to start and stop the system EXE Directory .cmd Note: Exe directory holds commands.hosts all the executables from netweaver exe dir contains UC/ NUC and 32/64.log (Standard Error Log) \USR\SAP\SOL\DVEBMGS00\WORK Eg : .log . It starts the database and writes the logs into the work directory Note: Stderr1.7 we can see only exe directory 13.322 12. i386/ ia64 In 4. It starts database by using command strbs. Work Directory This stores the startup and error logs -------------------Starting and Stopping SAP System Open up the services file from windows\system32\etc Startup: What happens during the startup? 1. scripts and executables \USR\SOL\SYS\EXE\UC\NTI386\ strbs.

. JAVA) 1..exe and writes Log file into dev_icm.e. 6. Installation Logs and then Significance . BI. dev_w0. 27/Jun/09 Note: Solution Manager Connects all 3 Sys .323 If the folder name changed as NTi386 to NTi3867 sap wont startup 4. Dialogue 3. Installation Inputs 3.exe and writes the log into Dev_ms. Database Server/ Instance 2. STARTUP Sequence 1. ICM 2. Starts Application Server (Central Instance) It is started by using msg_server. XI.0. ICM SHUTDOWN Sequence 1. Netweaver & CRM 2007) Netweaver components (EP. dialogue by using disp+work and writes into Dev_disp. stderr2.. Dialogue Instance 4. Starts internet communication manager by using icman. Installation Steps 4.. Starts the instance i. dev_w1.ERP (ECC6. Central Instance 3.. 5. Database. Pre-requisites 2. Central 4.

324 5. stderr*. Startup Errors and Resolution 8..v9start..log.4/2_12 7.. Installation post steps 1.asc 8. Sizing H/w (If user increases) 4. JAVA. IP Address/ Hostname .Strdbs. startdb.log.Ports should not be used 6. Starting and Stoping System 7. Installation Check/ Test 6. Swap memory 20GB RAM * 3 Times 5. Servicemarketplace/instguide 3.cmd We should logon as <SID>ADM/ ORA<SID> win/ UNIX to start database. strbs. Master Pwd.Start It reaches from the Startup Profile Start Database --.cmd .sql Listner control -> Lsnrctl Lsnrctl start Look for services Oracleservice <SID> and Oracle Listner. (Root and Administrator) . CD with Lable.Log Directories Why the Database is not started? 1.Log. SID.. Kernels SAPInst.we cannot startup the database Database terminated or Aborted which may requires restore & recovery.. Hardware 2. SAPInst_Dev. . JRE and set the path 1. Pre-Requisites 1. Installation Guide Www. CPIC_MAX_CONV = 500 CPIC Protocal (Common Programming Interface for Comm) In Linux # setem CPIC_MAX_CONV 500 and press enter Inputs: Steps: Logs: Checklist: Startup Startup Uses MMC ->Select SID -> RT Click . CRM/ SOLMAN/ XI.

ora-600 etc. File permissions on the profile/ file or Dir does not exist. Analyze Alert <SID>.log/ stderr log file It could not be started due to the following reasons. Dev_ms should be logged with customer key 5.com) 4... Certain scripts need to run after upgrade else the db many not start Export Oracle/ HP Unix Shared Drive Import DB2 Linux Kernel takes care of Migration Exports OS/ DB Independent CreateDB 5..log for Oracle errors like 0ra-1578. Starting Dispatcher and work process It uses disp+work to start the instance and writes the logs into stderr/ dev_disp/ dev_w0..log Starting Message server Started by using msg-server. . Memory could not be allocated as per the Oracle Profile Parameters 3. D:\ Oracle\ SOL\ Saptrace\ background\ alert_<SID>.. There is no sufficient space to start database 2.325 Database can be started using command startup or startup open SQL> startup Says. Causes: 1... Changes or corrupted profile parameters.exe and writes log into Dev_ms. Hostname/ Ip address change 2.Oracle Instance started.willsys. Port number 3600 is not available 3. Fully qualified host name FQHN dev_ms the host name should suffix with at least two dots (Eg: www.. 1. 4.

5.need to started on Linux Manually Refer. If any of the memory. <SID>_DVEBMGS00_Hostname Resides in \usr\sap\<SID>\sys\profile Default Profile Startup Instance Default profile is used to provide default parameters to start the system.4 It will write enormous log file into work directory. It provides value globally to all the instance when more than one instance is configured. dev_w0. dev_rfc. Set the parameters rdisp/trace = 0. Message server/ DB down 3.pfl 2. (Work directory can be deleted and recreated) Each work process goes to the db and db will listen the workprocess OracleSOL01TNSListner . DVEBMGS00\Work [ Available. System Profiles There are three profiles 1.dev_rd.1.log ] From this we can find when the system is up or down. Hostname/ IP Address change 2. . Default. Start_DVEBMGS00_Hostname 2. Dev_disp {started .connected} If the logs could not be analyzed to debug on error situations then Rt click on the process -> Select Developer Trace.3. buffer tuning parameters are not configured properly then instance could not be started.2.326 Various Reasons for the Failure 1. Dispatcher is started by using parameters from <SID>_DVEBMSGS00_hostname. Connection to Database failed due to authorization/ listner 4. We need to set this value to Zero immediately after debug.

Junior depending on the resources <SID>_dev.the profiles will be = 20 * 2 + 1 20 Instances * 2 (Startup and Instance) + Default Instance is a set of services with a dispatcher and work process. : There will be only one default profile.. dispatcher. ICM Startup. ICM startup. work process.327 Dialogue instance is something like extending reservation counters when users increase.. msg server. Instance profile depends upon the resources and it contains only dispatcher. DISP+WORK Instance profiles governs the instance such as work process/ memory/ logon parameters/ ICM parameters . Dialogue Instance Database Central Instance Dialogue Instance Dialogue Instance Default Profile: Start_Dev : Eg: Common Dress Code applicable to all Eg: Started Individually Eg: Senior . Startup profile will be available for all the instances and it contains database. work process. Say for Eg: 20 Instances .

6c. stop the database. Unix) . It is also referred as an Interface Eg: SAPGUI It has various versions: 4. 4.JAVA (Non Windows. Changes in SAP Parameters 6. During OS/ Database updates 3. Shutdown: 1. [SM02] 2.328 RZ03 . Notify all the users using email. Offline Backup Schedule Downtime 1. Stop the dialogue instances 3. stop the central instance 4. 640. there are three types SAPGUI for windows. HTML . Installation of SAPGUI Use the presentation server DVD to install SAPGUI.6d. Power Outages 5. 710 From Netweaver onwards to provide Web functionality <<internet communication framework>> ICF is provided so that the system can be accessed through web browsers. 28-Jun-09 Architecture of R/3 R/3 Multilayer PS AS DS PS - It is a GUI from where the user submits the request. Similarly Netweaver also include Mobile Infrastructure to provide mobile interface. During H/w Migration 2. JAVA.look for all the instances. Maintenance Activities 4. 700. 620.

sillsys.ini copy on the desktop.net) Ports 8000: ABAP .Mandatory 2.ini . SAPMSG.ini .ini .to access sap library 5.. SAPLogon. SAPRFC.for RFC these files govern SAPGUI and requires on each end user desktop based on the need.329 We need to maintain the following initialization files. Goto SAP Internet Communication Framework (SICF) Tcode: SICF Login to the system with the user DDIC with the Master password and create a super user similar to DDIC Use SU01 Tcode to create a user Note: Dont allow to perform by the DDIC SICF and press enter Under SAP ->Public ->BC (Basis connector) ->Rt click activate. open it and try to add some items. Goto SE80 and publish system/ Internal Note: Download SAPNote to activate SICF services..ini .ini . ->BSP (Business server pages) ->PING Activate All the functionalities over the web. 1. SAPROUTE. Activating Webgui/ SOLMAN functionality over the web.to access servers over router 4. SAPDOCCD. SAPLOGON.Used for load balancing 3. The system name should be FQHN (Fully qualified with atleast two dots eg: www. Solman\gui\press\gui\.

330 50000: JAVA ICM/ Hostname_full = willsys28.Client Oracle DB DI . It is used to store the Data. SE80 . Instance has its own instance number and it is possible to install multiple instances on single application server based on available resources. this parameter needs to be set in RZ10. CI . buffers.net. Instance is a service that represents the sap runtime.Select . Select .Internet service System Under object name folder "System" rt click -> publish complete service. Interpretation of user requests.webgui -> publish complete service Application Server: It is a physical entity used to handle the user requests. Queue mechanism based on FIFO etc. In sap terms it is an instance. Instance provides memory.Client .. Dialogue Instance: It is required to handle additional load on the SAP System. Instance is represented by its dispatcher & work processes (Disp + Work) Central Instance: There will be only one central instance in the sap system.sap. It provides Message server and Enque server along with other services. Database Layer/ Database Server/ Database Instance: There will be only one database instance in the SAP System. CPU.

Post-Installation Activities 1. STMS . SE06 Post installation Activity 2.331 We need to have a client to communicate with the Native SQL Each instance is monitored by its own DPMON (Dispatcher Monitor) For Net weaver JCMON ICMON [SMICM] ICM Monitor. Used to configure transport management system. 3. SE03 System settings(Modifiable and Non-Modifiable) In most cases PRD/ QAS are set to not Modifiable DEV/ SAND/ TEST are set to modifiable.

SM36 7. 6. Define work process. PFCG 10. SMLT or I18N 8. SM63 Import profiles from OS Level to DB Create Super Users Schedule standard batch jobs Additional Languages configuration Library configuration Define custom roles and assign to users. memory. buffer parameters Define client Client copy Define Operation modes to effectively utilize resources Assign Timings . SCCL 13.332 4. RZ04 14. SR13 9. RZ10 11. RZ10 5. SCC4 12.

16 SAP-BW .333 15.20 BI-Cont . Upgrade Kernel and SPAM version Kernel software and SPAM . Apply license through transaction SLicense (Access Market Place to apply License) 20.13 Add-on System-status: . BRTOOLS 16. SPAM Applying support packages 21. Install Dialogue Instances if required DB Client software 18.16 BASIS . Hotpacks In UNIX # mount IP: / oracle/dump /oracle/share 29/Jun/09 23.Component Version . Notes These are small corrections to the programs which are applied through transaction SNOTE .16 PI-BASIS . SICF/ SE80 Take offline backup Enable WebGUI 17. SMLG Configure logon loadbalancing 19.from System-component information We need to apply patches (Kernel Info) Database Kernel R/3 Kernel Patches that are applied online without restarting the System 22.35 ABAP .

Key and Requests .status .SLICENSE System .SAP Netweaver. Licensing 8 Licenses for SOLMAN 8 Licenses for Netweaver Valid till 31-12-1999 service.provide type of system like (SAPERP. Support Package Group of notes.com From the tab called . program corrections. bug fixes.334 24.Request Permanent license key .. 25. Enhancements and additional functionality.sap. Kernel. Support Stacks It is a group of support packages that includes ABAP. Basis PI Basis.Solmon click on mirror icon .c.SAP SOLMAN) TCODE . SAPM et.

OSS1 or SM59 Go through: SAPOSS .335 TCODE .Connection Test (Online SAP Service) Note: ARAMCO .is having the following system landscape SAND TEST CUST (DEV) QTST TRNG PPRD PRD MIGR/ PRL LICENSING .

BI. 000 2.8000 USD 10. 000 20.336 Standard License Maintenance License .000 ------------------------14.270 -50000 One License . SRM.5000 .SOLMAN. 68. ECC.04. EP.3 Months Each user license cost . 000 -----.000 2.4000 USD In India tag is 2000 USD for min number of users Eg: 10 + 1 is minimum Developers are charged differently 10 Users + 1 Developer 48000 * 50 = 12.--14.40000 USD . 000 .000 4% VAT 17% Maintenance /Year 48. MI License is user based Once the license key is received then goto SLICENSE Tcode -> INSTALL And click Install new licenses button . 04. PI.3% Service Tax + Customs 22% Maintenance cost across the globe except INDIA 5 22% Eg: 1 24% Telco Bajaj ARAMCO 2 26% .till 9999(YYYY) . 00.04.

Current version is 4. SID 2.pdf.4 weeks will be applied on PRD. Upgrade. . It is a free tool for only the customers provided by SAP. 2008 it is referred/ Renamed as Solman7.) .0 to ensure the consistency and bring all the components to version 7. Hostname 3.BI7. 1.Its an executable) Note: All the executables resides in .0 like ABAP 7.0 (Enterprise Portal) 2.0.. PI7..System Measurement for the users SUSER .BASIS 7. Suport.337 From cmd prompt Soladm> saplicense . url.get It checks for 1.0 (Process Integration).ppt. .0. Road map is step by step guide along with the required documents (. It provides Road map for Implementation...) /rmmain (ASAP Implementation Roadmap (V3. EP7.0.doc.Password never expires (Service Userid) SAP Solution Manager Note: Patches should be applied on Test/ Cust first after 3 . Hardware Key (Installed by SAP .6.D:\USR\SAP\SOL\SYS\EXE\UC\NTI386 Note: In Linux SAPDB/ MAXDB will be the cheapest SAPDB/ MAXDB is a DB that comes along with the SAP USMM .0 but from MAY.

we need to import into database level Utilities -> Import Profiles SM21 step by step process of startup Static parameters .doesn't require a restart.338 3.e. Required for generating upgrade/ Installation keys whereas Netweaver doesn't Requires a key. Every Implementation should be started with SOLMAN 4. RZ10 .. 30-Jun-09 SM36 Default Scheduling Totally 14 Jobs Will be OS level i.requires a restart Dynamic parameters .

Client . Dialogue writes the entry of the background job in the following tables TBTCP and TBTCS Each dialogue .339 --- Notes -- Note: First Message Server comes up. 2.150MB) 3.5 Users Each work processes (15 .001 Production Client Wont be used in PRD 6.dev_ms log file Network works for Message server and Message server searches for the least loaded dispatcher for load balancing SU53 Contains what all the notes.QTY -PRD . Post Installation activities should be done on 003 or other and not on 001 5. CTS is ran before STMS (SAP Transport Management System) 8. In the post installation only STMS is configured 7.000 Master Client CLient.066 Early Watch Client . programs owned by the user. DEV . 4. ABAP Instance comes with 0 Java instance comes with 1. next enqueue and then the dispatcher (Or) Goto . Dialogue work processes only communicate with the user. screens. 1.work directory .

340 3 system landscape DEV QTY PRD 2 system landscape SCC1 instead of STMS in case of 2 system landscape STMS QTY . Done from the Domain Controller 2.Night Dia to Bck SM63 . Dev will be the Domain Controller Some times whenever the system is always available say for eg: PRD will be considered to be DC.DbClk on Starting Interval and Ending Interval SMLT or I18N Language Installation Languages -> Classify Just provide the language ARABIC Then save it GOTO I18N System configuration . Used to transport Mass data @ single shot is a tcode to wake up all the programs availability for load balancing incase of two instances TP SGEN SMLG HalfPeak Hours 2 Background process Dialogue is converted to Background SR13 RZ04 Help (Before this we need to run an executable Maintain operation modes Operation mode .PRD 1.

.Select Interval and Assign .place the dump here 01-July-09 SM63 Select the interval Operation Mode .car.jar files (Parameter) .341 ADD And provide AR ARABIC Click on simulate RZ11 Parameter setting Display profile parameter attributes Zcsa\installed languages System Language \usr\sap\trans .

Configure the satellite systems (SMSY) .) 3.pdf.doc. . 2008 it is referred/ Renamed as Solman7..0 but from MAY.0. . Maintenance Optimizer (MUPZ) 5.0.0 (Enterprise Portal) 2. Service Level Reporting (SLR) 4.RMMAIN Solution Manager 1.) /rmmain (ASAP Implementation Roadmap (V3.. Road map is step by step guide along with the required documents (.0 (Process Integration).0 like ABAP 7.. Early Watch Reports (EWA) 6. url.BASIS 7. EP7. PI7.BI7. System Administration 3.0 to Ensure the consistency and bring all the components to version 7.6..ppt. It is a free tool for only the customers provided by SAP.0. and Suport.Oraarch (SOLMAN 4. Upgrade.0 SR3) CD .342 Note: Ports for Oracle Listener (1527 to 1521) Oracle\sol\sapbackup . System Monitoring 2. Required for generating upgrade/ Installation keys whereas Netweaver doesn't Requires a key. 5. Define a Solution and include systems for the following 1. Current version is 4. Every Implementation should be started with SOLMAN 4. It provides Road map for Implementation.

We can also document the hardware info. 2. Satellite systems are the backend systems which are defined in the SAP Landscape.interface to upload the documents without any virus. Client information etc. Solution Manager Diagnostics 10.. Business Blue Print phase (Solar01) 3. S_SMC_47000017/ CRM_DNO_Monitor Tcodes System should be registered with Solman to get the support 8. Support pack levels. Instance Number and Installation No. 3. Business process monitoring 11. Configured the service Desk to raise the issues as tickets and forward them to SAP if required.343 (Hanging systems in the landscape are called satellite systems) 7. VSCAN Tcode . These exe are required to be at OS level to startup the engine. Documentation (Final preparation/ Go Live are not captured) 9. Realization Phase (Solar02) 4. Hostname. Once the satellite system is configured there will be a trusted connection b/w the systems. Project Management for implementation 1. SAP Router 12. These are required to Monitor. Project Preparation (Solar_proj_admin) 2. Note: Except exe's everything will be stored in DB. 2. 1. sizing. H/w manufacturer and service Level agreements. Administer the systems from a central location called Solution Manager. Solution manager will be in a separate system. It is a landscape information provider and specifies the following. . System Landscape Directory (SLD) (SMD) (BPMON) Eg: Logon to Solman and administrate everything on the landscape Creating Satellite systems 1.

Put a check mark under SAPECC Server.Other Objects a pop up box is prompted to provide the inputs Provide SID.Select main Instance (RT Click) .344 Goto . Instance Number and Click on generate Installation or upgrade key. Subsequently we can define systems. MsgServer Hostname. servers. Satellite systems 3. Under relevant Continue --> . Instance Number).Create New System with assistance. Define the logical components 1. databases manually but. all of those are created automatically when a satellite system is defined.Goto . License Keys . Goto SMSY . 02-Jul-09 Configuring SOLUTION MANAGER SMSY Goto SMSY .It is mandatory to provide the installation key for all the Netweaver system without which the installation cannot be continued. Hostname. It is required only for Central Instance as it is tied up with the Message Server.SMSY and it is used to define the following. 1.Under landscape components . License Keys or / Installation Keys/ or Upgrade Keys 2. This key is called as Solution manager key and it is system specific (SID.Tcode .

345 Provide System Number Message Server Continue --> Generate RFC Destinations Assign Logical components Clients .800 Establishes put a check mark the connections put a check mark b/w R/3 and Solman 00 wilerpdev (Satellite system host name) Continue --> Select use scenarios: Select .Trusted system RFC Connection Continue --> Note: SOLMAN will connect to the back end system either trusted/ Logon screen Outgoing RFC's RFC Connection for Read Access Option User : Generate Username and password : SOLMANSOL001 Continue -->> RFC Connection for Change Management Option User : Generate Username and password : SOLTMWSOL001 Continue -->> RFC Connection for Trusted Connection Option User : Generate Username and password : SOLMANSEWD .

346 Additional RFC Connection Data Continue -->> System Monitoring Connection Check Mark . To create users and RFC connections in the Satellite system (it 3 times knocks the door of the back end system) and the 4th time need to provide the username and password for the solution manager. S_RFCACL in the role to create and communicate with the back end systems.need to provide the password for the back end system.Role Maintenance Provide the role name ZRFC and click on Single Role Prompts to Save this .PFCG .Just save it.Assign System Monitoring Continue -->> Complete -->> It brings up the password screen 3 times . SAP* and DDIC doesn't have this authorizations Goto . Provide the description and Click on Menu Tab . The user should have the authorization objects S_RFC.

specific role in the back end system.. back Click on User tab and assign the user the perform User comparison SMSY Continuation -Creating the Logical System Logical components are more important to communicate with specific client... .347 Assign the transaction by clicking Transaction Button and assign SU53 Tcode And click on assign transactions Click on Authorizations Tab and click on change Hit on manually and Include Authorization Objects Select S_RFC and S_RFCACL and save. Click on generate profile..

and regenerate RFC's and Delete RFC's 1. users are not existing Delete the user by ensuring that they are not pointed to any RFC and similarly RFC Connections as well. 4.RFC Configurations Even we can delete RFC connection from SM59 Note: Ensure that RFC Connections are created earlier. NAME. software components. Create systems. Administration. Create solutions (Early Watch Alerts) Solutions are required for Monitoring. . Created from V$DATABASE. Assign logical components 5. refresh data. Logical components specify the client number and the client role.0 Role Development Client 800 Assign Logical components to the system that is created. databases for the satellite system 3. Select the system --> Assign Logical Component --> Specify client --> Specify role etc SM59 . servers. SMSY is used for the following 1. Create products.348 Main Instance SAP ECC Server Logical Component SAP ECC 6. Maintenance optimizer etc.. Reporting. Configure satellite systems Eg: DESC V$DATABASE Select DBID. Change Management. Installation Key/ Upgrade Key 2.

sap. . Select solution landscape/ Maintenance (Search for SAP Router) 03/Jul/09 STMS . Click on Maintain Global data Type under the url as : service.349 Goto T-Code DSWP/or Solution_Manager 1. Click under or on Solution 5. Provide solution (Any name eg: ECC Solution) Lang . Solution Landscape which is used to include logical components (<SID>Client) so that all the above activities are carried out based on Solution. 3. Click on create to create a solution 2.Transport Management System From Menu Help -> Create Support Message and this message will land up in Solution Manager.com It is used to communicate with SAP Market place using SAP Router.English SMSY is called as system landscape where we try to include a landscape. 4.

. Service Level Reporting means Eg: Consider the domestic cylinder.e. Note: process will be slow down because of some expensive reports (select * from . .Spool bottle neck Critical Business Process Note: We can also integrate ticketing tools like Remedy. Solman has its own Service Desk (Ticketing Tool) Continuation from 02/Jul/09 T-Code: DSWP Click on Solution Landscape Solution Landscape Maintenance .Memory Bottle Neck . Database is filled 80% and need to send me an email..Expensive reports bottle neck ..) might be running even the processor is good enough to handle. Synergy with the Solution Manager. group_admin and SID Admin Note: System .Status (From here we need to apply patches) in Solution Manager Note: Maintenance Optimizer is used to find the next level of patches available.350 Note: Group users can only be modified by that owner of the group i.

Setting up Operations Goto: DSWP/ Solution Manager Maintenance Select the solution Click on operations setup Select solution monitoring Click on early watch alerts Create SAP Early watch alert Service Create .Task not assigned Red Color .Check Mark . If not Gowith SMSY and create the logical system Systems > Rt Click SU53 What user is having SU56 user buffers Yellow Color .Solution Settings TAB CCMS MONITORING OF EWA.351 Specify the Logical Component names and select the SID:Client Number (Put in Solution) Under logical component Select SAP ECC save it and click on Solution Settings .Task assigned but activities are missing Green .TAB Provide .Time interval 5 Mins under Monitor graph refresh period And click on CCMS MONITORING OF EWA (Early Watch Alerts) Select the system .Confirm Sap Specified Alerts . SM59 to verify this system is monitored by SOLMAN or not.Check Mark .save and activate Go back and save -goback comeback .Successful * Note: Through SMSY we can find whether the logical systems are assigned or not. NOTE: Interface Scenarios is for Project Management Save the solution and we should able to see the system/ solution in EWA and the system and server information should be fetched into solution directory.

SID SMD | INSTALLATION NUMBER 0020311138 | ACTIVE Check Mark Save it.Technical Infrastructure Display Topology It displays all the systems that are subjected for monitoring through this system. Once we save the solution under > Solution Structure > Copy Customizing | | The SAP System with all the details are displayed It is an option to copy the customizing of alerts From another solution. System Monitoring Goto: Solution Manager Select the solution Click on operation setup Select system monitoring Select setup system monitoring Select the SID and Installation number and it should be in Active. Provide Source| Destination If CCMS(Computing center Monitoring system) connectivity is in red or CCMS destination is blank then Goto RZ21 Monitoring Properties and Methods From Menu . RFC Destinations SM_WISCLNT001_READ SM_WISCLNT001_ONLINE . Users. Click on create Target SID . Reports. Sql Statements etc..352 The early watch alert service runs the transaction SDCC (Service Data Control Center) in the specified systems and brings the alerts based on SAPS threshold values Eg: Expensive transactions.

Create the subdirectory saprouter in the directory <drive>:\usr\sap.Save It.. Download the latest version of the SAProuter from SAP Service Marketplace. PI-BASIS etc.6 c is a Basis | A T C H E S | P Front End Netweaver7 ADP HP ARAMCO .exe to the directory you have just created. Prerequisites (Till 6th point is from SAP Website not from Willsys Notes) You have the latest version of SAProuter (available from the SAP Service Marketplace (http://service. Copy the executables saprouter.com/patches) The SAProuter version must not be under 23. 04/Jul/09 SAP Router It is an executable file downloaded from service market place. Procedure . 1. BASIS.User defined Alerts Select all the alerts and their threshold values . This is to ensure the compatibility between Solution Manager and the Satellite systems Eg: Back end 4. 2.exe and niping.353 This requires the satellite systems required patch up (ABAP.Dialogue process bottle neck Go through other options under Setup system monitoring | . ST-PI.). .. Read the README file in this package. For latest version we need to download from the Market place.sap..Printing bottle neck .Background jobs bottle neck . It will be in the run directory (Older versions).

3. you can get a version (may be obsolete) from your directory <drive>:\usr\sap\<SID>\SYS\exe\run.354 If there is no SAProuter there..\saprouter\saprouter. Locale -a will tells us what language the system will support .. SAProuter should not run under the SystemAccount. We have to maintain maintenance optimizer in Solution Manager and should get an approval to download SAP Router with our host name and IP Address (This info need to send to SAP) We have to download Cryptographic file so that it will connect to SAP System by converting the password related information. remove the definition of the service from the Registry and restart the host. Define standard service properties in Control Panel ® Services. set the startup type to “automatic” and enter a user. 4. 6. Keep the files in TRANS Directory and usr\sap\trans.. It is important that the parameters are within the character string enclosed in double quotation marks.. To avoid the error message “The description for Event ID (0)” in Windows NT event log. SAP Router are meant to login to our SAP System (remote) by the SAP to resolve any issue that may occur. 5.. If SAProuter has already been entered as a service with srvany.exe. you have to enter the following in the registry: Under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE  SYSTEM  CurrentControlSet  Services  Event Log  Application enter the key saprouter and define the following values for it: EventMessageFile (REG_SZ): .\saprouter\saprouter..exe TypesSupported (REG_DWORD): 0x7 Or In usr\sap directory create a sub folder called SAPRouter. Define the service with the following command: ntscmgr install SAProuter -b ..exe -p “service -r <parameter>“ Please note: The points stand for <drive>:\usr\sap <parameter> can be replaced by other parameters with which SAProuter is to be started.

Clarity. user is SUSERID. Service Desk It is a tool used to create messages from the satellite systems and monitor from the solution manager. . SPRO stands for .sap. S_SMC_47000017 (To Check the messages in the SOLMAN System) Or CRM_DNO_MONITOR Also refer BCOS_CUST table End user can create a message by using the T-Code: NOTIF_CREATE Note: SPRO1 is used to perform post installation activities for the Solution Manager. Earlier OSS1 is used to serve as a Market place to the customers but due to the network congestion between the customer and say systems SAP discontinued the usage of OSS1 and service market place www.service. if this RFC doesn't work we can't establish connectivity with SAP. Note: Any changes in the route tab require the router to be restarted.Online SAP Service AISUSER . Client 001.SAP Project Reference Object OSS . Synergy ticketing tools.com is recommended for connectivity. The major advantage of this tool is It picks up the complete information of the users-screen so that the processing is simplified.Maintain Optimizer Setup Provide SUSERID: without zeros With this user only the maintenance optimizer will work. SAPSNOTE and provide the logon security details that is language EN. The entries in OSS1 (It is a transaction) reflected in RFC Connection SAP-OSS Copy SAP OSS RFC to SAP-OSS. This tool is similar to Remedy.355 Checking the Routing connectivity with SAP Trans-OSS1 is used to configure the connectivity with SAP.

356 5-Jul-09 TASKS 1.Create Installation Base Initial data transfer for IBase . But when we install the system with lower package levels {Solution Manager 4. In the current version of netweaver most of the components are activated. SLR . SOLMAN_DIRECTORY Goto solution manager and use above tcode to find the solution.Activating EWA (Early Watch Alerts) 3. Administration 6.Service Level reporting 7. EWA (Early Watch Alerts) 4. Maintenance Optimizer. Installation Base We can use this to identify the installation base of the satellite system.Installation BAK ..BCSET . maintenance optimizer. change request management etc.0} with base level 6 then we need to activate upon upgrading the patch levels. Satellite Systems 2. /SCPR20 is a transaction which is used to activate the business sets that are provided in the system. Goto IB52 or DSWP Select solution Goto the menu . Service Desk . We need to activate business sets for service desk.Entry in Table 8. Solutions .Activating . System Monitoring 5.IB52 . MOPZ When ever we need Read permissions for CCMS monitoring we have to define topology.

de/swdc Support packages and patches entry by application group Maintain the table AISuser In order to maintain this table SAP_MAINT_OPT_ADMIN role should present. AIS user is used to maintain service market place userid to communicate with SAP and the RFC Connection will be SAP-OSS 06-Jul-09 Configuring Maintenance Optimizer It is a tool provided by SAP to ensure that all the support packages that are released after April 2007 related to Netweaver will be approved and downloaded through MOPZ we can add support packages to the download basket in the Market place. Goto TCODE AISUSER . Goto Backend system Create an RFC pointing to Solman S_SMC_47000017 to check whether the tickets from various systems are landed in Solution manager. Ensure that your solution manager is having support package ST[Solution Tools] minimum 10 level. Goto DSWP Select the solution Goto edit Create business partner Select the users .create That user will be a partner in our solution manager.e. if a service desk message is raised it uses the above RFC to land the ticket. Goto the Satellite system Tcode: SM30 Table BC_BCOS_CUST this table maintains the RFC connections for the service desk and CHAMS i.. https://websmp203-sap-ag.357 Creating Business Partner Use transaction BP to create Business Partner.

Assign SAP service Market place userid without "S000" SAP-OSS (RFC connection should also use the same userid to communicate with the market place) Activate BCSET or MOPZ is upgraded through Solution Manager Goto SPRO or SCPR20 activate. Create Maintenance Transaction 2.. Select the component and system 3. 1242931. 4. Project Preparation 2. Project Management SAP Solution manager provides project implementation tools through ASAP methodology (Accelerated SAP) ASAP Methodologies : It contains 5 steps 1. Allow the solution manager to choose the support packages or choose download manager to select the support packages.358 User Contact Person Sapuser 5013295 The user with which we login or the user in the user master record. 1296589 (notes) Start .e. Maintenance optimizer is only an authorized solution.. applying the patches manually. (Need to use carefully in the production system) 1.SAP Download manager . 5.. Business Blue Print phase . SOLMAN40_MOPZ_TTYP_SLMO_000 SOLMAN40_CHARM_PROXYFACT_001 Note: BCSET should be activated only once because it over writes the existing data Tcode: /$tab /$sync deletes the buffer on the application server.Download Manger. Goto download manager and download the files and perform the maintenance i.. Click on continue to confirm the files in the download basket.

Final Preparation 5. Golive / Support 1. Tcode: SOLAR01 is used to define the business blue print This is a phase where the required scenarios are selected.. The core team is defined from SAP. Business Blueprint In this phase the project is documented and the blue print gets signed off from the customer. FI. upgrade etc. Companies such as IBM may create a template project so that all the projects follows the same. Type of project Implementation. Project type can be implementation. Milestones are defined. Key process indicators. persons (Responsible persons). MM. etc also referred as Steering Committee (With some management skills) These committees assemble from time to time & review the progress of the project. Realization Phase 4. template or support. customer. Define the scope of the work under SCOPE tab Note: Include the logical component that is going to be involved in the project From system landscape tab define the logical system 2. Provide project name 2. Project Preparation: During this phase the business requirements are gathered and documented. 3. support.359 3. SAP uses tcode: SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN Click on create 1. HR. Select the solution: EWD solution for eg Hit okie 4. upgrade. business owners. implementing partner. Select Led by (Customer or SAP) Provide plan days say 2000 PD 5. Scenario is nothing but a group of transactions that are related to a specific module like SD. BI etc The scenarios are provided through SAP BPR (Business Process Repository) .

4. Unit testing: Used to test the customizing in its test client within the same system.Includes SOLMAN. The configuration takes place and change requests are generated in the target system subsequently a support message is raised to release or import the transport request before testing. EP etc. Testing Testing takes place either in the testing client.0D Basis 300 3.1I Basis 310 4.0E Basis 300 3.1H Basis 310 3.5B Basis 450 .0F Basis 300 3..Includes SOLMAN . Tcode: SCC1 is used to copy the requests between clients before change requests are released. Realization Is a place where the actual configuration takes place SOLAR02 Note: Solution Manager is also called as frontend platform to configure all the back end systems.ERP . .360 07-Jul-09 3. BI. integration client and test cases are built during the configuration only.0B Basis 400 4. Integration testing: It is performed in a separate system QAS Non _ Modifiable Note: Netweaver 2004 Netweaver 2004s Netweaver 2007 3. 2. 1.

PowerPoint's.00 (ECC 6.. Accelerators are nothing but predefined templates. Internal security is obtained by defining roles and assigning those to the users.Goto Project Prep and Db click .. Final Preparation: It is used to prepare the quality and as well as production system.20 4. both Legacy and SAP runs together for certain period of time.e.Enterprise Core components) 6.6C Basis 460 4.to apply patches.. GO-LIVE During this phase the system is subjected for parallel run i. MTP (Mote to Production) and readiness of production system communicating with SAP to conduct GO-Live sessions. CHARMS .0) .Modify a storage location) . filters and SAP Router etc. Service Market Place.00 Basis 7. word docs.00 Basis 6. firewalls. SAP Early watch report. The integration testing signoff from the users.User request a change (Say for Eg .Change Request Management System .361 4. External security obtained by deploying routers. MOM's (Minutes of Meeting) Etc.actually in RampUp SAP GUI FOR WINDOWS 6. proxy..71 Basis 6.RMMAIN ..Select Accelerator Note: Need to focus on these points considering Solution Manager 1. BCSET 5. 6. internal and external security. End user acceptance. url's.Select the ASAP Methodology .RMMAIN) It provides the complete implementation steps which are discussed above along with accelerators.(Solar_testplan) We can maintain the project documentation and the general documentation using the respective tabs. Post Installation Activities 3.0 . GOTO . End user training. Administration 4.40 Test Case documents .72 Basis 6.40 (ECC 5. Data Transfer to SAP system is performed periodically fro legacy systems and the legacy systems are discontinued in due course of time upon final acceptance from the business process owners. ROAD MAP (Tcode . 5. pdfs. Installation 2.From Menu GOTO . .20 5.

Issue/message closed .362 -. a change request to change location .Management approves location change .SOLAR01.Management declared that there is no change in location (Issue Closed) .Now it is also be treated as an Issue (Issue Management) .Mssg lands in SOLMAN .Based on the Priority approval for changing the location .Service desk message . Integration test ..change request submitted for unit test.

You're Reading a Free Preview

Download
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->